Key Benefits:
Law 56/2003, of 16 December, of Employment, establishes, in Article 3, that it is up to the Government, on a proposal from the current Ministry of Labor and Immigration, and prior to report of this Ministry to the Sectoral Conference of Employment and Labor Affairs, the elaboration and approval of the regulatory provisions in relation to, among others, occupational and continuing vocational training in the State field, as well as the development of such ordination.
Article 26.1 of Law 56/2003 of 16 December 2003, following the amendment carried out by Royal Decree-Law 3/2011 of 18 February 2011, of urgent measures for the improvement of employability and the reform of active employment policies, deals with the occupational training subsystem for employment, in which, since the entry into force of Royal Decree 395/2007 of 23 March, which regulates it, the forms of vocational training in the field of employment-occupational training and continuing training-have been integrated. This subsystem, according to the legal provisions laid down in the Organic Law of the Law of the European Communities, of Qualifications and Vocational Training, will be carried out in the framework of the National System of Qualifications and Vocational Training and the National Employment System.
For its part, the Organic Law of 19 June, the Organic Law, understands the National System of Qualifications and Vocational Training as the set of instruments and actions necessary to promote and develop the integration of professional training offers and the evaluation and accreditation of professional skills. The main instruments of this System are the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications and the procedure for recognition, evaluation, accreditation and registration of the same. In Article 8 of the Organic Law of 19 June, the Organic Law of 19 June establishes that certificates of professional competence prove the professional qualifications of those who have obtained them and that they will be issued by the competent administration, with official status and validity throughout the national territory. In addition, Article 10.1 indicates that the General Administration of the State, in accordance with the provisions of Article 149.1.30. and 7. of the Constitution and after consulting the General Council of Vocational Training, shall determine the qualifications and certificates of professionalism, which shall constitute the offers of vocational training referred to in the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications.
The National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, according to Article 3.3 of Royal Decree 1128/2003, of 5 September, which regulates the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications, in the wording given to it by Royal Decree 1416/2005 of 25 November, constitutes the basis for drawing up the training offer leading to the acquisition of professional qualifications and certificates of professionalism and the modular and cumulative training offer associated with a unit of competence, as well as other training offers adapted to collectives with specific needs. In accordance with Article 8.5 of the same royal decree, the training offer of certificates of professionalism shall be in accordance with the minimum quality indicators and requirements which guarantee the fundamental aspects of an integrated training system, which are established by mutual agreement between the educational and labour administrations, after consultation of the General Council of Vocational Training.
Royal Decree 34/2008 of 18 January, which regulates the certificates of professionalism, as amended by Royal Decree 1675/2010 of 10 December 2010, has updated, in line with the rules mentioned, the regulation of the certificates established in the previous Royal Decree 1506/2003 of 28 November 2003 laying down the guidelines for certificates of professionalism, which have been repealed.
In that Royal Decree 34/2008, as amended by Royal Decree 1675/2010, the structure and content of the certificates of professionalism are defined, from the National Catalogue of Professional Qualifications and the guidelines established by the European Union, and it is established that the Public Service of State Employment, with the collaboration of the Centers of National Reference, will prepare and update the certificates of professionalism, which will be approved by royal decree.
In this regulatory framework it is appropriate for the Government to establish eleven certificates of professionalism of the professional family Transport and maintenance of vehicles of the professional areas of Aeronautics, Electromechanical of vehicles and Body of vehicles that will be incorporated into the National Directory of certificates of professionalism by levels of professional qualification attending to the professional competence required by the productive activities, as specified in article 4.4 and in Annex II of the Royal Decree 1128/2003, previously cited.
With the entry into force of this royal decree, the new certificates of professionalism "Vehicle painting", "Maintenance of vehicle body structures" and "Maintenance of non-structural elements of vehicle bodies" replace the certificate of professionalism of the occupation of Chapista painter of vehicles established in Royal Decree 544/1997 of April 14, which, consequently, is repealed.
With the entry into force of this royal decree, the new certificate of professionalism "Maintenance of the electric and electronic systems of vehicles" which in it is established, replaces the certificate of professionalism of the occupation of Electricist/electronic vehicles, established in Royal Decree 545/1997, of April 14, which, consequently, is repealed.
With the entry into force of this royal decree, the new certificates of professionalism "Maintenance of systems of transmission of force and trains of motor vehicles" and "Maintenance of the engine and its auxiliary systems" which in it are established, replace the certificate of professionalism of the occupation of Mechanical of light vehicles established in Royal Decree 541/1997, of April 14, which, consequently, is repealed.
In the process of drawing up this royal decree, the General Council of Vocational Training, the General Council of the National Employment System, and the Sectoral Conference on Employment and Labor Affairs have been informed.
In its virtue, on the proposal of the Minister of Labour and Immigration and after deliberation of the Council of Ministers at its meeting of May 20, 2011.
DISPONGO:
Article 1. Object and scope of application.
This royal decree aims to establish eleven certificates of professionalism of the professional family Transport and maintenance of vehicles that are included in the National Directory of certificates of professionalism, regulated by the Royal Decree 34/2008, of 18 January, for which the certificates of professionalism are regulated, modified by Royal Decree 1675/2010, of December 10.
Such certificates of professionalism are official and valid throughout the national territory and do not constitute a regulation of professional practice.
Article 2. Certificates of professionalism that are established.
The certificates of professionalism that are established correspond to the professional family Transport and maintenance of vehicles and are the ones listed below, the specifications of which are described in the annexes that are indicated:
Professional Family: TRANSPORTATION AND MAINTENANCE OF VEHICLES
-Annex I. Auxiliary operations of maintenance in electromechanical vehicles. Level 1.
-Annex II. Auxiliary operations for the maintenance of vehicle bodies. Level 1.
-Annex III. Ancillary operations of aeronautical maintenance. Level 1.
-Annex IV. Maintenance of systems for the transmission of power and train running of motor vehicles. Level 2.
-Annex V. Maintenance of the engine and its auxiliary systems. Level 2.
-Annex VI. Maintenance of non-structural elements of vehicle bodies. Level 2.
-Annex VII. Maintenance of vehicle body structures. Level 2.
-Annex VIII. Beautification and decoration of vehicle surfaces. Level 2.
-Annex IX. Vehicle painting. Level 2.
-Annex X. Maintenance of electric and electronic vehicle systems. Level 2.
-Annex XI. Planning and control of the body area. Level 3.
Article 3. Structure and content.
The content of each professionalism certificate responds to the structure set out in the following sections:
(a) In paragraph I: Identification of the certificate of professionalism.
(b) In paragraph II: Professional profile of the certificate of professionalism.
(c) In paragraph III: Training of the certificate of professionalism.
(d) In paragraph IV: Prescriptions of the trainers.
e) In paragraph V: Minimum requirements for spaces, facilities and equipment.
Article 4. Requirements for access to the training of certificates of professionalism.
1. The competent labour administration shall be responsible for verifying that the trainees have the training and professional qualifications to take advantage of the training in accordance with the terms set out in the following paragraphs.
2. In order to qualify for the training of the training modules for certificates of professionalism in vocational qualification levels 2 and 3, students must meet one of the following requirements:
a) Be in possession of the Graduate Degree in Secondary Education Required for Level 2 or Bachelor's degree for Level 3.
b) To be in possession of a certificate of professionalism of the same level of the module or training modules and/or the certificate of professionalism to which you wish to access.
c) Be in possession of a certificate of level 1 professionalism of the same family and professional area for level 2 or of a certificate of professionalism level 2 of the same family and professional area for level 3.
d) Meet the academic requirement of access to mid-grade training cycles for level 2 or higher grade level 3, or have exceeded the corresponding access tests regulated by the educational administrations.
e) Having passed the test of access to the university for over 25 years and/or 45 years.
f) Having sufficient training or professional knowledge to enable training to be used.
Article 5. Trainers.
1. The requirements on training and professional experience for the delivery of certificates of professionalism are those set out in paragraph IV of each certificate of professionalism and must be complied with both in person and at a distance.
2. In accordance with Article 13.3 of Royal Decree 34/2008 of 18 January, they may be recruited as experts for the provision of certain training modules specified in paragraph IV of each of the Annexes to certificates of professionalism, qualified professionals with professional experience in the field of the unit of competence to which the module is associated.
3. In order to prove the required teaching competence, the trainer or expert must be in possession of the certificate of professionalism of occupational trainer or equivalent training in teaching methodology for adult vocational training.
The requirement set out in the preceding paragraph will be exempt:
(a) Those who are in possession of the official university degrees of graduate in Pedagogy, Psychopedagogy or Master in any of their specialties, from a graduate degree in the field of Psychology or Pedagogy, or from an official university degree in the fields mentioned above.
b) Those who hold an official university degree other than those referred to in the previous paragraph and who are also in possession of the Certificate of Pedagogical Aptitude or of the professional titles of Didactic Specialization and the Certificate of Pedagogical Qualification. Also exempt are those who credit the possession of the Enabling Master's Degree for the exercise of the regulated Professions of the Professor of Secondary Education, Professional Training and Official Language Schools.
c) Those who credit a proven teaching experience of at least 600 hours in the last seven years in vocational training for employment or the education system.
4. Trainers who provide distance training must have training and experience in this mode, in the use of information and communication technologies, as well as meeting the specific requirements set out for each certificate of professionalism. To this end, the competent authorities shall develop specific programmes and actions for the training of these trainers.
Article 6. Contracts for training.
1. The theoretical training of contracts for training may be carried out at a distance up to the maximum of hours likely to be developed in this modality, which is established for each training module in the certificate of professionalism.
2. The training of training modules which is not developed at a distance may be carried out in the workplace or in face-to-face training.
Article 7. Distance training.
1. When the training module includes distance learning, it must be carried out with didactic supports authorised by the competent labour administration that allow a systematized learning process for the participant who must meet the accessibility and design requirements for all and will necessarily be complemented with tutorial assistance.
2. The training of the training modules taught through distance learning will be organised in groups of up to 25 participants.
3. The training modules which, in their entirety, are developed at a distance will require at least one final test of an in-person nature.
Article 8. Approved centres for your delivery.
1. Training centres and institutions which provide training leading to a certificate of professionalism must comply with the requirements of the trainers and the minimum requirements for spaces, facilities and equipment laid down in each of the training modules which constitute the certificate of professionalism.
2. Centres providing exclusively the theoretical training of contracts for training shall be exempt from meeting the requirements for spaces, facilities and equipment as set out in the previous paragraph, in any case ensuring that persons with disabilities are provided with the necessary technological support and the elimination of potential physical and communication barriers.
Article 9. Correspondence with vocational training qualifications.
The accreditation of the units of competence obtained through the overcoming of the professional modules of the professional training titles will take the effects of exemption of the module or training modules of the certificates of professionalism associated to those units of competence established in the present royal decree.
Additional disposition first. Level of the certificate of professionalism in the European Qualifications Framework.
Once the relationship between the national qualifications framework and the European qualifications framework is established, the corresponding level of certificates of professionalism established in this royal decree will be determined within the European Qualifications Framework.
Additional provision second. Equivalences with certificates of previous professionalism.
The equivalence to all effects of the following certificates of professionalism is declared:
| of professionalism to be repealed | Equivalent certificates of professionalism |
|---|---|
|
Decree 544/1997 of 14 April, establishing the certificate of professionalism of the occupation Chapista painter of vehicles. | Vehicle Painting. Maintenance of vehicle body structures. Maintenance of non-structural vehicle body elements. |
|
Decree 545/1997, of 14 April, establishing the certificate of professionalism of the Electricist/electronic occupation of vehicles. | Maintenance of vehicle electrical and electronic systems. |
|
Decree 541/1997, of 14 April, establishing the certificate of professionalism of the Mechanical occupation of light vehicles. | Maintenance of power transmission systems and auto-vehicle run-in trains. Maintenance of the engine and its auxiliary systems. |
First transient disposition. Modification of training plans and training actions.
In the training plans and in the training actions that are already approved, under the Order TAS, 718/2008, of 7 March, for which the Royal Decree 395/2007, of 23 March, which regulates the subsystem of training for employment, in the field of training of supply and establishes the regulatory bases for the granting of public grants to be financed, at the date of entry into force of this royal decree, that include training associated with the certificates of professionalism that are now repealed, it will be possible to replace this formation by the it is associated with the new certificates of professionalism declared equivalent in the second additional provision, subject to the approval of the Administration which approved it and subject to compliance with the requirements of the trainers and the minimum requirements for spaces, facilities and equipment laid down in the certificate.
Second transient disposition. Low in the Specialty File.
The specialties corresponding to the certificates of professionalism repealed will cause low in the file of specialties from the nine months after the entry into force of this royal decree. During this period these certificates shall remain valid for the purposes specified in this royal decree. In any event, the training actions linked to these certificates must be initiated before the end of the nine-month period.
Transitional provision third. Application for the issue of certificates of professional qualifications repealed.
1. Persons who, as provided for in the first transitional provision of Royal Decree 34/2008 of 18 January, have completed with positive evaluation the training associated with one of the certificates of professionalism of which they are entitled, during the validity of the certificates, will have a period of five years to request their issue, to be counted from the entry into force of this royal decree.
2. They may also apply for the issue within five years of completion with a positive assessment of the training of such certificates of professionalism:
a) People who, having taken part of that formation during the validity of the royal decree that is now repealed, complete the same after their repeal.
b) Persons who undertake the training of these certificates of professionalism under the training plans and the training actions that are already approved at the date of entry into force of this royal decree, pursuant to Order TAS 718/2008, of March 7.
Transitional disposition fourth. Provisional accreditation of centres.
The training centres which, at the entry into force of this royal decree, are included in the registers of the competent authorities and approved to provide training in the fields of training corresponding to one or more of the certificates of professionalism which are now repealed, shall be deemed to be provisionally accredited for the purposes of the provision of training actions linked to the certificates of professionalism established in this royal decree and declared equivalent in the second, prior provision. authorisation from the competent authority. This accreditation will have effects for one year from the entry into force of this royal decree and until the completion, if any, of the approved training actions. After this period, in order to be able to provide training aimed at obtaining the certificates of professionalism established in this royal decree, the training centers must ask the competent administrations for their accreditation, for which they must comply with the requirements laid down in the certificates.
Single repeal provision. Regulatory repeal.
The Royal Decree 544/1997 of 14 April, establishing the certificate of professionalism of the occupation Chapista painter of vehicles, Royal Decree 545/1997, of 14 April, establishing the certificate of professionalism of the Electricist/electronic occupation of vehicles and Royal Decree 541/1997, of 14 April, establishing the certificate of professionalism of the mechanical occupation of light vehicles, is hereby repealed.
Final disposition first. Competence title.
This Royal Decree is dictated by the powers attributed to the State in Article 149.1.1., 7. and 30. of the Spanish Constitution, which attributes to the State exclusive competence for the regulation of basic conditions guaranteeing the equality of all Spaniards in the exercise of rights and in the performance of constitutional duties; labor law; and the regulation of conditions for obtaining, issuing and approving academic and professional titles and basic standards for the development of Article 27 of the Treaty. Constitution, in order to ensure compliance with the obligations of the public authorities in this field.
Final disposition second. Regulatory development.
The Minister of Labor and Immigration is authorized to dictate how many provisions are necessary for the development of this royal decree.
Final disposition third. Entry into force.
This royal decree will enter into force on the day following its publication in the "Official State Gazette".
Given in Madrid, on May 20, 2011.
JOHN CARLOS R.
The Minister of Labor and Immigration,
VALERIAN GOMEZ SANCHEZ
ANNEX I
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Name: AUXILIARY OPERATIONS FOR MAINTENANCE IN ELECTROMECHANICAL VEHICLES
Code: TMVG0109
Professional family: Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles
Professional area: Electromechanical vehicles
Professional qualification level: 1
Professional reference qualification:
TMV195_1 Vehicle electromechanical maintenance auxiliary operations (RD 1228/2006 of October 27)
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0620_1: Perform basic machining operations.
UC0623_1: Unmount, mount, and replace simple mechanical elements of the vehicle.
UC0624_1: Unmount, mount, and replace simple electric vehicle elements.
General competition:
Perform auxiliary maintenance operations in the electromechanical area, meeting technical specifications, in safety conditions and under the supervision of a top-level technician.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its professional activity generally as an employed person, in small and medium-sized enterprises whose activity is the maintenance of vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, industrial vehicles, agricultural machinery, public works, boats and railway rolling stock.
Productive Sectors:
It is located in the industrial sector, automotive subsector and, in particular, in the following economic-productive activities: Industry of the construction of machinery and mechanical equipment, subactivity repair of machinery and other agricultural material; Sale, maintenance and repair of motor vehicles, motorcycles and mopeds; Manufacture of other transport equipment, subactivity construction and repair of ships; Land transport, subactivity by rail.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
-Adjutant in the area of electromechanical vehicles
-spare spare store auxiliary
-Quick mechanics workshop operation
Duration of the associated training: 310 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0620_1: (Transverse) Basic Machining (90 hours).
MF0623_1: Basic vehicle mechanics (90 hours).
MF0624_1: Basic vehicle electricity techniques (90 hours).
MP0189: Non-work professional practice module of auxiliary maintenance operations in electromechanical vehicles (40 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established in the set of the training modules of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Naming: PERFORM BASIC MACHINING OPERATIONS
Level: 1
Code: UC0620_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Establish the machining process in terms of cutting phases and parameters, ensuring the viability of the machining and achieving the quality of the process.
CR1.1 Part plane analysis allows you to determine:
-The succession of machining operations to be performed.
-The machines and tools to be used in the different phases.
-The clamping devices and cutting tools.
-The material to use.
-The final dimensions.
CR1.2 The determined sequences allow the machining to be performed according to the required standards and specifications.
CR1.3 The machining process gets the right quality and optimizes the times.
CR1.4 The machining parameters (cutting speed, advancement, depth, among others) are selected according to the material and the characteristics of the part to be machined, as well as the cutting tools (type, material, among others).
CR1.5 The process is determined by combining:
-The characteristics of the piece (geometric shape, dimensions, precision, weight, among others).
-The means available for machining the part (machines, tools, tools, among others).
-The availabilities of the machines at the time of making the piece.
RP2: Perform the layout of parts to proceed to the machining, starting from simple planes.
CR2.1 The layout provides the information that correctly defines the part for its machining (axes, drill centers, mechanization limits, reference lines, fold lines, among others).
CR2.2 The layout is performed according to the technical specifications and the specific regulations.
CR2.3 The marking is done with the established products and methods (paint, copper sulfate, bulk strike, among others).
CR2.4 The layout is done with the appropriate useful and according to the set in the plans.
CR2.5 The layout and marking are performed, with the required precision to achieve the expected quality of the machining.
RP3: Select the tools and tools needed for machining, depending on the type of part and the machining process.
CR3.1 The tools and tools selected are suitable for machining, depending on the type of material, required quality and availability of the equipment.
CR3.2 The manufacturer's specifications are taken into account to choose the tools.
CR3.3 The tools and tools chosen allow machining in the shortest possible time.
RP4: Run welded joints, which do not require great skill, applying the necessary techniques and following the technical specifications.
CR4.1 The welded joints are made by preparing the edges, fixing and giving the proper stiffness to the elements to be joined.
CR4.2 The consumable and the values of the operating variables are selected based on the base materials.
CR4.3 The welded joints are checked that they have no apparent defects and the obtained cords are repassed and end to achieve the required quality.
RP5: Run all machining operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR5.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR5.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective security rules.
CR5.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Materials processing parts. Saws, limes, gramiles, plot tips, threading equipment. Measuring instruments. Drill machine, riveting. Soft welding equipment, electrical welding equipment by coated electrode.
Products and results
Crafted, machined, welded parts. Defined methods, procedures, and sequence of operations.
Information used or generated
Work orders, manufacturing plans, simple, manual handling of the different equipment.
Competition Unit 2
Naming: DISMANTLING, MOUNTING AND REPLACING SIMPLE MECHANICAL ELEMENTS OF THE VEHICLE
Level: 1
Code: UC0623_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform primary engine maintenance, according to work orders, and with the prescribed quality.
CR1.1 Work instructions, both oral and written, are clearly interpreted.
CR1.2 The parts of the vehicle susceptible to damage in the development of the operations are adequately protected.
CR1.3 The components that affect maintenance operations are identified and the appropriate tools and tools are selected.
CR1.4 The primary elements (filters, fluids, hushed, straps, etc.) of the lubrication, cooling and feeding systems are replaced in accordance with the standards laid down by the manufacturer.
CR1.5 Waste, oils, filters, antifreeze, among others, are collected in the appropriate containers for further treatment.
CR1.6 Fluid levels are checked to be the ones set, and otherwise are filled to reach them.
CR1.7 The functionality of the substituted elements is checked to conform to the set parameters, and in case of not adjusting the top manager is informed.
CR1.8 The general facilities, tools and equipment are maintained and put to the point, collaborating with the rest of the staff, applying the required and/or established procedures.
RP2: Perform primary maintenance of the vehicle's suspension and wheel system, according to work orders, and with the prescribed quality.
CR2.1 Work instructions, both oral and written, are clearly interpreted.
CR2.2 The parts of the vehicle, which may be damaged in the development of operations, are adequately protected.
CR2.3 The components that affect maintenance operations are identified and the appropriate tools and tools are selected.
CR2.4 The place or place of work, the tools and the measuring equipment are kept clean, sorted and properly stored.
CR2.5 The suspension system components (dampers, springs, torsion bars, among others) are replaced by technical instructions and verifying that the new installed components meet the manufacturer's specifications.
CR2.6 The tyres are replaced and/or repaired following instructions, in accordance with the standards set by the manufacturer and verifying that they comply with the technical specifications.
CR2.7 The new tires are balanced with the appropriate means, according to the standards set by the manufacturer.
CR2.8 The functionality of the replaced and/or repaired elements is checked to be the required and, in case of failures, the top manager is informed.
RP3: Perform the primary maintenance of the vehicle's transmission and brake systems, according to work orders, and with the prescribed quality.
CR3.1 The work, oral and written instructions are clearly interpreted.
CR3.2 The parts of the vehicle, which may be damaged in the development of operations, are adequately protected.
CR3.3 The components that affect maintenance operations are identified and the appropriate tools and tools are selected.
CR3.4 The place or place of work, the tools and the measuring equipment are kept clean, sorted and properly stored.
CR3.5 The basic components of transmission and brake systems (transmission sticks, lozenges, shoes, among others) are replaced by instructions and verifying that the new installed components meet the manufacturer's specifications.
CR3.6 The generated waste, brake fluid, pills, shoes, among others, are collected in the appropriate containers for further treatment.
CR3.7 The fluid levels are checked to be adequate and, otherwise, the values determined in each case are returned.
CR3.8 The functionality of the replaced elements is checked to be the required one and, if not, the top manager is informed.
RP4: Run all maintenance operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR4.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR4.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective security rules.
CR4.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Elevators, oil extraction and collection equipment, brake fluid, coolant, wheel baler and balancer equipment, parts cleaning equipment, motors, transmission systems, brakes, suspension and steering, wheels, tools and specific tools of the manufacturer ...
Products and results
Primary maintenance, revisions, disassembly, assembly, and/or item replacement. Defined methods, procedures, and sequence of operations.
Information used or generated
Work orders, manufacturer's technical manuals, management manuals for the different teams. Guided computer media.
Competition Unit 3
Naming: DISMANTLING, MOUNTING AND REPLACING SIMPLE ELECTRIC ELEMENTS OF THE VEHICLE
Level: 1
Code: UC0624_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform the primary maintenance of electrical elements of the vehicle load and boot systems, according to the work orders and the prescribed quality.
CR1.1 Work instructions, both oral and written, are clearly interpreted.
CR1.2 The parts of the vehicle, which may be damaged in the development of operations, are adequately protected.
CR1.3 The components that affect maintenance operations are identified and the appropriate tools and tools are selected.
CR1.4 The place or place of work, the tools and the measuring equipment are kept clean, sorted and properly stored.
CR1.5 The ideal load conditions of different accumulators are backed out with the use of the battery charger.
CR1.6 The state of use of the batteries is verified by employing appropriate equipment and means (polymeter, densimeter, battery checker).
CR1.7 The basic components of electric charging and starting systems (batteries, alternators, starter motor among others) are replaced by technical instructions and in accordance with the standards set by the manufacturer.
CR1.8 The functionality of the replaced elements is checked to be the required one, and if not, the top manager is informed.
RP2: Perform primary maintenance of the vehicle's auxiliary electrical systems, according to work orders, and with the prescribed quality.
CR2.1 Work instructions, both oral and written, are clearly interpreted.
CR2.2 The parts of the vehicle, which may be damaged in the development of operations, are adequately protected.
CR2.3 The components that affect maintenance operations are identified and the appropriate tools and tools are selected.
CR2.4 The place or place of work, the tools and the measuring equipment are kept clean, sorted and properly stored.
CR2.5 The basic components of electric lighting and manoeuvring systems (fuses, lamps, headlamps, pilots, among others) are replaced by technical instructions and in accordance with the standards laid down by the manufacturer.
CR2.6 The simple elements of the auxiliary systems (fuses, horns, wiper engines, among others) are replaced by technical instructions and in accordance with the standards laid down by the manufacturer.
CR2.7 Conventional headlamp setting is performed with the appropriate means, in accordance with the standards established by the manufacturer.
CR2.8 The functionality of the replaced elements is checked to be the required one, and, if not, the top manager is informed.
RP3: Run all maintenance operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR3.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR3.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective security rules.
CR3.3 The contingencies that have occurred are communicated with the necessary promptness to enable their supervision and resolution.
Professional Context
Production media
Elevators, components of the different electrical systems, the regloscope of headlamps, cleaning equipment, tools and tools specific to the manufacturer.
Products and results
Primary maintenance, revisions, disassembly, assembly, and/or item replacement. Defined methods, procedures, and sequence of operations.
Information used or generated
Work orders, manufacturer's technical manuals, management manuals for the different teams. Guided computer media.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: BASIC MACHINING
Code: MF0620_1
Professional qualification level: 1
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0620_1: Perform basic machining operations.
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Apply manual machining techniques, select tools and tools necessary to perform operations.
CE1.1 Classify the different types of limes, taking care of their chopped and their shape.
CE1.2 Classify the different types of lijas and abrasives, taking care of their use.
CE1.3 Identify the different types of saw blades by relating them to the material to be cut and the cutting speed.
CE1.4 Relate the different types of bits with the materials to be drilled, explaining the parts that make up them and the angles that characterize them (cutting angle, flashing, among others).
CE1.5 Explain the drilling process, choosing the cutting speed according to the material to be drilled and the diameter of the drill bit to be used.
CE1.6 Explain the riveting process and the different types of rivets.
C2: Compare the joining techniques between parts in order to select the tools and tools necessary to perform the operations.
CE2.1 Describe the different types of screws, nuts, washers, and their threads by relating them to the possible uses in the car.
CE2.2 Make the calculations necessary to select the rod or drill according to the diameter of the thread in the hand thread.
CE2.3 Describe the different types of pressure rings, pins, fasteners, clamps, commonly used in the automobile.
CE2.4 Describe the different ways to apply tightening pairs.
CE2.5 Handle flat keys, star, cushioning, pliers, jaws, screwdrivers, glass keys and specific automotive workshop tools.
CE2.6 Describe the different types of joints and closures, which are used in detachable junctions.
C3: Handled with dexterity the electric and pneumatic hand tools used in the mechanization, disassembly and assembly of parts.
CE3.1 Select the electrical or pneumatic tool and its accessories, more appropriate to the process
CE3.2 Perform the machining, disassembly and assembly of the parts according to the established requirements.
C4: Interpreting parts and automotive technical manuals.
CE4.1 Explain the specifications of cotes, tolerances, finishes and tightening.
CE4.2 Interpret the composition of the assembly and disassembly processes of the pieces through their drawings or sketches.
CE4.3 Respect the assembly instructions described in the manuals.
CE4.4 Handle workshop manuals, coding, and part references.
C5: Operate with the devices, tools and tools, used in the measurement and checking tasks.
CE5.1 In practical, duly characterized, scenarios involving linear, angular, thread measurements, among others, performing different measurement procedures with gauge, micrometer, comparator, thicknesses gages, thread gages, explaining its operation:
-Choose the appropriate device for the type of measurement to be performed and the required precision.
-Calibrate the measuring apparatus according to patterns.
-Perform the measures with the appropriate precision.
C6: Operate with the soft and electric welding equipment by coated electrode without being required a great skill.
CE6.1 Relate the different types of base materials with the input and deoxidizing materials according to the type of welding to be obtained.
CE6.2 Describe the components of the electric arc welding equipment, as well as the operation thereof.
C7: Apply cleaning standards, waste collection standards and their classification, safety standards and daily maintenance.
CE7.1 Clean up shop, jobs, tools and machinery.
CE7.2 Make the automatic maintenance of machines, equipment and tools.
CE7.3 Collect and classify the waste generated in the activity, respecting the established rules on the storage of waste.
CE7.4 Identify all the safety standards of the workshop, individual and collective, applying them to the full extent, using appropriate clothing and PPE.
Contents
1. Manual machining technology and its techniques.
-Limes, lijas, abrasives, saw blades, bits.
-Basic rules for drilling and threading.
-Types of rivets and clamps.
-Basic rules for using cutting tools and roughing.
2. Technology of the detachable junctions.
-Metric threads, Whitworth, and SAE.
-Types of screws, nuts, and washers.
-Types of pressure rings, pins, clip, staples, and clamps.
-threaded technique. Pairs of Apriete.
-Manual, electrical, and pneumatic tools.
3. Notions of drawing and Interpretation of Planes.
-Dihedral system: lump-sum, plant, profile, and sections.
-Views on perspectives.
-Acutation. Symbology of Tolerances. Specifications of materials.
-Interpretation of parts in drawings or sketches.
-Plot on materials, techniques and tools.
-Technical workshop manuals. Parts codes and references.
4. Metrology
-Measurement techniques and measurement errors.
-Direct measure appliances.
-Measure appliances by comparison.
-Rules for handling measurement useful in general.
5. Soft and electric welding
-Soft welding. Input materials and decapants.
-Electrical arc welding equipment.
-Types of electrodes. Basic technique for welding.
6. Standards for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental impact in the automotive industry.
-Automotive workshop risks:
▫ Machine and tool security features.
▫ Handling loads and cutting objects.
▫ Security Senalization.
-Cleaning and maintenance of facilities, machinery, equipment and tools:
▫ Cleaning and order of work zones.
▫ Application of appropriate cleaning products.
▫ Collecting, sorting, and removing the waste. Containers and storage.
▫ Maintenance and order of the workshop tools, equipment and cabinets.
-Equipment for individual protection (EPIs). Collective protection equipment or measures.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Number of total hours of the module | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative module-MF0620_1 | 90 | 30 |
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
denomination: BASIC VEHICLE MECHANICS TECHNIQUES
Code: MF0623_1
Professional qualification level: 1
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0623_1: Unmount, mount, and replace simple mechanical elements of the vehicle.
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Operate with the equipment and means necessary to perform basic maintenance of the explosion and diesel engine according to established procedures.
CE1.1 Interpret the operating principles of two-and four-stroke explosion engines, diesel and gasoline, identifying their main components.
-Identify the elements of the engine cylinder and cylinder system.
-Identify elements of the air intake, turbo and collector system.
-Identify the engine power-on system elements.
-Identify the elements of the engine cooling system.
-Draw phase diagram of the cylinders and power-on ratio.
-Identify the engine's basic adjustment marks.
-Identify the elements of the air conditioning system.
CE1.2 In a convenient, well-characterized case of basic thermal engine maintenance:
-Clearly interpret work orders.
-Fill in the work parts, indicating repair times and consumables used.
-Verify check intervals.
-Verify the oil level and replace the oil level.
-Verify the antifreeze level and replace the same.
-Verify the level of liquid servo address and replace the same.
-Verify the pressures and temperatures of the air conditioning system.
CE1.3 In practical cases, properly characterized, perform the replacement of:
-Air filters intake, oil, fuel, air conditioning filters.
-Purgled diesel power circuit.
-Power-on plugs and heaters.
-Correas of engine peripherals (Excluded distribution).
-Cleaning or replacing water and oil cooling radiators.
-Cooling sleeves.
-Cooling thermostat.
-Cooling pumps with low difficulty.
-Purgled cooling circuit.
-Silent, exhaust pipes and their sections.
CE1.4 Check after repair and with proper monitoring, leakage absence and functional engine reset.
C2: Operate with the equipment and means necessary to perform the basic maintenance of the vehicle's suspension and wheel system, according to established procedures.
CE2.1 Identify the elements that make up the suspension system and wheels.
-Types of front and rear suspensions.
-Types of tires and tires.
-Marking of the tires.
CE2.2 In practical cases, properly characterized in vehicle maintenance, perform the disassembly, assembly and/or repair of:
-Damping.
-Suspension muelles.
-Torsion bars and stabilizers.
-Suspension balls.
-Wheels and tires, performing the balancing.
CE2.3 Check after repair and with proper monitoring, the functionality of the replaced components.
C3: Operate with the equipment and means necessary to perform the basic maintenance of the vehicle's transmission and brake systems, according to established procedures.
CE3.1 Identify the elements that make up the transmission of the movement in the vehicle.
CE3.2 Identify the elements that make up the vehicle's brake system.
CE3.3 In case of properly characterized practical cases, which lead to the revision and/or replacement of transmission and brake fluids in conventional systems:
-Verify the transmission and brake inspection or inspection intervals.
-Verify the lubricant level of change and differential boxes and replace the same.
-Verify the level of brake fluid by replenishing or replacing the required case.
CE3.4 In practical cases, properly characterized, perform the replacement of:
-Transmission Paliers.
-Drums and brake discs.
-Shoes and brake pads.
-Purge hydraulic brake circuits.
CE3.5 Check after repair and with proper monitoring, absence of leaks and functionality of the substituted elements.
-A brake test.
C4: Perform basic maintenance and daily cleaning of the basic machines and equipment of an automotive workshop.
CE4.1 Apply the rules of use and safety in handling machines and equipment.
CE4.2 Perform the operation and reset of machines and equipment.
CE4.3 Change filters, straps, and other consumable materials from the workshop machines and equipment.
CE4.4 Keep equipment clean and in order.
C5: Apply cleaning standards, waste collection standards and their classification, safety standards and daily maintenance.
CE5.1 Clean up shop, jobs, tools and machinery.
CE5.2 Perform the self-maintenance of machines, equipment and tools.
CE5.3 Collect and classify the waste generated in the activity, respecting the established rules on the storage of waste.
CE5.4 Identify the safety standards of the workshop, individual and collective, applying them to the full extent, using appropriate clothing and PPE.
Contents
1. Motor vehicles.
-Two-and four-stroke engines. Principle of operation.
-Main mechanisms: engine block, piston, rod, cylinder head, valves, distribution.
-Fuel injection and ignition systems.
-lubrication system. Oils and grades.
-Cooling system. Radiator, thermostat and antifreeze.
-Servoaddress. Liquid and straps.
-Air conditioning equipment. Coolant belts and gas.
-Start-to-zero teams of review intervals.
2. Suspension system and vehicle wheels.
-Suspension systems, types and features, means of verification.
-The tires and their characteristics, marking interpretation.
-Precautions for mounting and disassembling wheels, tires and tires.
-Wheel balancing and basic alignment.
3. Transmission systems and vehicle brakes
-Brake systems, types, and technical properties.
-Electronic braking aids.
-Brake liquid properties.
-Transmission systems and their basic repairs, location of components and usual repairs in the different transmissions.
4. Basic mechanical workshop machinery
-Technical characteristics, safety and handling of machines: Vehicle elevator, hydraulic jacks and tables, wheel balancer, brake meter, direction aligner, hydraulic press, oil and liquid collector, parts washer. Set to zero maintenance equipment. Workbenches, closets and tool carts.
-Basic daily maintenance or self-maintenance.
5. Standards for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental impact in the automotive industry.
-Automotive workshop risks:
▫ Machine and tool security features.
▫ Handling loads and cutting objects.
▫ Security Senalization.
-Cleaning and maintenance of facilities, machinery, equipment and tools:
▫ Cleaning and order of work zones.
▫ Application of appropriate cleaning products.
▫ Collecting, sorting, and removing the waste. Containers and storage.
▫ Maintenance and order of the workshop tools, equipment and cabinets.
-Equipment for individual protection (EPIs). Collective protection equipment or measures.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Number of total hours of the module | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative module-MF0623_1 | 90 | 30 |
FORMATIVE MODULE 3
denomination: BASIC VEHICLE ELECTRICITY TECHNIQUES
Code: MF0624_1
Professional qualification level: 1
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0624_1: Unmount, mount, and replace simple electric vehicle elements.
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Operate with the equipment and means necessary to perform the basic maintenance of the vehicle load and start systems, executing the operations with the necessary means and equipment, according to established procedures.
CE1.1 Know the main magnitudes, electric measurement units and measuring devices.
CE1.2 Identify the basic elements of the vehicle load and boot systems.
CE1.3 In practical cases, properly characterized, perform the disassembly, battery assembly, spark plugs and their cables, alternators and starter motors.
CE1.4 Check battery and electrolyte status, battery recharging.
CE1.5 Check after repair, and with proper monitoring, system functional reset.
CE1.6 Perform the operation of the equipment to be used in the different phases of the processes.
C2: Operate with the equipment and means necessary to perform the basic maintenance of the auxiliary electrical systems of the vehicle, executing the operations according to the established procedures.
CE2.1 Identify the basic elements of the vehicle's auxiliary electrical systems.
CE2.2 In practical cases, properly characterized, perform the disassembly, assembly, and adjustment of:
-Faros and conventional pilots.
-Lamparous and fuses.
-Bocins and wipers.
-Conventional switches and switches.
CE2.3 Perform the headlight adjustment operations.
CE2.4 Check after repair, and with proper monitoring, system functional reset.
CE2.5 Perform the operation of the equipment to be used in the different phases of the processes.
C3: Apply cleaning standards, waste collection standards and their classification, safety standards and daily maintenance.
CE3.1 Clean up shop, jobs, tools and machinery.
CE3.2 Perform in self-maintenance of machines, equipment and tools.
CE3.3 Collect and classify the waste generated in the activity, respecting the established rules on the storage of waste.
CE3.4 Identify all the safety standards of the workshop, individual and collective, applying them to the full extent, using appropriate clothing and PPE.
Contents
1. Basic electrical systems of the vehicle.
-Units and magnitudes (intensity, voltage, resistance).
-Simple measure appliances.
▫ Test and Polymeter Lamp.
▫ Battery Checker.
▫ Loader.
-Boot and load system. Batteries. Starter and alternator engine.
-Power-on system. Spark plugs, high cables.
-Fuses and Rels.
2. Auxiliary electrical systems of the vehicle.
-Mass system and hardwired.
-Faros and Pilots. Types of lamps.
-Clean motors, lift, closures.
-Basic maintenance operations.
▫ Changing lamps and fuses, loose ends and cables, or loose, sulphated.
3. Standards for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental impact in the automotive workshop.
-Automotive workshop risks:
▫ Machine and tool security features.
▫ Handling loads and cutting objects.
▫ Security Senalization.
-Cleaning and maintenance of facilities, machinery, equipment and tools:
▫ Cleaning and order of work zones.
▫ Application of appropriate cleaning products to the surfaces to be cleaned.
▫ Collecting, sorting, and removing the waste. Containers and storage.
▫ Maintenance and order of the workshop tools, equipment and cabinets.
-Equipment for individual protection (EPIs). Collective protection equipment or measures.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Number of total hours of the module | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative module-MF0624_1 | 90 | 30 |
TRAINING MODULE NON-WORKING PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES OF AUXILIARY OPERATIONS OF MAINTENANCE IN ELECTROMECHANICAL VEHICLES
Code: MP0189
Duration: 40 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Participate in customer support processes, accompanying the manager.
CE1.1 Logging the relevant data to perform basic maintenance of the customer's vehicle.
CE1.2 Handle in a real situation, work parts, and review interval sheet.
CE1.3 Once the work is done, complete the work and delivery parts.
C2: Participate in warehouse management, parts ordering, and consumable materials.
CE2.1 Perform the warehouse inventory.
CE2.2 Anote the codes, quantities and denominations in the order items with the available means.
C3: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE3.1 behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE3.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the work center.
CE3.3 Diligently undertake the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE3.4 Integrate into the production processes of the work center.
CE3.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE3.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Participate in the processes of customer support.
-Handling of personal data.
-Opening tab to the vehicle.
-I treat customers. Assessment of the information received.
2. Warehouse management.
-Inventory.
-Store types and shelves.
-Handling of parts and consumable materials catalogs.
3. Integration and communication in the workplace
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Tracking the regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS OF TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0620_1: Basic Mechanized | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent degrees • Technical and Technical Superior of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professionalism level 2 and 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical vehicle of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0623_1: Basic vehicle mechanics | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent degrees • Technical and Technical Superior of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professionalism level 2 and 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical vehicle of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0624_1: Basic vehicle electricity techniques | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent degrees • Technical and Technical Superior of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professionalism level 2 and 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical vehicle of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SPACES, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 | 45 | 60 | |
|
electromechanical workshop | 210 | 350 | |
| Store | 20 | 20 |
|
M2 | M3 | M3 | |
|---|---|---|---|
| X | X | ||
|
Electromechanical Workshop |
X | X | |
| X | X | X | X | X |
| Equipment | |
|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audio-visual equipment -PCs installed in network, canon with projection and internet -Specialty specific software -2 Rotuder-write Pizarras -Rotafolios -Classroom material -Table and chair for the trainer -Table and chairs for students |
|
electromechanical workshop | -Work banks with screws -hydraulic lifting table -Vehicle lifts -Soft tin welding equipment - Welding equipment by arch and with electrodes -Headlight adjustment equipment -Suspension bank -Tire and tyre balancer -Frenometer -Air conditioning load equipment -Strobe Guns -pneumatic emptying and replenishment equipment -Parts cleaning equipment -Brake Circuit Purger -Tool set and useful brake disassembly -Anti-freeze density checker -Cooling circuit pressure checker -Pressure check watch case -Basic electrical installations machines -Sierras, limes, grovels, plot tips, threaded, male, terrors and mands, calibers, micrometers, gages of threads and thicknesses, clock comparator. -Talent, Remachter, Hot Air Soplete. -Esmeril, Hydraulic Press, Hydraulic Crane, Hydraulic Cats, Borríquetes, Calzos. -pneumatic and electrical impact gun equipment -pneumatic impact carcase equipment -Workloads for tools and parts -Polimeters and Busses or testing tips -Battery charging station -Suspension of suspension springs -Games of all types of manual keys -Keys Multiple dynamometer -Jgo special tips impact -Jgo of all types of pliers and jaws -Jgo of all types of special tips, torx, allen, etc -Jgo of all types of screwdrivers -Destorbump -Scabocaos -Scissors, cutters, and blades -Jgo of hammers of all types, plastic and Steel -Cortacables, Pellable and Sealant -Paper, Film, Tape, Protective Bags -Clean point and containers. Daily cleaning tools -Locker room with lockers. Lavaeyes, Botiquin |
|
Store | -Store (or shelving) parts and consumable materials. -Specific installations: Fuel gas lines (oxygen and acetylene), compressed air line, Welding Gases, Aspiration exhaust fumes. |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units that must be available for the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces, will be sufficient for a minimum of 15 students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to the higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX II
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Name: AUXILIARY VEHICLE BODY MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Code: TMVL0109
Professional family: Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles
Professional area: Vehicle bodywork
Professional qualification level: 1
Professional reference qualification:
TMV194_1 Vehicle body maintenance auxiliary operations (RD 1228/2006 of October 27)
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0620_1: Perform basic machining operations.
UC0621_1: Unmount, mount, and replace simple removable elements of the vehicle.
UC0622_1: Perform auxiliary surface preparation operations.
General competition:
Perform auxiliary maintenance operations in the body area, meeting technical specifications, in safety conditions and under the supervision of a top-level technician.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its professional activity as an employed person, in small, medium and large enterprises whose activity is the maintenance of vehicles, automobiles, motorcycles, industrial vehicles, agricultural machinery, public works, boats and railway rolling stock.
Productive Sectors:
It is located in the industrial sector, automotive subsector and, in particular, in the following economic-productive activities: Industry of the construction of machinery and mechanical equipment, subactivity repair of machinery and other agricultural material; Sale, maintenance and repair of motor vehicles, motorcycles and mopeds; Manufacture of other transport equipment, subactivity construction and repair of ships; Land transport, subactivity by rail.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
-Adjutant in the body area
-spare spare store auxiliary
-Operation Glass Replacement Companies
Duration of the associated training: 310 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0620_1: (Transverse) Basic Machining (90 hours).
MF0621_1: Basic removable element replacement techniques (90 hours).
MF0622_1: Basic surface preparation techniques (90 hours).
MP0188: Non-work professional practice module for auxiliary vehicle body maintenance operations (40 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established in the set of the training modules of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Naming: PERFORM BASIC MACHINING OPERATIONS
Level: 1
Code: UC0620_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Establish the machining process in terms of cutting phases and parameters, ensuring the viability of the machining and achieving the quality of the process.
CR1.1 Part plane analysis allows you to determine:
-The succession of machining operations to be performed.
-The machines and tools to be used in the different phases.
-The clamping devices and cutting tools.
-The material to use.
-The final dimensions.
CR1.2 The determined sequences allow the machining to be performed according to the required standards and specifications.
CR1.3 The machining process gets the right quality and optimizes the times.
CR1.4 The machining parameters (cutting speed, advancement, depth, among others) are selected according to the material and the characteristics of the part to be machined, as well as the cutting tools (type, material, among others).
CR1.5 The process is determined by combining:
-The characteristics of the piece (geometric shape, dimensions, precision, weight, among others).
-The means available for machining the part (machines, tools, tools, among others).
-The availabilities of the machines at the time of making the piece.
RP2: Perform the layout of parts to proceed to the machining, starting from simple planes.
CR2.1 The layout provides the information that correctly defines the part for its machining (axes, drill centers, mechanization limits, reference lines, fold lines, among others).
CR2.2 The layout is performed according to the technical specifications and the specific regulations.
CR2.3 The marking is done with the established products and methods (paint, copper sulfate, bulk strike, among others).
CR2.4 The layout is done with the appropriate useful and according to the set in the plans.
CR2.5 The layout and marking are performed, with the required precision to achieve the expected quality of the machining.
RP3: Select the tools and tools needed for machining, depending on the type of part and the machining process.
CR3.1 The tools and tools selected are suitable for machining, depending on the type of material, required quality and availability of the equipment.
CR3.2 The manufacturer's specifications are taken into account to choose the tools.
CR3.3 The tools and tools chosen allow machining in the shortest possible time.
RP4: Run welded joints, which do not require great skill, applying the necessary techniques and following the technical specifications.
CR4.1 The welded joints are made by preparing the edges, fixing and giving the proper stiffness to the elements to be joined.
CR4.2 The consumable and the values of the operating variables are selected based on the base materials.
CR4.3 The welded joints are checked that they have no apparent defects and the obtained cords are repassed and end to achieve the required quality.
RP5: Run all machining operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR5.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR5.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective security rules.
CR5.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Materials processing parts. Saws, limes, gramiles, plot tips, threading equipment. Measuring instruments. Drill machine, riveting. Soft welding equipment, electrical welding equipment by coated electrode.
Products and results
Crafted, machined, welded parts. Defined methods, procedures, and sequence of operations.
Information used or generated:
Work orders, manufacturing plans, simple, manual handling of the different equipment.
Competition Unit 2
denomination: REMOVE, MOUNT AND REPLACE SIMPLE REMOVABLE ELEMENTS OF THE VEHICLE
Level: 1
Code: UC0621_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Unmount, mount and replace, accessory and guarnid elements that present a bolted, riveted, stapled or glued union, according to work orders and with the prescribed quality.
CR1.1 Work instructions, both oral and written, are clearly interpreted.
CR1.2 The elements to be replaced are correctly identified and determined.
CR1.3 The positioning of the replacement element maintains the homogeneity of the assembly and, if necessary, recovers the dimensional shape of the vehicle, according to the technical specifications.
CR1.4 The fixing cotes are obtained by positioning the element or from the manufacturer's specifications.
CR1.5 The paste operation is performed by selecting the appropriate products according to the materials to be joined and the efforts they must support by applying the established procedure
CR1.6 The bolting operations of removable elements are performed according to the technical specifications, using the appropriate brakes and applying the set tightening pairs.
CR1.7 The diameter of the drill is taken into account in the riveting and/or stapling operations, as well as the technical characteristics of the rivets and staples used.
CR1.8 The general facilities, tools and equipment are maintained and put to the point, collaborating with the rest of the staff, applying the required and/or established procedures.
RP2: Repair and replace the moons of a vehicle using the necessary means and equipment, meeting technical specifications, and according to the work orders and the prescribed quality.
CR2.1 Work instructions, both oral and written, are clearly interpreted.
CR2.2 The moons to be replaced are correctly identified and determined, as well as the type of anchorage (stuck, heated, among others).
CR2.3 The positioning of the replacement element maintains the homogeneity of the assembly according to the technical specifications.
CR2.4 In the disassembly of the moon to replace the leftover residues are removed and the putty cut, when necessary, is done with the appropriate means (thermal knife, piano string, among others), protecting the adjacent areas to avoid collateral damage.
CR2.5 The pasting operation is performed by selecting the appropriate products according to the materials to be attached and the stresses to be supported, and the described anchoring and sealing means are applied.
CR2.6 The laminated moon is repaired by applying the resins and repair products, and is subsequently polished, following technical specifications.
CR2.7 The repaired and/or replaced element is checked to maintain or recover the manufacturer's prescribed operability, tightness and soundproofing.
CR2.8 The general facilities, tools and equipment are maintained and put to the point, collaborating with the rest of the staff, applying the required and/or established procedures.
RP3: Run all maintenance operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR3.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR3.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective security rules.
CR3.3 The contingencies that have occurred are communicated with the necessary promptness to enable their supervision and resolution.
Professional Context
Production media
Pneumatic machine for cutting adhesives, pistols for application of polyurethanes, rivets, staplers, equipment for adjusting headlamps. Team of tools of the chapista, windy. Assemblies or elements of metal materials (capes, fins, doors, bodies, among others). Sets or elements of synthetic materials (fins, parolages, gates, etc.).
Products and results
Dismantle, mount, and if necessary replace simple removable elements: accessories, guarnishes, among others. Disassembly and assembly of simple elements that interfere with the repair of the body. Defined methods, procedures, and sequence of operations. Bolted or riveted elements. Glass elements glued.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders from the workshop manager, section manager, or a senior level technician.
Competition Unit 3
Naming: PERFORM AUXILIARY SURFACE PREPARATION OPERATIONS
Level: 1
Code: UC0622_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform basic vehicle surface preparation and conditioning operations, according to work orders and with the prescribed quality.
CR1.1 Work instructions, both oral and written, are clearly interpreted.
CR1.2 The equipment, tools, materials and auxiliary means necessary for the logical development of the work process are selected after being properly identified.
CR1.3 The surface preparation and the edge sanding are performed using the appropriate means and according to established procedure.
CR1.4 Cleaning, degreasing and decapting of surfaces are performed, leaving the same suitable to receive subsequent treatments.
RP2: Perform the masking and protection of the areas of the vehicle adjacent to the areas to be painted.
CR2.1 The zones to be protected are appropriately identified and delimited according to the nature of the jobs to be performed later.
CR2.2 The different techniques of masking are performed using the appropriate means, adjusting to the procedures and times stipulated.
CR2.3 The unmasked is done once the paint is dry, checking the total removal of the masked products.
CR2.4 The general facilities, tools and equipment are maintained and put to the point, collaborating with the rest of the staff, applying the required and/or established procedures.
RP3: Run all maintenance operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR3.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR3.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective security rules.
CR3.3 The contingencies that have occurred are communicated with the necessary promptness to enable their supervision and resolution.
Professional Context
Production media
abrasive, rotary, vibratory and roto-orbital livers. Aspiration plants. Aspirational planes. Degreasing and cleaning products. Masked products, equipment and tools. Sets or elements of metal materials (capes, fins, doors, bodies, etc.) Sets or elements of synthetic materials (fins, parolages, gates, among others).
Products and results
New or repaired metal or synthetic surfaces, to which surface preparation treatment is required. Surfaces sanded, clean and degreased. Masked and unmasked from areas surrounding areas to be painted.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders from the workshop manager, section manager, or a senior level technician.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: BASIC MACHINING
Code: MF0620_1
Professional qualification level: 1
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0620_1: Perform basic machining operations.
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Explain manual machining techniques, select tools and tools necessary to perform operations.
CE1.1 Classify the different types of limes, taking care of their chopped and their shape.
CE1.2 Classify the different types of lijas and abrasives, taking care of their use.
CE1.3 Identify the different types of saw blades by relating them to the material to be cut and the cutting speed.
CE1.4 Relate the different types of bits with the materials to be drilled, explaining the parts that make up them and the angles that characterize them (cutting angle, flashing, among others).
CE1.5 Explain the drilling process, choosing the cutting speed according to the material to be drilled and the diameter of the drill bit to be used.
CE1.6 Explain the riveting process and the different types of rivets.
C2: Compare the joining techniques between parts in order to select the tools and tools necessary to perform the operations.
CE2.1 Describe the different types of screws, nuts, washers, and their threads by relating them to the possible uses in the car.
CE2.2 Make the calculations necessary to select the rod or drill according to the diameter of the thread in the hand thread.
CE2.3 Describe the different types of pressure rings, pins, fasteners, clamps, commonly used in the automobile.
CE2.4 Describe the different ways to apply tightening pairs.
CE2.5 Handle flat keys, star, cushioning, pliers, jaws, screwdrivers, glass keys and specific automotive workshop tools.
CE2.6 Describe the different types of joints and closures, which are used in detachable junctions.
C3: Handled with dexterity the electric and pneumatic hand tools used in the mechanization, disassembly and assembly of parts.
CE3.1 Select the electrical or pneumatic tool and its accessories, more appropriate to the process
CE3.2 Perform the machining, disassembly and assembly of the parts according to the established requirements.
C4: Interpreting parts and automotive technical manuals.
CE4.1 Explain the specifications of cotes, tolerances, finishes and tightening.
CE4.2 Interpret the composition of the assembly and disassembly processes of the pieces through their drawings or sketches.
CE4.3 Respect the assembly instructions described in the manuals.
CE4.4 Handle workshop manuals, coding, and part references.
C5: Operate with the devices, tools and tools, used in the measurement and checking tasks.
CE5.1 In practical, duly characterized, scenarios involving linear, angular, thread measurements, among others, performing different measurement procedures with gauge, micrometer, comparator, thicknesses gages, thread gages, explaining its operation:
- Choose the appropriate device for the type of measure to be performed and the required precision.
- Calibrate the measurement apparatus according to patterns.
- Perform the measures with the appropriate precision.
C6: Operate with the soft and electric welding equipment by coated electrode without being required a great skill.
CE6.1 Relate the different types of base materials with the input and deoxidizing materials according to the type of welding to be obtained.
CE6.2 Describe the components of the electric arc welding equipment, as well as the operation thereof.
C7: Apply cleaning standards, waste collection standards and their classification, safety standards and daily maintenance.
CE7.1 Clean up shop, jobs, tools and machinery.
CE7.2 Make the automatic maintenance of machines, equipment and tools.
CE7.3 Collect and classify the waste generated in the activity, respecting the established rules on the storage of waste.
CE7.4 Identify all the safety standards of the workshop, individual and collective, applying them to the full extent, using appropriate clothing and PPE.
Contents
1. Manual machining technology and its techniques.
-Limes, lijas, abrasives, saw blades, bits.
-Basic rules for drilling and threading.
-Types of rivets and clamps.
-Basic rules for using cutting tools and roughing.
2. Technology of the detachable junctions.
-Metric threads, Whitworth, and SAE.
-Types of screws, nuts, and washers.
-Types of pressure rings, pins, clip, staples, and clamps.
-threaded technique. Pairs of Apriete.
-Manual, electrical, and pneumatic tools.
3. Notions of drawing and Interpretation of Planes.
-Dihedral system: lump-sum, plant, profile, and sections.
-Views on perspectives.
-Acutation. Symbology of Tolerances. Specifications of materials.
-Interpretation of parts in drawings or sketches.
-Plot on materials, techniques and tools.
-Technical workshop manuals. Parts codes and references.
4. Metrology
-Measurement techniques and measurement errors.
-Direct measure appliances.
-Measure appliances by comparison.
-Rules for handling measurement useful in general.
5. Soft and electric welding
-Soft welding. Input materials and decapants.
-Electrical arc welding equipment.
-Types of electrodes. Basic technique for welding.
6. Standards for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental impact in the automotive industry.
-Automotive workshop risks:
▫ Machine and tool security features.
▫ Handling loads and cutting objects.
▫ Security Senalization.
-Cleaning and maintenance of facilities, machinery, equipment and tools:
▫ Cleaning and order of work zones.
▫ Application of appropriate cleaning products.
▫ Collecting, sorting, and removing the waste. Containers and storage.
▫ Maintenance and order of the workshop tools, equipment and cabinets.
-Equipment for individual protection (EPIs). Collective protection equipment or measures.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Number of total hours of the module | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative module-MF0620_1 | 90 | 30 |
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Naming: BASIC TECHNIQUES FOR REPLACING REMOVABLE ELEMENTS
Code: MF0621_1
Professional qualification level: 1
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0621_1: Unmount, mount, and replace simple removable elements of the vehicle.
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the different types of joins of the removable elements, accessories and guarnities, in order to determine the methods, equipment and means necessary to perform the operations of disassembly, assembly and replacement of the same.
CE1.1 Explain the methods and techniques used in the preparation of joins.
CE1.2 Choose the techniques to use to make in the assembly of removable elements, accessories and guards.
CE1.3 Identify the tightness elements used in the different junctions.
CE1.4 Successfully interpret the technical documentation and its associated symbology.
CE1.5 Meet the standards of occupational risk prevention and environmental impact.
C2: Operate with the tools, products and materials, according to the established method, to disassemble, mount and/or replace removable elements, accessories and guarnishes.
CE2.1 Select and interpret the technical documentation, equipment, and means required to perform the processes between different alternatives.
CE2.2 In practical cases properly characterised by disassembling, mounting and/or replacing removable elements, accessories and guarnishes:
-Perform the disassembly of removable elements, accessories and guards, following technical specifications and using the appropriate means for each case.
-Successfully position (cotas) the replacement element for subsequent fixing, checking that the set retrieves its dimensional shapes.
-Apply the tightening pairs and use the appropriate brakes on the mounting operations in which threaded elements are involved.
-Welding and drilling to remove or put rivets, taking into account the tolerances of the drill to be executed.
-In glued elements: disassemble the element according to the established sequence of operations; properly prepare the union zones; perform the product mixes, in the necessary cases, meeting technical specifications; correctly apply the products; perform the bonding of the element by obtaining the required quality.
CE2.3 Run the operations according to the specifications indicated in the technical documentation, checking the final operativity of the item.
CE2.4 Meet the standards of occupational risk prevention and environmental impact.
CE2.5 Perform the operation of the equipment to be used in the different phases of the processes.
C3: Replace heated or pasted moons following technical specifications and safety conditions.
CE3.1 Explain the disassembly and mounting processes of different types of moons.
CE3.2 Describe the process of repairing laminated moons with the required precision.
CE3.3 Identify and describe the products used in the assembly and sealing of pasted moons.
CE3.4 In practical cases of mounting and/or repair of moons, properly characterized:
-Protect areas adjacent to the moon to repair or replace, appropriately to avoid collateral damage.
-Unmount the moon to replace by removing leftover waste and cut the putty in necessary cases with the appropriate means
-Mounting pasted moons using the appropriate products, applying the pdescribed anchor and watertight means
-Properly prepare the laminated moon to repair, using the appropriate products and making the polishing in the necessary cases.
C4: Perform basic maintenance and daily cleaning of the basic machines and equipment of an automotive workshop.
CE4.1 Apply the rules of use and safety in handling machines and equipment.
CE4.2 Perform the operation and reset of machines and equipment.
CE4.3 Change filters, straps, and other consumable materials from the workshop machines and equipment.
CE4.4 Keep equipment clean and in order.
C5: Apply cleaning standards, waste collection standards and their classification, safety standards and daily maintenance.
CE5.1 Clean up shop, jobs, tools and machinery.
CE5.2 Perform the self-maintenance of machines, equipment and tools.
CE5.3 Collect and classify the waste generated in the activity, respecting the established rules on the storage of waste.
CE5.4 Identify the safety standards of the workshop, individual and collective, applying them to the full extent, using appropriate clothing and PPE.
Contents
1. General constitution of the vehicle
-Body types and their characteristics.
-Types of cabins and chassis.
2. Detachable junctions
-The characteristics of the junction and the elements used.
-Products used in pasted joins.
-Join procedures and techniques.
-Unpermitted manipulations of airbag.
-Effects of the airbag on the windscreen.
3. Locking and lifting mechanisms
-Description of the same.
-Mechanical parts and electrical parts.
-Replacement and/or repair procedures.
4. Moons (driveways and pastes)
-Types of glass used in automotive.
-Replacement techniques and procedures.
-Materials to be used in pasting.
-Replacement of laminated moons.
5. Basic body workshop machinery
-Technical characteristics, safety and handling of machines: Vehicle elevator, hydraulic jacks and tables, headlight regloscope, hydraulic press, handguns washer, dust vacuum cleaner, soldering table, welding equipment and welding gas cylinders. Body of body, folding, shearing, embroidery. Painting booth. Workbenches, closets and tool carts.
-Basic daily maintenance or self-maintenance.
6. Standards for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental impact in the automotive industry.
-Automotive workshop risks:
▫ Machine and tool security features.
▫ Handling loads and cutting objects.
▫ Security Senalization.
-Cleaning and maintenance of facilities, machinery, equipment and tools:
▫ Cleaning and order of work zones.
▫ Application of appropriate cleaning products.
▫ Collecting, sorting, and removing the waste. Containers and storage.
▫ Maintenance and order of the workshop tools, equipment and cabinets.
-Equipment for individual protection (EPIs). Collective protection equipment or measures.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Number of total hours of the module | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative module-MF0621_1 | 90 | 30 |
FORMATIVE MODULE 3
Naming: BASIC SURFACE REPAIR TECHNIQUES
Code: MF0622_1
Professional qualification level: 1
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0622_1: Perform auxiliary surface preparation operations.
Duration: 90 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Acondition vehicle surfaces properly, for further application of fund treatments.
CE1.1 Analyze the application of the different processes according to the characteristics of the surfaces.
CE1.2 In practical cases, properly characterized, apply sanding procedures for the removal of edges and step in the old paint and removal of adhesives or anagrams that are not masked
CE1.3 In practical cases, properly characterized, run pickling techniques (chemical and physical) of surfaces removing paint debris.
CE1.4 In practical cases, properly characterized, apply cleaning and degreasing procedures of the areas to be treated.
CE1.5 Meet the standards of occupational risk prevention and environmental impact.
C2: Apply masked and unmasked methods, determining the equipment and materials that are necessary for the protection of areas that need not be sprayed.
CE2.1 Explain the different methods of masking.
CE2.2 Recognize the materials, tools, and tools used in the masking processes.
CE2.3 In practical cases, properly characterized, run masking techniques: partial, total, interior, exterior.
CE2.4 In practical cases, properly characterized, use the different products of masquerade (paper, film of masquerade, fundas, or others) following technical specifications.
C3: Maintain the risk-free work zone as well as perform the cleaning and selective collection of waste from the activity.
CE3.1 Explain the different risks inherent in the work of sanding, pickling and surface treatment.
CE3.2 Employ individual protection equipment for the activity.
CE3.3 Promote order in the works, cleaning of jobs and selective collection of waste.
CE3.4 Perform the daily autonomous maintenance of equipment and tools, as a user.
CE3.5. Employ the means of collective protection in an appropriate manner.
Contents
1. Equipment for the preparation and matching of surfaces
-Basic Constitution and nomenclature of an abrasive (lija).
-Lijator supports.
-Sanding Tacos.
-Lit machines.
-Decapants.
-Hot Air Soplete
-Equipment for the suction of sanding powder.
-Equipment and cleaning products.
2. Masked products and products
-Need of the masked.
-Products used to mask surfaces: tapes, paper, film, masking, among others.
-Auxiliary equipment.
3. Standards for the prevention of occupational risks and environmental impact in the preparation of vehicle surfaces
-Risks of the body and paint shop.
-Security Senalization.
-Characteristics of the machines and tools.
-Equipment for individual protection (EPIs).
-Selective collection of waste.
-Order and cleaning of the workshop.
-Basic maintenance of machines and equipment.
-Labelling of toxic or dangerous products.
-Manipulation of chemicals.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Number of total hours of the module | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative module-MF0622_1 | 90 | 30 |
NON-WORKING PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE MODULE FOR AUXILIARY VEHICLE BODY MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Code: MP0188
Duration: 40 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE1.1 Behave responsibly both in human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE1.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE1.3 Diligently undertake the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE1.4 Integrate into the production processes of the work center.
CE1.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE1.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
C2: Participate in customer support processes, accompanying the manager.
CE2.1 Log relevant data to perform customer vehicle body maintenance.
CE2.2 Handle in a real situation, work parts and repair technical manuals.
CE2.3 Fill in the work parts and albarans after the work has been done.
C3: Participate in warehouse management, parts ordering, and consumable products.
CE3.1 Perform the warehouse inventory, if any.
CE3.2 Fill in the documents used in the order items with the available means, scoring if the codes, quantities and denominations are required.
Contents
1. Integration and communication in the workplace
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Tracking the regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
2. Participate in the processes of customer support.
-Handling of personal data.
-Opening tab to the vehicle.
-Disassembly of vehicle parts for damage assessment by the manager.
3. Warehouse Management.
-Inventory.
-Store types and shelves.
-Handling parts and consumable products catalogs.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS OF TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0620_1: Basic Mechanized | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent degrees • Technical and Technical Superior of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professionalism level 2 and 3 of the Vehicle Body Area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0621_1: Basic removable element replacement techniques | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent degrees • Technical and Technical Superior of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professionalism level 2 and 3 of the Vehicle Body Area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0622_1: Basic surface preparation techniques | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Technical and Technical Superior of the Professional Family of Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles • Certificate of professionalism of Level 2 and 3 of the Vehicle Body Area of the Professional Family of Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles | 2 years | 4 |
V. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SPACES, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 | 45 | 60 | |
|
body workshop |
210 | 350 | |
| Store | 20 | 20 |
|
M2 | M3 |
| |
|---|---|---|---|
| X | X | ||
|
Body Workshop |
X | X | |
| X | X | X | X | X |
| Equipment | |
|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audio-visual equipment -PCs installed in network, canon with projection and internet -Specialty specific software -2 Rotuder-write Pizarras -Rotafolios -Classroom material -Table and chair for the trainer -Table and chairs for students |
|
body workshop | -Work banks with screws. -Soft welding equipment. -Oxyacetylenic welding equipment. -Semi-automatic arc welding equipment and electrodes. -Headlight adjustment equipment. -A pneumatic cutting machine. -Bordonator. -Plegadora. -Sheet Curvator. -Sierras, limes, gramiles, plot tips, threaded, male, terrajas and manneals, calibers, micrometers, gages of threads and thicknesses, comparator clock. -Taladoring, Remachter, Pistola for application of polyurethanes, Grapple, Ventosas, Hot air Soplete. Esmeril. -rotating, vibratory, and roto-orbital lijadora. -Sized rubber Tacos. -Team of chapista-specific tools. -Workshop tools. -Tripods and assembly tables. Sanding supports. -Vehicle elevators -Handgun wash equipment -pneumatic and electrical impact gun equipment -Workrooms for tools and parts -Games of all kinds of manual keys -Jgo of all kinds of pliers and jaws -Jgo of all types of special tips, torx, allen, etc -Jgo of all Types of screwdrivers -Destorp -Scabocaos -Scissors, cutters, and blades -All types of hammers, plastic and steel -Paper, film, tape. -Clean point and containers. Daily cleaning |
| Store | -Store products and tools. Locker room with lockers. Lavajos, Botiquín. -Specific installations: Aspiration Central, Aspirational Planes, Combustible Gas Lines (Oxygen and Acethylene), Compressed Air Line, Welding Gas Aspiration. |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units that must be available for the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces, will be sufficient for a minimum of 15 students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to the higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX III
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Name: ANCILLARY OPERATIONS FOR AERONAUTICAL MAINTENANCE.
Code: TMVO0109
Professional family: Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles.
Professional area: Aeronautics
Professional qualification level: 1
Professional reference qualification:
TMV407_1 Aircraft Maintenance Auxiliary Operations (R.D. 1179/2008 of 11 July 2008).
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC1315_1: Perform maintenance and service auxiliary operations on the aircraft.
UC1316_1: Perform maintenance and service auxiliary operations in aircraft workshop.
General competition:
Perform auxiliary maintenance and service operations on the aircraft, meeting technical specifications, under security conditions, and under the supervision of a higher level technician with certification capacity.
Professional Environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its professional activity as an employed person, in large, medium and small aeronautical companies, both public and private, for the maintenance, operation and operation of aircraft.
Productive Sectors:
It is located in the aviation and space repair and maintenance sector.
Occupations or related jobs:
Online Aircraft Maintenance Auxiliary.
Aircraft Interior Maintenance Auxiliary.
In-workshop aircraft maintenance aid.
ramp aid.
Duration of the associated training: 410 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF1315_1: Auxiliary operations on the aircraft (150 hours).
• UF0957: Aircraft external maintenance auxiliary operations (40 hours).
• UF0958: Aircraft internal maintenance auxiliary operations (30 hours).
• UF0959: Aircraft service auxiliary operations (50 hours).
• UF0960: (transversal) Aeronautical safety and prevention of occupational and environmental risks (30 hours).
MF1316_1: Aircraft workshop auxiliary operations (210 hours).
• UF0961: Auxiliary maintenance of mechanical systems and aircraft fluids (50 hours).
• UF0962: Auxiliary maintenance of aircraft engines and propellers (40 hours).
• UF0963: Auxiliary maintenance of aircraft electrical systems (60 hours).
• UF0964: Auxiliary maintenance of aircraft interior conditioning (30 hours).
• UF0960: (transversal) Aeronautical safety and prevention of occupational and environmental risks (30 hours).
MP0199: Non-working professional practice module for aeronautical maintenance auxiliary operations (80 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established in the training unit UF0960 Aeronautical safety and prevention of occupational and environmental risks of the training modules MF1315_1 and MF1316_1 of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Naming: PERFORM AUXILIARY MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE OPERATIONS ON THE AIRCRAFT.
Level: 1
Code: UC1315_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform, at your level, maintenance actions on the aircraft, following instructions and applying the established work procedures.
CR1.1 Mechanical operations on the ramp or in the aircraft's hangarisation (towing, quiet, opening and closing of doors, grounding, train tweezers, access platforms, protection covers) are carried out in accordance with the established procedures.
CR1.2 The panels and logs are mounted and/or unmounted according to procedures.
CR1.3 Technical cleaning (exterior of aircraft, train enclosures, water tanks and mechanical components) and landing gear, flight controls and doors are performed when applicable or stipulated, according to established procedures.
CR1.4 The pressure of accumulators, bottles and systems as well as the operating state of the pressure discs, are checked by simple visual inspections.
CR1.5 The lamp changes (external lights and lighting of train enclosures, service records and cargo holds) are made as appropriate.
CR1.6 The surface finish of the aircraft, tag out, outer marks, and seal seals are performed in compliance with established specifications or criteria.
CR1.7 The maintenance operations of aircraft loading and unloading elements are performed according to established procedures.
CR1.8 The different maintenance and repair operations are performed by observing the rules of use, safety, health and environmental impact.
RP2: Perform service operations on the aircraft at their level, following instructions and applying the established work procedures.
CR2.1 Electrical, pneumatic, air conditioning, coolant, fuel and water supply services are performed by observing established safety standards.
CR2.2 In start-up (start-up) you collaborate by providing the required assistance by following the instructions of the authorized personnel to perform it.
CR2.3 The aircraft rollback operations by external media (push-back) are performed according to the procedure established in each situation.
CR2.6 The different service operations to aircraft are performed by observing the standards of use, safety, health and environmental impact.
RP3: Perform, at your level, maintenance actions inside the aircraft, following instructions and applying the established work procedures.
CR3.1 Disassembly, assembly and repair where applicable, of bulkheads, side panels, floors, ceilings, upper compartments and passenger seats of the aircraft is performed according to working procedures.
CR3.2 The status of the elements of the toilets (washbasins, toilets, detector and fire extinguishing agent among others) is checked, with simple and visual inspections, and where appropriate they are disassembled, and in the galley (fridges, ovens, coffee makers, taps among others) are carried out operations of disassembly, assembly and repair of its components when applicable.
CR3.3 The Passenger Entertainment System (PES) is involved by removing elements when replacing or repairing items.
CR3.4 Aircraft insulation blankets are replaced according to the working procedure.
CR3.5 The moquettes, curtains, seat covers and parcel meshes are disassembled, cleaned when applicable, and mounted again.
CR3.6 The review of booties, life jackets, portable oxygen bottles and survival equipment, and salvage rafts is performed when necessary and in the cases where applicable, are replaced.
CR3.7 The changes of lamps (interior cabin lighting, washbasins and cargo holds) are made when applicable, and in electrical installations, cable ties are welded for the performance of maintenance tasks and using connecting elements (flanges, insulators, among others) and are mounted according to instructions received.
CR3.8 The cleaning and polishing of windows is done with the established means and procedures.
CR3.9 The different maintenance and repair operations are performed by observing the rules of use, safety, occupational health and environmental impact.
RP4: Adopt the aviation safety and occupational risk prevention regulations in the execution of auxiliary maintenance and service operations on the aircraft.
CR4.1 Legal rules and their regulatory development apply as set.
CR4.2 The specific rules (UNE, ISO, INSHT) apply in their technical aspects that address and establish criteria for uniformity in the use of products.
CR4.3 Individual Protection Equipment (EPIs) are used as prescribed by the regulations.
CR4.4 The harmful environmental effects are identified in the development of the work to minimize them.
Professional Context
Production media
Drag vehicles. Towed bars. Fastening and anchoring means. Protective covers. External energy cars (electric, pneumatic, air conditioning and hydraulic) Extinguishing bottles. Oxygen and nitrogen bottles. Lamps. Anti-ice equipment. Anti-corrosive materials. Tools equipment.
Products and results
Maintenance and service operations performed and verifications completed.
Information used or generated
Work orders and instructions. Management manuals for the different teams. Safety standards, occupational health and the environment. Checklists.
Competition Unit 2
denomination: PERFORM AUXILIARY MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS AND SERVICE IN AIRCRAFT WORKSHOP.
Level: 1
Code: UC1316_1
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform maintenance operations on aircraft and aircraft brake assemblies and maintenance support equipment by applying the established procedures.
CR1.1 Tires are dismounted, mounted, and balanced using the indicated means and procedures.
CR1.2 The wheel rims are inspected, proceeding to perform pickling operations using the appropriate equipment and means in each case.
CR1.3 The brake assembly is dismounted and mounted according to the established procedure.
CR1.4 The decapado of the brake assembly is performed by applying the established procedure.
CR1.5 The brake and tire assemblies are reviewed by carrying out the corresponding inspections according to the manufacturer's instructions.
CR1.6 Ground maintenance support equipment (cats, elevators, ladders, towed bars, among others) are reviewed by performing the appropriate operations to ensure proper operation.
CR1.7 The operations of handling of oxygen and nitrogen bottles and the heavy of extinguishing bottles are performed according to procedures and applying the safety standards.
CR1.8 The different maintenance and repair operations are performed by observing the rules of use, safety, occupational health and environmental impact.
RP2: Perform operations related to maintenance on engines, propellers, electrical/electronic equipment, and aircraft batteries at their level, using established procedures.
CR2.1 The simple elements of the engine are disassembled and mounted using the necessary means and equipment, according to the procedure and are conditioned and packed for the transport thereof as established.
CR2.2 The technical cleaning of the engines and their components is performed when applicable, and the cables (flanges, fasteners, supports, among others) are dismounted on the engine and are mounted following procedures.
CR2.3 The motor transport wedges are maintained in perfect state of use.
CR2.4 The technical cleaning of the propellers and their components is carried out where appropriate, and are conditioned and packed for the transport of the propellers as determined.
CR2.5 The maintenance of electrical/electronic equipment is performed according to the manufacturer's standard.
CR2.6 The aircraft battery maintenance operations include cleaning, changing components, and repositioning the electrolyte, when required.
CR2.7 The batteries and their components are conditioned, identified and packaged for the transport of the same as established.
CR2.8 The different maintenance and repair operations are performed by observing safety and health standards and environmental impact.
RP3: Perform aircraft interior and furniture maintenance operations by applying the established procedures.
CR3.1 The bulkheads, side panels, ceilings, floors, and upper compartments are replaced or repaired (fittings, screws, hinges, locks, etc.) or other damaged parts.
CR3.2 The components of the galley (fridges, ovens, coffee makers, taps, etc.) are repaired by replacing elements thereof.
CR3.3 Passenger seats are disassembled, cleaned and inspected, and in the necessary cases they are adjusted or replaced by the damaged elements.
CR3.4 The deteriorated components of the sinks are repaired by replacing elements thereof.
CE3.5 The verification operations of the state of use of emergency and evacuation equipment are carried out following working procedures.
CR3.6 Crew rest modules are repaired by replacing elements of the same.
CR3.7 The different maintenance and repair operations are performed by observing the rules of use, safety, occupational health and environmental impact.
RP4: Perform operation of treatments and repair of assemblies or metal elements and composite of aircraft, applying the established procedures.
CR4.1 The aircraft's outer marks and marks are repaired by replacement, if they are adhesives, or by applying small paint repairs.
CR4.2 The preparation of surfaces in the metal elements is performed by executing the necessary operations to achieve the final finish.
CR4.3 The metal elements are repaired, if applicable, by performing cutting, shaping, or other operations according to each situation and according to the standard.
CR4.4 Anti-corrosive protection in areas of large areas that require it is applied in compliance with technical specifications.
CR4.5 Mechanical and chemical cleaning of parts is performed by applying established work procedures.
CR4.6 The repair of composite material elements is performed by applying the procedures established by the component manufacturer.
CR4.7 The electrolytic and chemical coatings of the parts or parts of the aircraft that require it, are performed using the necessary facilities and auxiliary means, following instructions and procedures established in each case.
CR4.8 The different maintenance and repair operations are performed by observing the rules of use, safety, occupational health and environmental impact.
RP5: Adopt the aviation safety and occupational risk prevention regulations in the execution of auxiliary maintenance operations and workshop services.
CR5.1 Legal rules and their regulatory development apply as set.
CR5.2 The specific rules (UNE, ISO, INSHT) apply in their technical aspects that address and establish criteria for uniformity in the use of products.
CR5.3 Individual protection equipment (EPIs) are used as prescribed by the regulations.
CR5.4 The harmful environmental effects are identified in the development of the work to minimize them.
Professional Context
Production media
Media and anchor. Protective covers. External energy sources (electrical, pneumatic, air conditioning and hydraulic). Accumulators. Extinguishing bottles. Oxygen and nitrogen bottles. Anti-corrosive materials. Tools equipment. Working banks. Machine-tools. Battery charger. Painting and labeling equipment. Suction equipment. Vacuum pumps. Drying equipment.
Products and results
Primary maintenance, revisions, disassembly, mounting and/or replacement of items performed.
Information used or generated
Work orders and instructions. Management manuals for the different teams. Safety standards, occupational health and the environment. Checklists.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: AUXILIARY OPERATIONS ON THE AIRCRAFT
Code: MF1315_1
Professional qualification level: 1
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC1315_1 Perform maintenance and service auxiliary operations on the aircraft
Duration: 150 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: AIRCRAFT EXTERNAL MAINTENANCE AUXILIARY OPERATIONS
Code: UF0957
Duration: 40 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the configuration of aircraft in a general way, identifying the systems, components, and key parts thereof.
CE1.1 Describe the basic aerodynamics and elementary flight theory, on which the aircraft flight is based.
CE1.2 Identify mechanical systems (landing gear, motor, flight controls), hydraulic and pneumatic systems (air conditioning, pressurization, ventilation, anti-ice, among others) of aircraft, as well as their characteristic fundamental elements.
CE1.3 Identify areas of aircraft most likely to be affected by corrosion.
CE1.4 Describe the most important precautions to be observed, necessary for the protection of the aircraft and the persons working in it.
CE1.5 Identify navigation systems (external installations) and aircraft communications.
C2: Perform mechanical operations that require the aircraft to handle the necessary machines or equipment with dexterity and applying the established procedures.
CE2.1 Identify in the (doors, registers, external panels, among others) of the aircraft, the different types of mechanisms of opening, closing and blocation.
CE2.2 Explain the characteristics of fluids, oils, fats used in aircraft (oxygen, nitrogen, sealants, fats, sodium hypochlorite, among others) and precautions during handling.
CE2.3 Explain the precautions to be taken in the approaches to both vehicles and on foot to the different parts of the aircraft (propellers, motor, flight controls, train gates, fuselage, among others)
C3 Perform electrical and electronic operations that require the aircraft to operate the necessary machines or equipment with dexterity and apply the established procedures.
CE3.1 Identify the different types of current according to the system and the different energy sources.
CE3.2 Interpret electrical cuttings according to the technical documentation of the corresponding system.
CE3.3 Identify the different elements and components of the most common electrical and electronic systems.
C4: Select the regulations and identify the procedures, applying them to their level in the development of the work.
CE4.1 Knowledge of the different types of manuals used in aircraft maintenance
CE4.2 Accurately and correctly reflect the data, reports and evaluations required for each maintenance operation in the official documents established for this purpose.
CE4.3 Identify the different work orders (AD, SB, IT).
Contents
1. Basic concepts relating to aircraft
-Basic aerodynamics. Flight theory.
-The constituent elements of the aircraft.
▫ Structural part.
-fuselage: Proa. Central and rear fuselage.
-Alar Group: Medium plane and outer wings.
-Queue Empenage: Vertical stabilizer and horizontal stabilizer.
▫ External systems.
-Landing trains.
-Power plant.
-Doors and ramps.
2. Maintenance operations of mechanical systems
-Basic concepts of pneumatic and hydraulic systems.
-Flight Manths.
▫ Primary flight mands: alerons and rudders.
▫ Secondary flight ways: flap, spoiler, slat, and fins.
-Fluid systems.
▫ Hydraulic systems: landing trains, airships, ramps, and cargo doors
▫ pneumatic systems: air conditioning, pressurization, anti-ice.
▫ Fuel system.
▫ Oxygen system.
▫ Fire extinguishing.
▫ Wipers.
-Engine Mands.
▫ Power Palanca.
▫ Condition Mandos.
▫ Control Systems: HMU, FADEC.
-Technical documentation, tools and tools.
-System-specific precautions.
3. Maintenance operations of electrical systems
-Basic concepts about electrical and electronic systems.
-Electrical systems.
▫ Current types.
▫ Battery.
▫ Current generators: internal or external.
▫ stream distribution bars.
▫ Lighting system: exterior and interior.
▫ Indication system.
▫ Auxiliary systems: Heating and air conditioning, trains, electro valves.
-Electronic system.
▫ Analog systems.
▫ Digital systems.
▫ Communication and navigation systems.
▫ Mission systems and weaponry.
-Technical documentation, tools and tools.
-System-specific precautions.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: AIRCRAFT INTERNAL MAINTENANCE AUXILIARY OPERATIONS
Code: UF0958
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP3
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the wastewater and drinking water systems, identifying the elements that constitute them.
CE1.1 Describe the washbasin assemblies or parts, their particularities, and the most common disassembly and mounting procedures.
CE1.2 Explain the various clamping mechanisms the Galleys and sinks.
CE1.3 Identify electrical and lighting elements belonging to the system of washbasins and Galleys.
CE1.4 Relating areas most prone to corrosion.
C2: Check the safety systems of the interior equipment elements and perform their maintenance; identifying their components such as; chairs, carpets, floors, ceilings, side panels, baggage handlers and cargo handling systems.
CE2.1 Describe more common mechanical fixing elements of the various components of the aircraft's interior equipment.
CE2.2 Describe electrical elements related to all equipment and interior lighting of the aircraft.
C3: Repair aircraft interior equipment items according to established procedures.
CE3.1 Describe the most common mechanical repairs of the aircraft's interior outfitted elements.
CE3.2 Describe the most common electrical repairs of the interior equipped elements.
Contents
1. Interior configurations of the aircraft
-Civil aircraft configurations.
▫ A passage entertainment system.
▫ Waste and drinking water system.
▫ Emergency lighting system.
▫ Civil internal equipment.
▫ baggage hold load system.
-Setting up military transport aircraft.
▫ Emergency lighting system.
▫ Mission Warning System.
▫ Load handling system.
▫ Military interior equipment.
2. Mechanical maintenance operations inside the aircraft
-Civil aircraft-specific maintenance operations.
▫ Maintenance of interior equipment items. Butts, baggage handlers, panels, doors, floors, windows.
-Cleaning.
-Removal of scratches.
-Plastochemical repairs.
-Aesthetic retouches of painting.
▫ Areas prone to corrosion by wastewater and other corrosive elements and their inspection criteria.
▫ Luggage load zones and access doors to them. Inspection criteria for damage by blows, rocks, spills and state of the pressurization joints of the loading doors.
▫ Security items for the aircraft. Vests, rafts, booties, portable extinguishers, portable oxygen bottles. Inspection criteria for correct expiration and status.
-Military aircraft-specific maintenance operations.
▫ The aircraft's interior equipment according to the version or mission to be performed as a maritime patrol, paratrooper launch, load launch.
▫ Security of interior equipment items. Paratrooper seats and cables, stretchers, load-launching system.
▫ Areas prone to corrosion by corrosive elements in general. Inspection criteria.
▫ Security items. Rafts, booties, portable fire extinguishers, portable oxygen bottles, paratrooper pickup bar. Inspection criteria for correct expiration and status.
-Technical documentation, tools and tools.
-System-specific precautions.
3. Electrical maintenance operations inside the aircraft
-Indoor lighting system.
▫ Lighting and pilot cabin indication.
▫ Passenger or cargo cabin lighting and paratroopers.
-Emergency lighting system.
▫ Lighting of the emergency indicators.
▫ Emergency component auxiliary battery systems.
▫ External emergency lighting components.
-Technical documentation, tools and tools.
-System-specific precautions.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: AIRCRAFT SERVICE AUXILIARY OPERATIONS
Code: UF0959
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP2.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the areas of aircraft that require service, identifying different systems or components.
CE1.1 Describe the mechanical systems that require services.
CE1.2 Describe electrical systems that require services.
CE1.3 Describe the parts of the power plant and propeller that require service.
C2: Perform external technical cleaning and deicing, according to established protocols.
CE2.1 Identify external technical cleaning procedures and precautions to be followed during their performance.
CE2.2 Describe the deicing procedures of an aircraft and precautions to be followed in its performance.
C3: Perform service operations that require the aircraft to operate the required machines or equipment with skill and apply the established procedures.
CE3.1 Describe the procedures used to assist in starting the aircraft engines with/without external aid of pneumatic and/or electrical energy.
CE3.2 Describe the service procedures of hydraulic and pneumatic systems as well as the different types of fluids to be used.
CE3.3 Describe the methods of loading and cleaning the wastewater and drinking water system.
CE3.4 Describe the quantity and pressure levels of the hydraulic elements such as shock absorbers, accumulators and hydraulic tank, tires such as the wheels and oxygen system of the aircraft.
CE3.5 Check the fluid level of air conditioning equipment.
CE3.6 Check the status of the discharge disk for the fire extinguishing bottles.
CE3.7 Check for wear status and tyre cover damage, brake packs
CE3.8 Describe the different types of greasers, methods of lubrication and application of fats and oils in the various mobile elements.
Contents
1. Locating service zones for an aircraft
-Mechanical services.
▫ Systems and main elements of Landing Trains.
▫ Zone and fuel load and drain elements.
▫ Dampers, accumulators, brakes, and wheels.
▫ Zone and hydraulic fluid load elements.
▫ Oxygen loading zone.
▫ Doors and Rampas.
▫ The outer pipes of the Pitot and static system.
-Electrical services.
▫ Emergency lighting system.
▫ Interphony System.
▫ Landing, rolling, position, training, wing inspection, etc.
▫ Electrical connectors of the system of trains and micros of weight and indication of aircraft in flight.
▫ Opening and closing connector for ramps and doors from outside the plane.
-Power Plant Services.
▫ Elements that require service on the engines of an aircraft.
▫ Elements that need service on the propellers of an aircraft.
▫ Engine oil-level indicator and load-mouth indicator.
▫ A drained fuel collection element.
▫ Fixed and detachable Capotage of an aircraft.
2. Service Procedures
-Help to start engines (signal, power supply, chocks, engine gas monitoring).
-Hydraulic and pneumatic fluid filling operations. Types of fluids
-Use of hydraulic banks and pneumatic cars.
-Operations of loading and unloading of drinking water and waste and cleaning of the same.
-Checking levels and pressures of accumulators, dampers, wheels, air conditioning, fire extinguishing (witness discs), oxygen Etc.
-tire cover wear check and brake packages.
-Air general grasses (type of greasers, types of fats and oils)
-External technical cleaning of the aircraft.
-An aircraft's de-icing operation.
-Technical documentation, tools and tools.
-System-specific precautions.
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Denomination: AERONAUTICAL SAFETY AND PREVENTION OF WORK AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS.
Code: UF0960
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP4
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Identify the different current regulations on the prevention of occupational risks, both general and specific in plane, in flight/ramp and hangar.
CE1.1 Describe the overall risks of aircraft work.
CE1.2 Apply, at your level, the general protections to use to avoid risks.
CE1.3 Identify the specific risks of work on aircraft on the outside.
CE1.4 Apply, at your level the general protections to use to avoid these risks.
CE1.5 Identify the overall risks of aircraft work in hangar.
CE1.6 Use, at your level, the general protections to use to avoid these risks.
C2: Identify the different regulations on airworthiness, both international and national, as well as civil and military.
CE2.1 Identify the risks arising from the lack of implementation of this regulation.
CE2.2 Apply at its level, the current regulations on airworthiness, using the protections according to the established protocol.
C3: Consequence workers in the performance of good work practices in the performance of their work activity, for the conservation of the environment.
CE3.1 To know the polluting elements derived from the work practice.
CE3.2 Apply, at their level, the necessary precautions and protections to prevent the damage of these pollutants.
Contents
1 Job Risk Prevention
-Law on the Prevention of Risks and Regulations on Safety and Hygiene. Mandatory compliance at work.
-Integration of preventive activity.
-Work and health.
-Working conditions, concept, conditions and risk factors.
-Danger Senalization. Information and recommendation providing for such standards.
-Scope of personal and material damages in case of non-compliance.
-Physical Contaminants. Classification.
-Protective equipment.
-Chemical agents.
-Biological agents.
-Fires.
-Workloads.
-Occupational health and its monitoring.
-First aid.
-Civil and criminal liability that leads to non-compliance.
-Handling the security elements and their usefulness in each case.
2 Airworthiness Regulations
-International and national standards of airworthiness.
-Military air regulations.
-Civil air regulations.
3Environmental security
-Treatment of different wastes.
-Regulations on different types of waste containers.
-Environmental management UNE77-801-9.
-Environmental policy.
-Environmental effects.
-European Regulation on Ecomanagement and Ecoaudits (EMAS) ISO14001.
-Natural and technological hazards.
-Pollution of the water medium and its prevention.
-Air pollution, sources of pollution and prevention.
-Debug systems.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | Number of maximum hours susceptible distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative unit 1-UF0957 | 40 | 10 |
|
Unit 2- UF0958 | 30 | 10 |
| Formative Unit 3-UF0959 | 50 | 10 |
|
Formative Unit 4-UF0960 | 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
The training units for this module can be programmed independently.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Naming: AUXILIARY OPERATIONS IN AIRCRAFT WORKSHOP
Code: MF1316_1
Professional qualification level: 1
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC1316_1 Perform maintenance and service auxiliary operations in aircraft workshop
Duration: 210 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: AUXILIARY MAINTENANCE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AND AIRCRAFT FLUIDS
Code: UF0961
Duration: 50 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit is associated with RP1.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: Locate and describe the dismountable elements of wheels and tires of an aircraft, performing the disassembly, mounting and balancing of a complete wheel and brake package.
CE1.1 Generally describe the operational characteristics of the wheels, identifying the constituent parts thereof.
CE1.2 Describe the operation and identify the various brake package elements.
CE1.3 Identify brake package inspection operations, tires, and tire pressure
CE1.4 Interpret the recommendations and prescriptions given in the technical documentation of the manufacturers, relating to wheels and brakes.
C2: In a scenario of nitrogen and oxygen loading service in the aircraft:
CE2.1 Identify the various handling operations of the oxygen and nitrogen bottles.
CE2.2 Identify the safety risks and conditions resulting from the handling of oxygen and nitrogen bottles.
C3: In an aircraft-borne and supported scenario:
CE3.1 Describe the use and inspections of aircraft hoisting elements and access platforms.
CE3.2 Select aircraft supported tools, such as cats, cots.
Contents
1. Detachable elements
-Wheels and rims.
-Brake packets.
-Equitable wheels.
-Inspections/Tire Decaption.
2. Nitrogen Loads
-Acumulators.
-Damping.
-Wheels.
3. Oxygen Loads
-Central Botella.
-Portable buttons.
-Inspections and care with the management of Oxygen.
4. Aircraft hoisting elements.
-Slings
-Platforms
-Cunas
-Cats
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: AUXILIARY MAINTENANCE OF AIRCRAFT ENGINES AND PROPELLERS
Code: UF0962
Duration: 40 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit is associated with RP2 as regards engines and propellers.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: Describe and locate the elements most likely to change in an engine and propeller.
CE1.1 Set the disassembly and mounting procedure for an item belonging to the engine outfitted.
CE1.2 Describe the procedure to be followed in the packaging of disassembled elements of an engine and propeller and the preservation of wedges and transport carts of said elements.
CE1.3 Identify the procedure to be followed in the technical cleaning of the engine taking into account the pre-assemblies to be performed and the protection of pressure and static takes and air sockets.
CE1.4 Describe the procedure to be followed in the technical cleaning of a propeller.
CE1.5 Identify the areas of the propeller that are most susceptible to being protected, such as the antiice zones, oil seals of the blades and dome of the propeller.
C2: Identify the elements that form an engine Quick Engine Change (QEC)
CE2.1 Different characteristics between a jet engine QEC and propeller motor.
CE2.2 In a practical scenario:
-Perform the dismounts of a QEC.
-Apply the most characteristic methods of QEC disassembly.
C3: Describe the maintenance and preservation actions of engines and propellers in workshop
CE3.1 Identify the environmental conditions of a storage workshop for engines and propellers.
CE3.2 In a practical scenario, apply periodic maintenance tasks on stored engines and propellers, taking into account:
-Roll of compressors,
-Moisture measurement,
-Engrases,
-Preservation of the fuel system.
CE3.3 Perform the depreservation and commissioning of engines and propellers, both in fuel systems and lubrication, by performing:
-Engine and/or propeller cleaning.
-Unprotecting air sockets.
-Reviewing the items before your installation.
Contents
1. Unmounting and mounting single engine and propeller elements
-Fuel system.
▫ Filters.
▫ Ice detectors.
▫ Cutting valves.
▫ Power hoses/hoses.
-Oil system.
▫ Filters.
▫ Repository.
▫ Cutting valves.
▫ Piping/hoses.
▫ particle detectors.
▫ Radiators.
-Bleeding system.
▫ Filters.
▫ Conducts.
▫ Valves.
-ignition system.
▫ Cables.
▫ Ignition boxes.
▫ Bujias.
-Air system.
▫ Download valves.
▫ Variable blade systems (IGV ' s).
▫ System of reverses.
-Step control system.
▫ Valve box.
▫ Bomb box.
▫ Domo
2. Storage, transport, down/engine/propeller surge.
-Storage useful.
▫ Storage Carros.
▫ Storage containers.
-Transport useful.
▫ Transport carts.
▫ Containers for a transport.
-Types of slings/lift/drop cars of engines/propellers.
▫ Sized (slings).
▫ hydraulic/down/upload mechanics.
3. Methods of preservation and technical cleaning
-Preservation of engines and propellers.
▫ Preservation of stored.
▫ Preservation for transport.
-Technical cleaning and maintenance.
▫ Most common technical cleaning procedures.
▫ Maintenance tasks for the preservation/cleaning of engines/propellers.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: AUXILIARY MAINTENANCE OF AIRCRAFT ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Code: UF0963
Duration: 60 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit is associated with RP2 as regards electrical elements.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Identify and locate electrical elements to be disassembled on a plane.
CE1.1 Locate the aircraft's batteries to remove them according to the appropriate procedures.
CE1.2 Locate emergency electrical batteries and components to disassemble, according to the appropriate procedures.
CE1.3 Locate the electrical components inside the aircraft to remove them, according to the appropriate procedures.
C2: Describe the maintenance of aircraft batteries and emergency systems.
CE2.1 Describe the methods of checking the electrolyte load and capacity.
CE2.2 Describe the slow charging methods of the batteries.
CE2.3 Replace battery elements, taking into account security methods.
C3: Keep electrical elements inside the aircraft.
CE3.1 Describe the most common elements of the aircraft equipped as ovens, coffee makers, refrigerators, entertainment system, etc.
CE3.2 In a practical case, perform the repair and test of the electrical elements of the interior equipped.
Contents
1. Battery types of aircraft and components thereof
-Nickel-Cadmit and Lead Batteries.
-Batteries and accumulators of the emergency lighting and warning systems.
-Description of the battery components.
2. Maintenance of batteries and precautions to follow
-Battery status checking methods.
-Precautions to be taken into account with the handling of electrolytes.
-Packaging, storage and preservation of batteries.
3. Maintenance in electrical element workshop
-Maintenance and testing of lighting panels.
-Maintenance and testing of ovens, coffee makers, refrigerators.
-Check emergency lighting systems.
▫ Batteries.
▫ Lens.
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Naming: AUXILIARY MAINTENANCE OF AIRCRAFT INTERIOR CONDITIONING
Code: UF0964
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit is associated with RP3 and RP4.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: Describe and apply maintenance on the most common elements of interior furniture.
CE1.1 Description of furniture items such as Galleys, crew rest areas, armchairs, bathrooms and baggage handlers.
CE1.2 Know the procedures for dismantling and assembling interior furniture elements. More common forms of assembly and care to have when disassembling said elements.
CE1.3 Inspections of interior furniture elements.
C2: Identify the most frequent repairs of the disassembled interior furniture elements.
CE2.1 Perform the simple repairs of metal components of structure of the disassembled elements.
CE2.2 Perform simple repairs on plastic or fiber elements of structure or coating of disassembled elements.
C3: Identify the finishing methods of the components that are part of the interior furniture elements.
CE3.1 Apply small paint retouches.
CE3.2 Know the various methods of treatment of corrosion in elements of interior furniture.
CE3.3 Identify mechanical or chemical cleaning methods for aircraft interior components.
CE3.4 Describe the various methods of electrolytic coatings that are used to restore the components that require it after repair/inspection.
Contents
1. Components of the interior furniture of an aircraft
-Civil aircraft components.
▫ Galleys.
▫ Baths.
▫ Maleteros.
▫ Crew rest areas.
▫ Blogs.
-Military aircraft components.
▫ Parachute seats.
▫ Urinaries.
▫ Gruas handled loads.
▫ Load drag/drop components.
o Blocated Ganchs.
or Rails of rollers.
or Drag Ball Soils.
-Typical components of mission aircraft (maritime patrol, fishing etc).
▫ Consolas radaristas.
▫ Windows of observer bubbles.
2. Component anchor systems
-Anclages using slotted profiles and brooches.
-Anclages with fast brooches.
-Anclages by screws/inserts.
-Subjects of different elements by means of pressure/insertion.
3. Inspection and repair of the most common components
-Simple inspection and repair of metal elements.
-Simple inspection and repair of plastic and fibre elements with resins and fibre fabrics/powders (plastochemy).
-Corrosion Elimination Methods:
▫ Mechanical methods.
▫ Chemical methods (electrochemical cell).
4. Finish methods and paint retouches
-Description of the various methods of corrosion treatment.
▫ Application of Corrosion Inhibitor compounds. Precautions.
▫ Application of sealants.
-Types of surface finishes.
▫ electrolytic finishes.
▫ Alodinados, anodized, primers, paintings and final cleaning.
▫ Restoration of beetles and marks or painted or sticky indications (stickers).
FORMATIVE UNIT 5
Denomination: AERONAUTICAL SAFETY AND PREVENTION OF WORK AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS.
Code: UF0960
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP5.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Identify the different current regulations on the prevention of occupational risks, both general and specific in plane, in flight/ramp line.
CE1.1 Describe the overall risks of aircraft work.
CE1.2 Apply, at your level, the general protections to use to avoid risks.
CE1.3 Identify the specific risks of work on aircraft on the outside.
CE1.4 Apply, at your level the general protections to use to avoid these risks.
C2: Identify the different regulations in force on the prevention of specific work risks by plane in hangar.
CE2.1 Identify the overall risks of aircraft work in hangar.
CE2.2 Use, at your level, the general protections to use to avoid these risks.
C3: Identify the different airworthiness regulations, both international and national, as well as civil and military.
CE3.1 Identify the risks arising from the lack of implementation of this legislation.
CE3.2 Apply at its level, the current regulations on airworthiness, using the protections according to the established protocol.
C4: Consequence workers in the performance of good work practices in the performance of their work activity, for the conservation of the environment.
CE4.1 To know the polluting elements derived from the work practice.
CE4.2 Apply, at their level, the necessary precautions and protections to prevent the damage of these pollutants.
Contents
1. Prevention of occupational risks
-Law on the Prevention of Risks and Regulations on Safety and Hygiene. Mandatory compliance at work.
-Integration of preventive activity.
-Work and health.
-Working conditions, concept, conditions and risk factors.
-Danger Senalization. Information and recommendation providing for such standards.
-Scope of personal and material damages in case of non-compliance.
-Physical Contaminants. Classification.
-Protective equipment.
-Chemical agents.
-Biological agents.
-Fires.
-Workloads.
-Occupational health and its monitoring.
-First aid.
-Civil and criminal liability that leads to non-compliance.
-Handling the security elements and their usefulness in each case.
2. Airworthiness Regulations
-International and national standards of airworthiness.
-Military air regulations.
-Civil air regulations.
3. Environmental security
-Treatment of different wastes
-Regulations on different types of waste containers.
-Environmental management UNE77-801-9.
-Environmental policy.
-Environmental effects.
-European Regulation on Ecomanagement and Ecoaudits (EMAS) ISO14001.
-Natural and technological hazards.
-Pollution of the water medium and its prevention.
-Air pollution, sources of pollution and prevention.
-Debug systems.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | Number of maximum hours susceptible distance | |
|---|---|---|
|
| 50 |
|
| UF0962 | 40 | 10 |
| Formative Unit 3-UF0963 | 60 | 20 |
| Formative Unit 4-UF0964 | 30 | 10 |
|
Unit 5-UF0960 | 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
The training units for this module can be programmed independently.
NON-WORKING PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE MODULE FOR AERONAUTICAL MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
Code: MP0199
Duration: 80 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform service and mechanical operations required by the aircraft by skillfully handling the necessary machines or equipment and applying the established procedures
CE1.1 With dexterity handling machines or equipment necessary to carry out the operations of carreting and retrofitting of aircraft.
CE1.2 Perform the necessary operations to supply electrical power, air conditioning, and water to the aircraft from external supply sources.
CE1.3 Perform fuel loading, unloading and drainage.
CE1.4 Assist in the operation of engine start and test, as support personnel.
CE1.5 Unmount and mount the door opening and closing mechanisms, registers, exterior panels, among others and subsequently perform sealing.
CE1.6 Perform the necessary operations to fasten, protect, heat, connect to mass (grounding) the aircraft and/or its components on the ground.
CE1.7 Perform the necessary operations to carry out, external technical cleaning of the aircraft, train grasses, flight doors and controls, and the aircraft's disices.
C2: Perform service and mechanical operations inside the aircraft by applying the established procedures.
CE2.1 Perform the necessary operations to replace panels inside the aircraft and passenger seats.
CE2.2 Perform the cleaning and disinfection operations required to keep the aircraft's water tanks in perfect functionality.
CE2.3 Restore by replacing or applying small paint repairs to the tag and interior marks on the aircraft.
C3: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE3.1 behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE3.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the work center.
CE3.3 Diligently undertake the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE3.4 Integrate into the production processes of the work center.
CE3.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE3.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Handling support machines, tugboat tractors, drag bars, test benches
-Localization of the external outlet of current and supplying electrical power to an aircraft.
-Localization of the external intake of pneumatics and the supply of pneumatic power.
-Connecting a drag bar to the aircraft and towing tractor.
-Localization of pressure, return and filling of hydraulic systems. Connection of the hydraulic bank.
-Involvement in the towing of an aircraft.
-Participation in the commissioning of engines.
2. Simple aircraft service operations
-Collaboration on a fuel refuelling.
-Assistance to the supply of liquid or gaseous oxygen,
-Realization of the wastewater/drinking water system service.
-Realization of oil and hydraulic service the power plant systems, hydraulic system, air conditioning packages, APUs, trains.
-Running oases.
-Realization of the aircraft's security putting jobs.
-Participation in the technical cleanings and de-icing tasks of the aircraft.
3. Simple maintenance operations on aircraft
-Unmount and mount of records, accesses, doors.
-Disassembly and assembly of panels, seats, floors, interior of the aircraft.
-Replacing the aircraft's internal and external lighting elements.
-Realization of finishing and sealing in small repairs.
4. Integration and communication in the job center
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Tracking the regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
III. PRESCRIPTIONS FOR TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF1315_1: Auxiliary Operations on the Aircraft | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent titles • Technical and Technical Superior of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professionalism level 2 and 3 of the professional Air Transport and Maintenance Family Aeronautics area | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF1316_1: Aircraft workshop auxiliary operations | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent titles • Technical and Technical Superior of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professionalism level 2 and 3 of the professional Air Transport and Maintenance Family Aeronautics area | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM SPACES, FACILITIES, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 |
45 | 60 | |
|
Workshop | 600 | 600 | |
|
100 |
| M1 | M2 | |
|---|---|---|
|
X |
X | |
|
Workshop | X | X |
|
| X | X | X |
| Equipment | |
|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audio-visual equipment -PCS installed in network, projection canon, and Internet -Specialty specific software -Rotuder-write Pizarras -Rotafolios -Classroom material -Table and chair for trainer -Messes and chairs for pupils |
|
areonbird workshop | Teams -"Scrap" Equipment -Engines -7 Kg pneumatic installation. /cm. -Power outlets at 220VCA and 12VCC -Measures instruments -Work Bank with screw and pneumatic connections -Workshop Pizarra -Scale and platforms appropriate to the size of the aircraft -Arnes and lifeline -Nitrogen Carro equipped -Hydraulic Bank equipped Tools -Calibrated Rule -King's Pie -Demo of the ' Documentary Management program -Limas -Cut Alicates -Stop Tages -Electrical Cable Stapling Tools -Tube Stapling Tools -Electrical Soft Welding Tools -Tensiometer -Vacuometer and Manometer -Miliohmeter -Amperimeter and Voltmeter -Portable Power Supply -pins and pins of pins -Fixed key set -Glass key set -Torcometro -Plastic hammer -Tenacables -Tenaces -Oil and other waste collection buckets and buckets -Oil Bank -Flammable Products-Armarium -Nitrogen |
|
| -Tire and Electrical Tables -Racks for Normal -pneumatic Remachators -Cherry GBP-730 machines -Manual cherry machine -Flexometer -Calibers pass-does not pass, according to diameters -Depth Calibers -Universal rivet check templates and HLs -Truloc -Seal pistons -HI-Shear Machines -Dynamic Laves -Fresh Limas -Bullets -Flat Stampels or Bullets -Brocks -Glecos -Escarators -Hazelnuts -Brake Wires -Specific Installations Hydraulic and pneumatic -Aircraft or constituent elements thereof. |
|
store | -Estatos -Own machinery for the movement of aeronautical |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units that must be available for the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces, will be sufficient for a minimum of 15 students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to the higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX IV
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Designation: MAINTENANCE OF FORCE TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS AND VEHICLE RUNNING TRAINS
Code: TMVG0309
Professional family: Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles
Professional area: Electromechanical vehicles
Professional qualification level: 2
Professional reference qualification:
TMV047_2 Maintenance of power transmission systems and vehicle run-in trains (RD 295/2004 of 20 February).
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0130_2: Maintain hydraulic and pneumatic systems, steering, and suspension.
UC0131_2: Maintain transmission and brake systems.
General competition:
Perform maintenance operations on the transmission, brake, suspension and steering systems of motor vehicles, industrial vehicles and motorcycles by applying the techniques and procedures established by the manufacturer, achieving the required quality in safety conditions.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its activity in small, medium and large companies in the vehicle maintenance sector, in the area of electromechanical development processes.
Productive Sectors:
Maintenance and installation of transmission systems, brakes, suspension and steering of motor vehicles, industrial vehicles and motorcycles.
Manufacture and distribution of spare parts.
Distribution of diagnostic equipment.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
-Repairing pneumatic and hydraulic systems
-Repairing transmission and brake systems
-Repair and steering systems repairer
-Operary of companies engaged in the manufacture of spare parts.
-Seller/distributor of spare parts and diagnostic equipment
Duration of the associated training: 480 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0130_2: Address and suspension systems (200 hours).
• UF1170: Maintenance of the vehicle steering system (80 hours).
• UF1171: Maintenance of the vehicle suspension system (60 hours).
• UF1172: Maintenance of vehicle wheels (30 hours).
• UF0917: (Transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MF0131_2: Transmission and brake systems (230 hours).
• UF1173: Maintenance of the vehicle transmission system (90 hours).
• UF1174: Maintenance of the vehicle's mechanical and hydraulic brake system (60 hours).
• UF1175: Maintenance of the electrical and electronic system of vehicle brakes (50 hours).
• UF0917: (Transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MP0246: Non-working professional practice module for Maintenance of force transmission systems and motor vehicle run-in trains (80 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established in the UF0917 Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in the maintenance of vehicles, of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
denomination: MAINTAIN HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC SYSTEMS. ADDRESS AND SUSPENSION
Level: 2
Code: UC0130_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Verify and restore continuity and functionality in pneumatic, hydraulic or combined circuits, after choosing the appropriate means.
CR1.1 The repair of the hydraulic or pneumatic circuit restores the perfect operation of the system to which it is associated.
CR1.2 The tightness of the different circuits is ensured, strictly respecting the original elements, means and specifications established by the manufacturer.
CR1.3 After the intervention in the circuit, the operating parameters (pressure, flow, operating cycles, temperature, etc.) remain within the expected margins.
CR1.4 The measurement of the different parameters is done by choosing the correct point, using the appropriate means and under the conditions set by the manufacturer.
CR1.5 In fluid handling (filling, replacement, etc.), the properties of the fluids are taken into account and the safety and environmental standards are respected.
RP2: Perform the diagnosis of breakdowns in the train of a vehicle, in the suspension and steering systems by means of the technical documentation and the appropriate measuring and control instruments to identify the breakdown and the causes that produce it, in safety conditions.
CR2.1 The selected technical documentation allows you to relate plans and specifications to the system that is the object of the repair.
CR2.2 There are no slides, abnormal noises, or loss of fluids in the force transmission systems.
CR2.3 The use of measurement and control devices ensures that the steering system meets the different parameters, as well as the reversibility conditions required by the manufacturer.
CR2.4 The tyres comply with the specifications laid down in the technical standards and in the legislation in force.
CR2.5 The operating parameters of the suspension system are within the margins described by the manufacturer.
CR2.6 Effective braking is ensured according to the technical standards, verifying the tightness of the circuit.
CR2.7 The diagnosis of the breakdown establishes its causes according to a reasoned process of cause-effect.
CR2.8 The causes of the breakdown are confirmed by the proper reproduction of the fault, and the corrective measures are implemented.
CR2.9 If required, different repair alternatives are evaluated.
CR2.10 The diagnosis does not cause other breakdowns or damage.
CR2.11 The interpretation of the data obtained by the electronic management units makes it possible to make the diagnosis of the fault.
CR2.12 The diagnosis of breakdowns is performed completely in the default time.
RP3: Maintain and adjust parameters in the steering and wheel system, obtaining the accuracy, driving reliability and stability of the vehicle pre-fixed by the manufacturer.
CR3.1 Taking into account the parameters of tightness, pressures, dimensions, torque, assembly and conservation, the state of use and behaviour of the wheels is determined.
CR3.2 The absence of imbalances and vibrations in the steering and wheel system is checked.
CR3.3 Disassembly, mounting and replacement of steering system elements is performed in accordance with the manufacturer's established procedures and quality standards.
CR3.4 In the hydraulic circuits or assisted-direction tires the total tightness and the values of established pressures are restored.
CR3.5 The system parameter setting is performed to allow the nominal values of the address geometry to be reset.
RP4: Get the correct operation of the suspension system, to ensure the stability of the vehicle.
CR4.1 The operating parameters of the suspension system are within the margins set by the manufacturer
CR4.2 The interventions made in the suspension system remove noise, vibration and wear and wear, allowing other systems to operate in total efficiency (direction, brakes, etc.).
CR4.3 The replacement of both elastic elements and shock absorbers is performed in accordance with the manufacturer's established procedures and quality standards.
CR4.4 In repairs made to pneumatic suspension systems, pneumatic oil and height adjustment systems are assured of the pressures of work and tightness.
CR4.5 In electronically governed suspension systems, the interventions made ensure that the operating parameters of the control unit are within the margins described by the manufacturer.
CR4.6 The interventions in the electronically governed suspension systems are eliminated in the hydraulic circuit and the continuity of the electrical circuit is ensured.
CR4.7 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case.
RP5: Run all repair operations in accordance with the safety and health rules.
CR5.1 Of the safety standards of the workshop, the risks inherent in the specific work are extracted, and personal and collective protection measures are checked.
CR5.2 Personal and collective security rules are respected while keeping the work area free of risks.
CR5.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Optical control bank, steering aligners, brake fluid recharging apparatus, vehicle lifts, suspension spring extraction apparatus, suspension system test benches, comparator clocks, magnetic supports, calibers, micrometers, wheel anti-lock system testers, flowmeters, manometers, polymeters, hydraulic "tester", wheel balancer, specific equipment for checking associated electronic systems, manual electromechanical tool equipment.
Clutches and converters. Gearbox (conventional, automatic, four by four ..). Transmission elements (axes, semi-axles, joints, joints ..). Differentials (conventional, viscous, Ferguson, self-blining ..). Traction control systems (EDS ..). Steering systems, hydraulic and pneumatic servo-addresses. Wheels and tires. Conventional, pneumatic, hydroneumatic, piloted suspension systems. Conventional brake systems, pneumatic, parking, trailer and electric. Brake control systems (ABS ..).
Products and results
Preventive, predictive and corrective maintenance of the systems for the transmission of pneumatic, hydraulic, steering and suspension forces and running trains. Disassembly and assembly of mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic and electronic elements or assemblies. Adjustment, control and measurement of parameters. Handling of equipment and technical documentation in any support.
Information used or generated:
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original values are given. Cutting manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders. Media: graphics, writing and computer science.
Competition Unit 2
denomination: MAINTAIN TRANSMISSION AND BRAKE SYSTEMS
Level: 2
Code: UC0131_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform the diagnosis of the breakdown of the transmission and brake systems of a vehicle by means of the technical documentation and the appropriate measuring and control instruments to identify the breakdown and the causes that produce it, in safety conditions.
CR1.1 The selected technical documentation allows you to relate plans and specifications to the system that is the object of the repair.
CR1.2 There are no slides, abnormal noises, or loss of fluids in the force transmission systems.
CR1.3 The operating parameters of the brake system are within the margins established by the manufacturer.
CR1.4 Effective braking is ensured according to the technical standards, verifying the tightness of the circuit.
CR1.5 The diagnosis of the breakdown establishes its causes according to a reasoned process of cause-effect.
CR1.6 The causes of the breakdown are confirmed by the proper reproduction of the fault, and the corrective measures are implemented.
CR1.7 If required, different repair alternatives are evaluated.
CR1.8 The interpretation of the data obtained by the autodiagnosis units allows the diagnosis of the breakdown to be performed.
CR1.9 The diagnosis does not cause other breakdowns or damage and the diagnosis of breakdowns is performed completely in the predetermined time.
RP2: Maintain the braking system, achieving the prescribed efficiency of any gear.
CR2.1 The replacement or repair of mechanical and/or friction elements in the braking system restores the correct operation of the braking system, its efficiency and the absence of noise and vibration.
CR2.2 In the control circuit (hydraulic or pneumatic) the pressure indicated by the manufacturer is obtained, the total absence of leaks and a perfect filling of the same, in the necessary cases.
CR2.3 The generators, amplifiers and force regulators ("pedaliers", pressure pumps, servo brakes, compressors, vacuum pumps, regulators, limiters etc) are fitted and comply with the manufacturer's technical specifications.
CR2.4 The intervention made ensures the correct operation of the auxiliary brake systems (parking, electrobrakes, and trailer brakes).
CR2.5 The intervention restores the continuity of the electrical circuit and the correct operation of the sensor elements and actuators of the anti-lock brake system.
CR2.6 The review, cleaning, repair and/or replacement of elements and subassemblies of the braking system is performed according to the methods of assembly, disassembly and quality regulations established by the manufacturer.
RP3: Maintain assemblies or subassemblies, mechanical and hydraulic, in the force transmission system, adjusting the operating parameters according to the manufacturer's specifications.
CR3.1 The replacement or adjustment of mechanical elements of the gearbox, allows the smooth and precise connection of the different gears, suppressing anomalous noises and vibrations and there are no leakage of lubricant in the gearbox.
CR3.2 The operating parameters of the transmission system are within the margins established by the manufacturer.
CR3.3 With repairs and adjustments made to the friction clutch system and control device, the total absence of noise and sliding vibrations is ensured.
CR3.4 Maintenance carried out on automatic gearbox with hydraulic control ensures the absence of noise, vibration, leakage and anomalous temperatures.
CR3.5 In the automatic, electronically governed, exchange boxes, the command unit's performance program is developed according to the manufacturer's schedule.
CR3.6 The replacement, adjustment or repair of transmission trees, joints and homokinetic joints, of the transmission system eliminates holguras, imbalances and trepidations.
CR3.7 With the adjustment of parameters achieved, the correct operation of the different types of differentials, including those governed electronically, is achieved.
CR3.8 In the automatic gearbox the torque converter has no noises, vibrations, no leaks and the operating temperature is within the intended margins.
CR3.9 The various controls and parameter settings are performed with the appropriate tools, media and equipment, following the manufacturer's specifications.
CR3.10 The replacement or repair of mechanical elements is performed in accordance with the procedures established by the manufacturer.
CR3.11 It is verified, that with the maintenance performed, the functionality of the electronic traction control systems is restored.
CR3.12 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case
RP4: Run all repair operations in accordance with safety and health rules.
CR4.1 The safety standards of the workshop are extracted from the inherent risks inherent in the specific work, and the personal and collective protection measures are checked
CR4.2 Personal and collective safety standards are respected while keeping the work area free of risks.
CR4.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Optical control bank, vehicle lifts, brake fluid recharging apparatus, suspension spring extraction apparatus, comparator clocks, magnetic supports, calibers, micrometers, wheel anti-lock system testers, flowmeters, manometers, polymeters, hydraulic "tester", wheel balancer, brake system test benches, manual electromechanical tool equipment, specific equipment for checking associated electronic systems.
Clutches and converters. Gearbox (conventional, automatic, four by four ..). Transmission elements (axes, semi-axles, joints, joints ..). Differentials (conventional, viscous, Ferguson, self-blining ..). Traction control systems (EDS ..). Steering systems, hydraulic and pneumatic servo-addresses. Wheels and tires. Conventional, pneumatic, hydroneumatic, piloted suspension systems. Conventional brake systems, tires, parking, trailer and electric. Brake control systems (ABS ..).
Products and results
Preventive, predictive and corrective maintenance of pneumatic and hydraulic transmission and brake systems. Disassembly and assembly of mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic and electronic elements or assemblies. Adjustment, control and measurement of parameters. Handling of equipment and documentation on any medium.
Information used or generated:
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original values are given. Cutting manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders. Media: graphic, written or magnetic and computer.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: ADDRESS AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
Code: MF0130_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0130_2: Maintain hydraulic and pneumatic systems, steering, and suspension.
Duration: 200 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF THE VEHICLE STEERING SYSTEM.
Code: UF1170
Duration: 80hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP2, and RP3 in the address system aspects.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the operation of mechanical steering systems and assist employees in all types of vehicles.
CE1.1 Identify all the elements of the direction (mechanical or assisted), explaining the operation and the mission of the same.
CE1.2 List all the bounds of the geometry in the direction, describing how all of them are involved in the directionality of the vehicle.
CE1.3 Describe the interference in the direction caused by tire wear or tire failure.
C2: Repair the anomalies of the set of mechanisms that make up the steering system of the vehicle to ensure that the driving is safe, progressive and smooth, guaranteeing the safety of the vehicle.
EC2.1 Adjust the direction box, with the appropriate equipment and respecting the adjustment tolerances set in the technical tab.
CE2.2 Check for holguras and/or wear on the steering and axial kneecap, as well as on the steering rack itself, visually and on the test bench.
CE2.3 Adjust the direction's zipper by respecting the adjustment tolerances set by the manufacturer.
CE2.4 Check the pressures in the assisted direction using the appropriate pressure gauge.
CE2.5 Check the absence of air in the power steering hydraulic circuit. CE2.6 Check the absence of leakage in the hydraulic system of the assisted steering.
CE2.7 Handle the technical information of the manufacturer, either on paper or in digital format to search for the relevant data and characteristics.
C3: Check, repair and verify the variable electrical power steering system.
CE3.1 Check and verify the electrical circuit (calculating and peripheral) of the variable electrical power steering system.
CE3.2 Diagnose and repair the failure or failure of electrical and electronic circuits involved in the steering system.
C4: Check the geometry of the direction with the alignment equipment and correct anomalies to avoid irregular wear on the tires guaranteeing the safety of the vehicle in terms of its addressability.
CE4.1 Use the Aligned Equipment Operating Manual
CE4.2 Identify and interpret the data offered by the aligned team.
CE4.3 Proceed to the performance of the adjustment and adjustment of the direction from the data obtained from the aligned equipment.
C5: Verify the quality of the operations performed on the vehicle's steering system.
CE5.1 Check the geometry of the address with the aligned team.
CE5.2 Check for set tightening by the manufacturer and visual review of the elements handled in the repair.
CE5.3 Vehicle Test on Bank.
Contents
1. The steering system in the vehicle.
-Evolution of the steering system.
-Operating principle.
-Elements that make up the address system:
▫ Address zip (mechanical and assisted).
▫ Address box (mechanical and assisted).
▫ Address Brazos.
▫ Address and Axial Rotules.
▫ Address column.
▫ Address Volante. Handlebars on motorbikes.
▫ Manguettes. Hose kneecap.
▫ hose bearings.
▫ directional buffers (Mcpherson system).
2. Repairs on power steering systems.
-Hydraulic, electro-hydraulic and variable-assist assistance.
-Function of the assistance elements to the address.
-Direction, hydraulic and electro-hydraulic pumps.
-Aceites used in servo.
-The servo-address oil repository.
-Connection sleeves.
-System sensors and actuators.
3. Check the geometry and alignment of the address.
-Convergence.
-Divergence.
-Advance angle.
-Fall angle.
-Output angle.
-Conjugate Drops.
-Spin Geometry.
-Alignment of the address.
-Alignment machines. Basic operations.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: MAINTAINING THE VEHICLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Code: UF1171
Duration: 60 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1 and RP2 in the aspects relating to the suspension system and the RP4.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Repair the faults of the set of mechanisms that make up the system of suspension of the vehicle in order to ensure that the driving is safe, progressive and smooth, guaranteeing the active and passive safety of the occupants of the vehicle achieving the maximum adhesion and stability of the vehicle with respect to the firm.
CE1.1 Identify and number the elements that make up the different types of suspension, explaining the mission and operation of each of them separately and within the suspension set.
CE1.2 Check the status and adjust the anchors of each and every element of the suspension, verifying that the torque of the joints is marked by the manufacturer.
-Use the manufacturer's manual.
CE1.3 Adjust the torque bars of the suspension system, with the parameters indicated by the manufacturer.
-Use the manufacturer's manual.
-Use specific tools and tools.
CE1.4 Verify the suspension arms, trapeze, dampers, crossbows and silentblocks of the suspension system, due to the importance of these elements with respect to the safety and the need for them to be in good condition to make the alignment of the vehicle optimal.
C2: Identify, check and repair the elements of the hydroneumatic suspension system.
CE2.1 Identify the elements of the hydroneumatic suspension system, its operation, and the diagnosis of breakdowns.
CE2.2 Identify and interpret hydraulic schemes of the hydroneumatic suspension system.
CE2.3 Check the operating pressures of the hydroneumatic suspension, using the appropriate manometers and tools.
CE2.4 Diagnose and repair the leaks of the hydroneumatic suspension system, checking and verifying its tightness.
CE2.5 Purge the circuit of the hydroneumatic suspension and verify its proper functioning by performing a dynamic test.
C3: Identify, check, and repair the elements of the smart suspension system.
CE3.1 Identify the elements of the intelligent suspension system, its operation, and the diagnosis of breakdowns.
CE3.2 Diagnose breakdowns and repair damaged items.
CE3.3 Verify the correct operation of the smart suspension system by performing a dynamic test.
C4: Identify, check and repair the elements of the suspension system of an industrial vehicle.
CE4.1 Identify the components of a crossbow suspension system, checking the state of the crossbow point, its perfect fixation, and its corresponding cheapings.
CE4.2 Identify the wear of the elements of the crossbow assembly and proceed to its replacement if necessary.
CE4.3 Identify the components of the pneumatic suspension system of an industrial vehicle, checking its correct operation and verifying the absence of air leaks in the circuit.
CE4.4 Identify and interpret the schemas of the pneumatic system.
CE4.5 Make the necessary repairs taking into account the safety of the operators carrying out the action and verify the quality of the repair.
Contents
1. Maintenance of the conventional suspension system in the vehicle.
-Evolution of the suspension in the vehicle.
-Operating principle.
-Features of the suspension.
-Elements that make up the suspension system.
▫ Buffers.
▫ Muelles.
▫ Ballestas.
▫ Torsion bars.
▫ Trainers.
▫ Suspension Brazos.
▫ Elastic elements.
▫ Stabilizing bars.
▫ Stabilizing bar braces.
▫ Suspension Rotules.
2. Maintenance of the hydroneumatic suspension system.
-Evolution of the hydroneumatic suspension.
-Applications.
-Elements that make up the system.
-Operating principle.
-Circuits and essential system schemas.
3. Maintenance of the intelligent suspension system.
-Evolution of the smart suspension.
-Elements that make up the system.
-Operating principle.
-Circuits and essential system schemas.
4. Maintenance of the industrial vehicle suspension system.
-Evolution of the suspension system in industrial vehicles.
-Elements that make up the system.
-Variations according to the application and type of industrial vehicle.
-Operation.
-Circuits and essential system schemas.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF VEHICLE WHEELS
Code: UF1172
Duration: 30 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to RP3 in the wheel-related aspects.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Diagnose, repair or replace the flat-tire assembly, to ensure safe and comfortable driving, ensuring the safety of the occupants of the vehicle.
CE1.1 Verify the condition of the tires, checking their wear index, tire aging and tightness of the tire with respect to the tire, in turn verifying the inflation pressure of the tires.
CE1.2 Identify the nomenclatures of the tire, analyzing the characteristics and information of its manufacture.
CE1.3 Analyze the causes of the worn-out tires of the tire, scoring on the work tab for further correction or repair of the breakdowns causing the wear.
CE1.4 Check the status and diagnose possible deformations on the rim.
CE1.5 Unmount and mount the flat-tire assembly with the specific machinery (demounter), taking the precaution of not damaging any of the elements, to achieve the perfect air-tightness of the pressure air inside, guaranteeing the safety of the occupants of the vehicle.
CE1.6 Balance the flat-tire assembly with the specific machinery (balancer), to ensure the comfort of the gear.
CE1.7 Verify the quality of the operations performed, thus ensuring the safety of the occupants of the vehicle.
Contents
1. The flat-tire assembly.
-Evolution of the tyre.
-Raw materials on the tyre.
-Manufacturing processes.
-Tyre Nomenclature.
-Evolution of the tyre.
-Tyre types according to purpose.
-Inflate valves (types according to purpose).
-Electronic valves.
-Types of tires (iron or alloy).
-Specific tires for specific tires.
2. Disassembly of wheels and dynamic balancing machine
-Principles of operation.
-Series of counterweights used.
-Use specific employees.
-Dynamic balance.
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Denomination: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP5
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
-Work accident.
-Professional illness.
-Other pathologies derived from work.
-Economic and operational impacts.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
-The labor risk prevention law.
-The prevention services regulation.
-Scope and legal bases.
-Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
-National agencies.
-Autonomous bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
-In the handling of tools and equipment.
-In handling systems and installations.
-In the storage and transport of loads.
-Exposure to physical, chemical or biological agents.
-The fire.
-Physical fatigue.
-Mental fatigue.
-Job dissatisfaction.
-Collective protection.
-Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1170 | 80 | 30 |
|
Unit 2-UF1171 | 60 | 20 |
| 30 | 10 | |
|
| 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
The training units 1,2 and 3 must be programmed in sequence, the formative unit 4 can be programmed independently.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Naming: TRANSMISSION AND FRENSO SYSTEMS
Code: MF0131_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0131_2: Maintain transmission and brake systems.
Duration: 230 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF THE VEHICLE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Code: UF1173
Duration: 90 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to RP1 and RP3 in aspects relating to the vehicle's transmission system.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Diagnose, repair and verify the elements of the clutch system using the specific tool.
CE1.1 Check the operation of the mechanical and hydraulic clutch system, verifying its tightness.
CE1.2 Unmount the vehicle's clutch mechanism, identify each of its elements and its mission by valuing its wear index.
-Verify the clutch disc by measuring the thickness of the linings, valuing their wear.
-Check the clutch mace, checking that there are no breaks in your diaphragm or overheating in the friction zone.
-Analyze the state of the push collar, its slide through the guide and the yoke that moves it. Check the absence of a game of the bearing of the collar.
-Verify the status of the clutch disk seat in the engine steering wheel.
CE1.3 Mount the clutch assembly by ensuring that the disc is centered with respect to the motor-wheel hole.
CE1.4 Mounting the gearbox correctly taking into account the centring casings.
CE1.5 Adjust and regulate the game of the clutch pedal, taking into account the slack allowed by the manufacturer.
CE1.6 Verify the quality of the repair done, testing the vehicle and checking the absence of skating and analyzing the clutch set game.
C2: Diagnose, repair and verify the gearbox, using the specific tool and following the technical instructions.
CE2.1 Analyze the oil status of the gearbox, verifying the absence of a metal chip and checking its degradation.
CE2.2 Extract the gearbox from the vehicle and identify each of its elements and their function.
CE2.3 Unmounting of the gearbox on the workbank, identifying each of its elements and valuing its wear or degradation by use.
CE2.4 Verify the state of the fixed, free and displaceable pinions, as well as the alignment of the different axes, analyzing the wear and tear of each and each of them to determine which ones are to be replaced.
CE2.5 Verify and analyze the selector mechanism of the forks, axes, and locking system belonging to each speed.
CE2.6 Verify the status of the gearbox housings, observing the absence of cracks and/or fissures that may alter the tightness.
CE2.7 Analyze the status of the bearings, their radial and axial play, replacing these items if necessary.
CE2.8 On change boxes that incorporate differential group, verify status:
-The attack pinion and the crown.
-The adjustment of your conical bearings.
-Planetarians and satellites.
-The adjustment washers.
CE2.9 Mount the change box assembly by following the manufacturer's instructions.
CE2.1 0 Verify the quality of the operations performed, checking the correct operation and smoothness of the gearbox.
C3: Diagnose, verify, and repair differential groups and transmissions.
CE3.1 Unmount the differential of a vehicle and identify each of its components, analyzing its state and index of wear.
-Check the adjustment of the conical pair, the attack pinion, and the crown.
-Check the adjustment of your conical bearings.
-Check the state of the satellites, their adjustment washers, and their axis.
-Check the status of the planetariums and the box that wraps them.
CE3.2 Mount the differential set according to the manufacturer's instructions. Check the proper functioning of the elements that compose it.
CE3.3 Review the elastic joints, homozynetic joints and crutches of the transmissions, checking the absence of play and holguras.
C4: Diagnose, verify, and repair 4X4 vehicle transfer boxes.
CE4.1 To differentiate the different mechanisms used in vehicles with 4-wheel drive.
CE4.2 Knowing the operation and handling of the different types used in 4X4 vehicles.
CE4.3 Interpret the electrical operating systems and principles of an electronically managed traction system.
CE4.4 Perform maintenance tasks according to the manufacturer's technical manuals.
C5: Diagnose, verify, and repair the operation of different differential locking systems.
CE5.1 Check the operation of the different systems of the differential lock.
-Manuals, electrical, pneumatic, and self-blusters.
CE5.2 Verify the operation of control systems (electrical or pneumatic), actuators, sensors, wiring and pipes.
CE5.3 Proceed to repair and/or replace items if necessary, following the manufacturer's instructions.
C6: Diagnose, verify, and repair the complete system of automatic change boxes.
CE6.1 Identify the elements that make up an automatic transmission system.
CE6.2 Check the correct operation of the torque converter, using the appropriate tools and gauges.
CE6.3 Check the flow rate and pressure of the automatic gearbox, both at the input and output.
CE6.4 Identify and interpret the hydraulic and electrical schemes of the automatic transmission system.
CE6.5 Check the absence of transmission oil leaks.
CE6.6 Perform maintenance tasks.
CE6.7 Perform all operations according to the technical manuals and follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Contents
1. Maintenance of the clutch system in the vehicle.
-The clutch set.
-Evolution of the clutch system.
-Elements of the clutch system.
-Manufacturing materials of the clutch system.
-Embrague monomase.
-Embrague bimasa.
-Embrague of mechanical control.
-Embrague of hydraulic control.
-System of purging in hydraulic clutches.
2. The manual and robotized gearbox.
-Changes in the gearbox.
-Operation of the gearbox.
-Changes box items.
-Manufacturing materials for the component of the gearbox.
-Changes with differential group.
-Boxes of robotized changes.
-Oils used for lubrication.
3. Transmissions and differential groups.
-The transmissions.
-Evolution of transmissions.
-Components of the transmissions.
-Evolution of differential groups.
-Elements of the differential.
-Manufacturing materials for the components of the differential.
-Oils used for lubrication.
4. The transfer boxes.
-The utility of the transfer boxes.
-Elements that make up the transfer box.
-Transfer box types.
-Manufacturing materials for the components of the transfer box.
-Operation of the transfer boxes.
-Oils used for lubrication.
5. The differential lock.
-The differential lock utility.
-The operating principle of the differential lock.
-Elements that make up the differential lock.
-differential lock types.
6. Automatic change boxes.
-The evolution of the automatic gearbox.
-Automatic gearbox operation.
-Auto change box items.
-Manufacturing materials for the automatic gearbox components.
-Pair Converter.
-Oil types and particularities for automatic gearbox.
-Maintenance of automatic change boxes.
-Continuous speed variants per strap and chain.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF THE VEHICLE ' S MECHANICAL AND HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM
Code: UF1174
Duration: 60 hours
Competition Referrer: This formative unit corresponds to RP1 RP2 and RP3 in the mechanical and hydraulic brake system aspects.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Diagnose, repair and verify the elements and components of the vehicle's mechanical brake system, analyzing its wear and repair and replacement procedures.
CE1.1 Unmount and mount all elements of the brake system, analyzing its functions and wear.
CE1.2 Identify the elements of the disc brake system, analyzing its wear and replacement processes if necessary.
-Verify the rectifying and alping of the disk.
-Verify the wear equality of the pills.
CE1.3 Identify the elements of the drum brake system, analyzing its wear and replacement processes if necessary.
-Verify the ovality of the drum.
-Check the system for automatic approximation of shoes and hand brake efficiency.
-Check the wear tolerances of the drum.
-Verify the wear of the shoes.
CE1.4 Verify the brake compensator, analyzing if there is difficulty in its path.
-Cleanup and adjustment of the compensator.
CE1.5 Check the status and operation of the brake service, taking into account the check valve and the absence of leaks in its vacuum circuit.
CE1.6 Verify the operation of the vacuum pump by analyzing whether or not there is wear on its pallets.
C2: Diagnose, repair and verify the elements and components of the vehicle's hydraulic brake system, analyzing its wear and repair and replacement procedures.
CE2.1 Identify the hydraulic elements of the vehicle braking system, analyzing its wear and replacement processes if necessary.
CE2.2 Check the tightness of the hydraulic brake system, verifying the absence of leakage and checking the rate of degradation of the brake fluid.
-Know the different types of brake fluid.
-Diagnose the humidity index on the circuit with the specific tool.
-Brake hydraulic circuit purging techniques.
CE2.3 Check the state of the whiplash, holguras, and tours of the tweezers and the pumps.
CE2.4 Make the specific taring of the rear brake compensator or limiter using the specific gauges.
CE2.5 Check the condition and operation of the brake pump, verifying the absence of leaks and/or obstructions.
CE2.6 Check on the brake meter that the force applied to the wheels of each axis is the same, highlighting the difference of forces between the two axes.
C3: Diagnose, verify and repair the elements and components of the braking system of an industrial vehicle, truck or coach, identifying its components and analyzing its wear index, proceeding to the replacement of elements if necessary.
CE3.1 Check the air tightness of the air circuit of the brakes of a heavy vehicle, truck or coach, verifying the absence of water in the circuit itself and in the calderines.
CE3.2 Verify the correct operation of the valves in the air circuit, checking that the valves are clean and that they comply correctly with their tarado.
CE3.3 Verify the work pressures of the air circuit using the appropriate tools and gauges, following the manufacturer's instructions.
CE3.4 Check and verify the braking lungs, as well as the shoe drive biettes.
CE3.5 Check and verify the operation of the air generator compressor of the brake circuit, measuring the pressure generated and contrasting with the manufacturer's manual.
CE3.6 Check and verify the circuit's dryers, proceeding to replace it if necessary.
Contents
1. Mechanical elements of the braking system.
-Brake discs.
-Brake pins.
-Brake drums.
-brake shoes.
-Empty pump.
-Servobrake.
-Hand brake system.
2. Hydraulic elements of the braking system.
-Brake pump.
-Brake compensator.
-Brake pumps.
-brake pads.
-Brake limiter.
-Brake partitions.
-Brake Latitudes.
-rigid brake pipes.
-Deposit of brake fluid.
-Brake liquid.
-Purgling equipment.
-Empty Checker.
3. Maintenance of the braking system in an industrial vehicle.
-Evolution of the brake system in industrial vehicles.
-Operating principle.
-Common elements with a conventional tourism brake system.
-Operation of its elements.
-Air circuits.
-Diagnosis of breakdowns.
-Verification of leaks in the air circuit.
4. Test on braking
-The brake meter and its characteristics.
-Testing and diagnosis.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF THE VEHICLE ' S ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC BRAKE SYSTEM
Code: UF1175
Duration: 50 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to RP1 RP2 and RP3 in the electrical and electronic brake system aspects.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Verify, diagnose, and repair the brake anti-lock system, checking that it meets and maintains efficiency and addressability.
CE1.1 Identify the elements that the ABS system brings to the conventional brake circuit, explaining the operation of each component.
CE1.2 Verify cabling of system components, using polymeter and oscilloscope.
CE1.3 Interpret the electrical scheme of the ABS system, locating the sensors, electronic calculator, relays and hydraulic group.
CE1.4 Check with the diagnosis team for the ABS system and analyze memorized failures.
CE1.5 Vehicle purging technique equipped with ABS taking into account manufacturer's instructions and precautions.
CE1.7 Verify the quality of the repairs made to the vehicle.
C2: Verify, diagnose and repair the ESP electronic stability system, checking that it meets and maintains efficiency and addressability.
CE2.1 Check the elements that the ESP equipment brings to the vehicle stability system, explaining the operation of each component.
CE2.2 Verify the wiring of the system components, using the appropriate tools and contrasting the data obtained with the values offered by the manufacturer.
CE2.3 Interpret the electrical scheme of the ESP system, locating its sensors, actuators, control unit and control elements.
CE2.4 Check with the diagnosis team for the electronic system of ESP stability, analyzing the memorized failures.
C3: Verify, diagnose, and repair the electric control parking brake system.
CE3.1 Identify the elements that make up the electric control parking system.
CE3.2 Check the correct operation of the components of the electric control parking brake system.
CE3.3 Check with the diagnosis team for the parking brake system, analyzing the memorized failures.
C4: Verify, diagnose, and repair the industrial vehicle deceleration device.
CE4.1 Identify the elements that make up the system of deceleration of the industrial vehicle (electric brake).
CE4.2 Check the correct operation of the components of the deceleration system of the industrial vehicle, verifying that each and every one fulfills its mission according to the manufacturer's guidelines.
CE4.3 Repair and/or replace damaged or damaged items by use, following the manufacturer's instructions.
Contents
1. Verification, diagnosis and repair of the ABS anti-lock system.
-Evolution of ABS.
-Elements that make up the ABS system.
▫ Capers.
▫ Calculator.
▫ Coronas.
▫ Rels.
▫ Cabling.
▫ Hydraulic Group.
-ABS system diagnostics and checking.
2. The electronic stability system ESP.
-Evolution of ESP.
-Elements that make up the ESP system.
▫ Sensors.
▫ Capers.
▫ Control Unit.
▫ Cabling.
▫ Control elements.
-Diagnostic and checking the ESP system.
3. The electric control hand brake system.
-Operating principle.
-Elements that make up the system.
▫ Command Module.
▫ Emergency Tirator.
▫ Cabling.
▫ Position Captor.
▫ Command Palette.
▫ Table Witness.
4. Verification, diagnosis and repair of the industrial vehicle deceleration system.
-Operating principle.
-Elements that make up the system.
▫ Bobines.
▫ Estator.
▫ Solidarity discs with the transmission axis.
▫ Transmission.
▫ Friction plates.
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Naming: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP4
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.3 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.4 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.5 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Act according to the security plan using the company's security and prevention measures.
CE2.1 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the identified risks, including the selection, conservation and correct use of the individual and collective protective equipment.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
CE2.3 Adopt the basic sanitary measures, first aid techniques and transfer of accidents in different accident scenarios.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.1 Specify aspects of environmental regulations related to the risks arising from the activity of the workshop, such as noise, vibration, and the handling of combustible products, lubricants, paints and solvents, combustion gases, welding gases, waste materials, lijas, electrodes, etc.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.3 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the risks identified, including the correct handling of products and their storage, use of individual and collective protective equipment.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
-Work accident.
-Professional illness.
-Other pathologies derived from work.
-Economic and operational impacts.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
-The labor risk prevention law.
-The prevention services regulation.
-Scope and legal bases.
-Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
-National agencies.
-Autonomous bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
-In the handling of tools and equipment.
-In handling systems and installations.
-In the storage and transport of loads.
-Exposure to physical, chemical or biological agents.
-The fire.
-Physical fatigue.
-Mental fatigue.
-Job dissatisfaction.
-Collective protection.
-Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1173 | 90 | 30 |
|
Unit 2-UF1174 | 60 | 20 |
|
20 | ||
|
| 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
The training units 1,2 and 3 must be programmed in sequence, the formative unit 4 can be programmed independently.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
TRAINING MODULE PRACTICAL NON-WORK PROFESSIONAL MAINTENANCE OF SYSTEMS FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF POWER AND TRAIN OF VEHICLES OF VEHICLES
Code: MP0246
Duration: 80 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1. Participate in the processes of customer support, accompanying the manager.
CE1.1 Log the relevant data to perform maintenance and/or repair of the transmission of force and train systems of the customer vehicle.
CE1.2 Handle in a real situation, the work parts and technical repair manuals.
CE1.3 Fill in the work parts and albarans after the work has been done.
C2. Manage warehouse, parts orders, and consumable products.
CE2.1 Perform the warehouse inventory, if any.
CE2.2 Make, where appropriate, the order of consumable parts and products.
CE2.3 Fill in the documents used in the order items with the available means.
C3. Diagnose and repair vehicle breakdowns in a real situation.
CE3.1 Make the diagnosis of the submitted failures.
CE3.2 Perform the unmount and mount sequence of the involved elements.
CE3.3 Follow the guidelines established by the company or command staff, in relation to the repair procedures.
CE3.4 Perform the relevant checks to ensure customer repair and to ensure the safety inherent in the vehicle.
C4. Collaborate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the workplace.
CE4.1 Behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE4.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE4.3 Undertake with diligence the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE4.4 Integrate into the production processes of the workplace.
CE4.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE4.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Participation in customer care processes
-Handling of personal data.
-Use of vehicle technical manuals to be repaired.
-Meet the work order of the vehicle.
-Opening the token to the vehicle by notching all the data of interest.
-Communication with the client to perform the failure diagnosis.
-The client explanation of the operation to be performed on your vehicle.
-To estimate the length of time of the vehicle in the workshop and to inform the customer.
-Delivery of the vehicle to the customer and explanation of the repair processes that have been carried out.
-An explanation of the invoice customer indicating spare parts and labor.
-I treat customers. Assessment of the information received.
2. Store Management
-Stake in the inventory.
-Mage of minimum stocks.
-Handling of parts and consumable materials catalogs.
-Shopping analysis.
-Choice of suppliers.
-Deal with suppliers and request for materials and spare parts.
-Order and storage system.
-Albarans management and invoice collated.
3. Vehicle maintenance and breakdown repair
-Data collection for maintenance.
-Vehicle housing protections to avoid fouling it with workwear and/or operator's hands, framing seats, steering wheel, shift lever, and handbrake lever.
-Performing dynamic tests to diagnose the breakdown.
-Data collection and diagnosis of breakdowns.
-Unmount following a logical order and verify the other elements and systems by analyzing possible malfunctions and/or misstate pieces that are hidden.
-Analysis of the damaged part or parts and comparison with the new elements.
-Parts request by analyzing prices according to supplier.
-Assembly following the reverse order to the disassembly, verifying in any case the correct assembly and attachment of the pieces and components.
-Vehicle tests to verify the quality of the repair.
-Fulfillment of work parts and management of albarans.
4. Integration and communication in the job center
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect for the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Tracking the regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS OF TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0130_2: Address and suspension systems |
• Licensed, engineer, architect or degree of corresponding degree or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent qualifications • Professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professional level 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical of vehicles of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0131_2: Transmission and brake systems | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent qualifications • Professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professional level 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical of vehicles of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SPACES, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 |
45 | 60 | |
|
Workshop | 200 | 300 |
| M1 | M2 | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
X | X | ||
|
| X | X | X |
|
Classroom | -Audio-visual equipment -PCs installed in network, canon with projection, and Internet -Specialty specific software -2 Pays for writing with marker -Rotafolios -Classroom material -Table and chair for the trainer -Table and chairs for students |
|
workshop | -Work banks with screws. -Sierras, limes, gramiles, plot tips, threaded, male, terrajas and manneals, calibers, micrometers, gages of threads and thicknesses, comparator clock. -Vehicle elevators -Vehicle with all of its components in operating order with disc brakes at 4 wheels and equipped with ABS. -Vehicle with all its components in order of operation with drum brakes on the rear wheels. -Cross-sectional change box. -longitudinal change box. -Automatic change box. -Robotized change box. -Automatic speed variant. -Rear bridge with differential. -Industrial vehicle electric brake. -Address alignment machine. -Brenometer with suspension bench. -Tire disassembly. -A wheel balancing machine. -Brake purge equipment. -Hydraulic Cats. -Suspension of suspend springs. -Inflate Verifier. -Dynamic Keys. -Extractor equipment. -20 Tm Press. -Specific use for repair of change boxes. -Specific use for adjustment of differential groups. -Team of rotulle extractors. -Pair Meters. -Desktop drill. -Manual electric drill. -Manual pneumatic drill. -Esmeril. -A compression set of rear-to-right and left-side pincer pumps. -Set of keys specific to the extraction of pipes and whips. -Pressure gauges. -Diagnosis equipment. -Equipment for pneumatic and electrical impact guns -Workrooms for tools and parts -Games of all types of manual keys -Jgo of all kinds of pliers and jaws -Jgo of all types of special tips, torx, allen, etc -Jgo of all types of screwdrivers -Destorbump - Saccharos -Scissors, cutters, and blades -Hammers Jgo of all types, plastic and steel -Paper, film, film, film. -Clean point and containers. Daily Cleaning Tools -Products and tools store. Locker room with lockers. Lavajos, Botiquín. |
|
| -Specific installations: Compressed air line, Combustion Gas Aspiration. |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units that must be available for the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces, will be sufficient for a minimum of 15 students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to the higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX V
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF THE ENGINE AND ITS AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
Code: TMVG0409
Professional family: Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles
Professional area: Electromechanical vehicles
Professional qualification level: 2
Professional reference qualification:
TMV048_2 Maintenance of the engine and its auxiliary systems (RD 295/2004)
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0132_2: Maintain the thermal engine.
UC0133_2: Maintain the auxiliary systems of the thermal engine.
General competition:
Perform maintenance operations on the engine and its auxiliary systems in automobiles, industrial vehicles, motorcycles, agricultural machinery, construction machinery and public works and railway rolling stock, applying the techniques and procedures established by the manufacturer, achieving the required quality and safety conditions.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its activity in the electromechanical area of large, medium and small enterprises dedicated to the manufacture and maintenance of vehicles, developing processes of execution.
Productive Sectors:
Maintenance and installation of motor and its auxiliary systems of automobiles, industrial vehicles, motorcycles, agricultural machinery and public works and railway rolling stock.
Other productive sectors where electromechanical maintenance work of thermal engines is performed.
Vehicle and component manufacturers.
Companies engaged in the Technical Inspection of Vehicles
Test labs for vehicle assemblies and subassemblies.
Companies engaged in the manufacture of testing equipment, diagnosis and replacement of vehicles.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
Motor mechanic and its auxiliary systems in automobiles.
Motor mechanic and its auxiliary systems in industrial vehicles.
Diesel equipment mechanic.
Operary of companies engaged in the manufacture of spare parts.
7401.1052 Motor mechanics and their auxiliary systems on motorcycles.
7401.1081 Motor mechanics and their auxiliary systems in agricultural machinery and public works.
7401.1092 Motor mechanics and their auxiliary systems in railway rolling stock.
7401.1043 Truck and bus adjuster mechanics in general.
7401.1061 Mechanical-adjuster of gasoline engines in vehicles.
7401.1070 Mechanical-adjuster of diesel engines (vehicles).
7401.1100 Mechanic-adjuster of engines and injection equipment (diesel and gasoline).
7401.1119 Car-adjuster mechanics, in general (passenger cars and vans).
Duration of the associated training: 520 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0132_2: (Transverse) Engines (260 hours).
• UF1213: machining and metrology techniques (50 hours).
• UF1214: Two-and four-stroke thermal engine maintenance (90 hours).
• UF1215: Maintenance of cooling and lubrication systems for thermal engines (90 hours).
• UF0917: Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MF0133_2: (Cross) Engine auxiliary systems (180 hours).
• UF1216: Maintenance of auxiliary systems of the otto cycle engine (90 hours).
• UF1217: Maintenance of auxiliary systems of the diesel cycle engine (90 hours).
MP0255: Non-work professional practice module for Motor Maintenance and its auxiliary systems (80 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established at UF0917, of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Naming: MAINTAINING THE THERMAL ENGINE
Level: 2
Code: UC0132_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Apply the standardization of the technical drawing (rules and systems of graphical representation, acotation, scales, sections, threads ..), as well as the processes of metrology and basic machining implicit in the processes.
CR1.1 The croquis, parts and mechanical assemblies necessary for the development of the processes are performed and interpreted, applying the rules and requests of the client.
CR1.2 The machining processes are performed (drilling, threaded, sawing, liming ..), meeting technical specifications.
CR1.3 The measurements made in the metrology processes are performed according to the established processes, obtaining the appropriate range parameters.
RP2: Unmount, repair and mount the engine's mechanical assemblies or subassemblies, achieving their performance performance with the required quality and safety conditions.
CR2.1 Engine extraction and assembly is performed in accordance with the manufacturer's standards, using the necessary equipment correctly and with the set torque pairs.
CR2.2 The separation of the cylinder head and hermetic assembly on the block, cutting, cleaning and valve adjustment is carried out according to the manufacturer's prescription, checking the state of the cylinder head and the tightness of the internal circuits of the cylinder head.
CR2.3 The rod-piston-segment assembly is disassembled and checked according to the manufacturer's guidelines, replacing bulons, segments, and casings if necessary, the subsequent assembly being performed.
CR2.4 The crankshaft is removed, cleaning and checking the different conduits, surface state of the same, and the bench and axial support casings, replacing these, if required and repositioning it in the engine.
CR2.5 The distribution is made, replacing worn or broken parts.
CR2.6 The measurements made with the various devices determine the existing wear and tear.
CR2.7 When item substitutions are performed, maintenance operations are performed according to the set disassembly and mounting methods, making the corresponding adjustments and applying the torque and quality regulations set by the manufacturer.
CR2.8 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case.
RP3: Unmount, repair and mount lubrication and cooling systems, achieving performance with the required quality and safety.
CR3.1 The interventions made on the pumps of the lubrication and cooling systems restore the values established by the pressure and flow manufacturer of the circulating fluids.
CR3.2 The revisions, cleanings and/or substitutions of elements of the lubrication and refrigeration circuits are performed according to the assembly and disassembly methods established by the manufacturer, complying with the quality standards.
CR3.3 The interventions made ensure the total tightness and pressure of the circuits, as well as the correct recirculation of gases.
CR3.4 The lubricating and cooling fluids are handled correctly, checking their condition and properly performing the change thereof, complying with the personal and environmental safety standards.
RP4: Verify and control the operation of the engine and its lubrication and cooling systems, diagnosing breakdowns and identifying the causes that cause them, using the appropriate technical documentation and equipment, in safety conditions.
CR4.1 The selected technical documentation allows you to relate plans and specifications to the system that is the object of the repair.
CR4.2 The compression pressure of the cylinders is set by the manufacturer.
CR4.3 The analysis of the lubricant allows for the detection of metal remains, carbonilla and mixtures with the liquid coolant or fuel.
CR4.4 The oil pressure and coolant temperature are within the limits set in all engine regimes, the levels are correct and there are no leaks in any element of the circuit.
CR4.5 The diagnosis of the breakdown establishes its causes according to a reasoned process of cause-effect.
CR4.6 If required, different repair alternatives are evaluated.
CR4.7 Diagnosis does not cause other breakdowns or damage.
CR4.8 The diagnosis of breakdowns is performed completely in the predetermined time, carrying out the necessary interventions and respecting the norms of personal and environmental safety.
CR4.9 It is verified that all engine elements are maintained in perfect condition and their operating parameters correspond to those specified by the manufacturer.
RP5: Run all repair operations in accordance with the safety and health rules.
CR5.1 Of the safety standards of the workshop, the risks inherent in the specific work are extracted, and the measures of personal and collective protection are checked.
CR5.2 Personal and collective security rules are respected while keeping the work area free of risks.
CR5.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Bank of diagnosis of engines, gas analyser, compresmeters, manometers, apparatus for proof of tightness, alexometers, comparators, micrometers, elevator of vehicles, specific tools.
Motor and its mechanical assemblies (two and four times: gasoline, diesel and rotary). Lubrication systems. Cooling systems.
Products and results
Preventive, predictive and corrective maintenance of engines and their cooling and lubrication systems. Disassembly and assembly of mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic and electronic elements or assemblies. Adjustment, control and measurement of parameters. Handling of equipment and documentation on any medium.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original values are given. Cutting manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders. Media: graphics, writing and computer science.
Competition Unit 2
Naming: MAINTAINING ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
Level: 2
Code: UC0113_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Unmount, repair and mount the power supply and power supply in the gasoline engines, adjusting the parameters to obtain the performance performance of any engine speed, with the required quality and safety conditions.
CR1.1 The injection system schema being analyzed is interpreted correctly, identifying its components.
CR1.2 The pressure and flow values in the fuel circuit are adjusted to those set by the manufacturer, presenting a total absence of leakage.
CR1.3 The parameters of operation of the reducers and degasifiers in the feed with G.L.P., are within the ranges marked by the manufacturer and are checked the tightness of the system.
CR1.4 The oil pressure in the turbocharger is required for any spin regime.
CR1.5 The overpowering system generates the "blowing pressure" provided for by the r.p.m., remaining within the margins defined by the manufacturer.
CR1.6 The autodiagnosis system ratifies the absence of breakdowns in the electronic control unit.
CR1.7 The signals from the engine measurement control devices are correct.
CR1.8 Fuel management is performed with the precautions set out in the current regulations.
CR1.9 The review, cleaning, and replacement of power and power supply and power system subassemblies and subassemblies is performed by following assembly and disassembly methods and the quality regulations set by the manufacturer.
CR1.10 The different power and power system parameter controls and settings are performed with the appropriate tools, media, and equipment, following manufacturer specifications.
CR1.11 In the various phases of engine operation (start, post-start, heating, acceleration, full load, etc.) the operating parameters of the injection pump, injectors and the rest of the power and power supply system elements are within the ranges specified by the manufacturer.
RP2: Unmount, repair and mount the power-on system, adjusting the parameters to obtain the performance performance with the required quality and safety conditions.
CR2.1 The electrical schemes of different power-on systems are interpreted correctly.
CR2.2 The review, cleaning, and replacement of power-on system elements and subassemblies are performed according to the disassembly and mounting methods and the quality regulations established by the manufacturer.
CR2.3 The various parameter controls and settings are performed with the appropriate tools, media and equipment, following the manufacturer's standards.
CR2.4 The different power-on components are working correctly, and it is proven that the operating parameters are set, being corrected in the required cases.
CR2.5 The voltage, intensity, quality and duration of the ignition spark meet the characteristics established by the manufacturer.
CR2.6 The characteristics of the signal to the power-on module output are correct.
CR2.7 The state of spark plugs and the setting of their electrodes is the right one.
CR2.8 It is ensured that the intervention performed does not cause damage to other car systems.
CR2.9 The scheduled power-on systems meet the parameters preset by the manufacturer.
CR2.10 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case.
RP3: Unmount, repair and mount the power and power supply system on diesel engines, adjusting the parameters to obtain operating performance to all engine regimes with the required quality and safety conditions.
CR3.1 The injection system schema being analyzed is interpreted correctly, identifying its components.
CR3.2 The fuel supply system presents a total absence of leakage and air intake, while maintaining the flow and pressure within the margins indicated by the manufacturer.
CR3.3 Cleaning, tober changes, and injectors (in necessary cases), such as the subsequent purging of the fuel circuit, is performed according to technical specifications.
CR3.4 The intake air temperature optimization system works correctly.
CR3.5 The draught and phase-in of the injector pump is performed according to technical specifications in the necessary cases.
CR3.6 The oil pressure in the turbocharger is required for any number of revolutions, with no abnormal noises and vibrations.
CR3.7 The overpower system generates the predicted blow pressure based on the r.p.m. and is maintained within the margins defined by the manufacturer.
CR3.8 The electronic management units of the injection system meet the prescribed specifications.
CR3.9 The signals from the engine management devices are correct.
CR3.10 Fuel handling is done with the precautions set.
CR3.11 The review, cleaning and replacement of power and power supply and supply system elements and subassemblies are performed by following manufacturer-set disassembly and assembly methods and complying with quality regulations.
CR3.12 The various controls and parameter settings of the power and power supply system are performed with the appropriate tools, media and equipment, according to the manufacturer's specifications.
CR3.13 In the various phases of engine operation (start, post-start, heating, acceleration, full load and high and low cuts) the operating parameters of the injection pump, injectors and all other elements of the power and power supply system are within the ranges specified by the manufacturer.
RP4: Verify and control the operation of the auxiliary engine systems, diagnosing breakdowns and identifying the causes that cause them, using the appropriate technical documentation and equipment, in safety conditions.
CR4.1 The selected technical documentation allows you to relate plans and specifications to the system that is the object of the repair.
CR4.2 The analysis of the exhaust gases allows to determine the causes of possible breakdowns.
CR4.3 Fuel consumption corresponds to that stipulated by the manufacturer for all engine regimes.
CR4.4 The power-on system check results in the parameters being set by the manufacturer.
CR4.5 The diagnosis of the breakdown establishes its causes according to a reasoned process of cause-effect.
CR4.6 If required, different repair alternatives are evaluated.
CR4.7 Diagnosis does not cause other breakdowns or damage.
CR4.8 The interpretation of the data obtained by the diagnosis systems of the operating parameters allows the diagnosis of the breakdown to be performed.
CR4.9 The diagnosis of breakdowns is performed completely in the predetermined time, carrying out the necessary interventions and respecting the norms of personal and environmental safety.
CR4.10 All elements of the power-on, power and power-over systems are maintained in perfect condition and their operating parameters correspond to those specified by the manufacturer.
CR4.11 It is verified that the composition of the engine gases recycled by the anti-pollution systems is within the limits set by the current regulations.
Professional Context
Production media
Engine diagnosis bank, pump pump test bench, gas analyser, pressure gauge, apparatus for tightness tests, comparators, micrometers, electronic injection check bench, nozzles cleaning machine, dealer and coil test bench, polymeters, strobe lamp, specific tool.
Engine mechanical assemblies (two and four times: petrol, diesel and rotary): Power systems (carburation, electronic injection and diesel). Overpowering and anti-pollution systems. Ignition systems (conventional, electronic, programmed ..). Control unit.
Products and results
Preventive, predictive and corrective maintenance of auxiliary engine systems. Disassembly and assembly of mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic and electronic elements or assemblies. Adjustment, control and measurement of parameters. Handling of equipment and documentation on any medium.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original values are given. Cutting manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders. Media: graphics, writing and computer science.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: MOTORES
Code: MF0132_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0132_2: Maintain the thermal engine.
Duration: 260 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: MACHINING AND METROLOGY TECHNIQUES
Code: UF1213
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Select the tools, tools, and machinery needed to perform manual machining operations.
CE1.1 Classifying the various tools, tools, and tools
CE1.2 Explain the various processes involved in manual machining.
CE1.3 Classify the various materials to be machined by their main properties.
CE1.4 Explain the various treatments that the materials used in the construction of the engine receive.
CE1.5 Describe the grinding processes of the engine components subject to wear or deformations.
CE1.6 In practical scenarios involving, performing basic machining operations (drilling, sawing, threading, liming ...) into metal materials.
-Draw the sketch of the piece to be machined, determining the shapes, dimensions and surface finish.
-Drawing views and sections, applying the corresponding normalization
-Define the sequence of operations to be performed and the tools, machines, and tools required to perform the part.
-Define the drawn and marked, which are required.
-Determine the operating parameters for machine machining.
-Define the successive machining operations, in each case.
-Perform metrology processes with the specific tools and tools.
-Perform the part, applying the necessary processes and following the design specifications.
-Verify that the crafted part meets the design specifications.
C2: Handle the manual, electrical and pneumatic tools used in the mechanization, disassembly and assembly of parts.
CE2.1 Perform drilling, hazelnut, and rework operations.
CE2.2 Perform external and internal threads and verify measurements with threads of threads and caliber.
CE2.3 Perform threaded fixings by applying the correct torque with the appropriate screwing tools and ensuring the locking, if any, of screws and/or nuts.
CE2.4 Unmount and mount radial retainers and O-rings with appropriate useful.
CE2.5 Replace different types of bearings using the appropriate extractors and unmount and properly mount banged and biela casings.
CE2.6 Unmount and mount different joints by means of pegs, chavettes, and pins.
CE2.7 Unmount and mount longitudinal and transverse pressed joints.
C3: Operate with the devices, tools, and tools used in the measurement and checking tasks.
CE3.1 Choose the appropriate measuring instrument at the measurement type and the required accuracy and calibrate the apparatus to perform the measurement with the appropriate precision.
CE3.2 Perform different measurements (linear, angular, of threads) with gauge, micrometer, comparator, thicknesses of thicknesses, explaining its operation.
CE3.3 Check the height of pistons in diesel engines, choose the thickness of the cylinder head.
CE3.4 Check and adjust the axial clearance of the crankshaft.
C4: Operate with soft and electric welding equipment by coated electrode, without great skill required.
CE4.1 Relating the different types of base materials with the input and deoxidizing materials according to the type of welding to be obtained.
CE4.2 Describe the components of the electric arc welding equipment, as well as the operation thereof.
CE4.3 Perform electrical welding and fill operations.
CE4.4 Operate with oxyacetylenic equipment, perform elementary welds and simple cutting operations.
Contents
1. Manual machining technology
-Limes, lijas, abrasives, saw blades, bits.
-Techniques and standards for drilling.
-Types of rivets and clamps.
-Using cutting tools and roughing.
-Materials to be machined and their properties.
-Metal materials used in vehicles.
-Classification and normalization of iron and steel.
-Classification of non-ferrous metals, light alloys.
-Properties and tests of metals, thermal, thermochemical, mechanical and surface treatments.
-Surface grinding, milling, turning, and brunking techniques.
-Corrosion and corrosion protection.
2. Detachable junction technology
-Types of threads used, applications and regulations.
-Terminology of bolted joins.
-Types of screws, nuts, and washers and their applications.
-Types of pressure rings, pins, clip, staples, and clamps.
-threaded technique.
-Reconstruction of threads.
-Apriete Pares.
-Set of wheels and pulleys, pegs, chavettes and striations.
-Manual, electrical, and pneumatic tools.
3. Notions of Drawing and Interpretation of Planes
-Dihedral system: lump-sum, plant, profile, and sections.
-Views on perspectives.
-Acutation.
-Tolerances symbology.
-Material Specifications.
-Interpretation of parts in drawings or sketches.
-Plot on materials, techniques and tools.
-Technical workshop manuals.
-Codes and parts references.
4. Metrology
-Measures and units of measure
-Measurement techniques and measurement errors.
-Direct measure appliances.
-Measure appliances by comparison.
-Errors in the measurement, types of errors.
-Rules for handling measurement useful in general.
5. Welding techniques
-Soft welding.
-Contribution materials and decapants.
-Fine-veneer oxicorte and oxicorn soldering.
-Electrical arc welding equipment.
-Types of electrodes.
-Basic welding techniques.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Denomination: TWO-AND 4-TIME THERMAL DEMOTOR MAINTENANCE
Code: UF1214
Duration: 90 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP4 as regards the maintenance of the two and four-stroke engines and the RP2.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the constitution and operation of two-and four-stroke engines so that they can be properly maintained and repaired.
CE1.1 List the different components of the two and four-stroke engines, relating them to the function they perform and analyze their differences.
CE1.2 Explain the thermodynamic cycle of the two-and four-stroke engines.
CE1.3 Explain the theoretical and actual diagrams of the engines.
CE1.4 Detailed the differences between the Otto cycle and the Diesel cycle.
CE1.5 Explain and relate Caliber, Stroke, Cylinder Capacity, Compression Ratio, Power And Torque, Fiscal Power.
C2: Classify and describe the polycyclic motors, their general characteristics and operation.
CE2.1 Classify the engines by the number and layout of the cylinders, engines in line, in V, in W, radial and of opposing cylinders.
CE2.2 Know the numbering rule of the cylinders and determine the possible power-on orders.
CE2.3 Perform and interpret the engine distribution diagrams.
CE2.4 Know the rotary piston engines, list advantages and disadvantages.
C3: Perform the adjustments and adjustments required for the assembly of the cylinder block in the engines.
CE3.1 Recognize the various types of piston segments, their location and placement therein.
CE3.2 Describe the various constructive types and possibilities for mounting the bulon in the piston and in the rod.
CE3.3 Perform the process of assembling the pistons and the useful employees.
CE3.4 Perform control and verification of the rods and their assembly.
CE3.5 Perform the static and dynamic balance of the crankshaft.
CE3.6 Mount the crankshaft on the bench and check the bearings game.
CE3.7 Explain the particularities of the wet-shirt assemblies with respect to the dry and cylinders carved in the engines.
C4: Explain the reglages, adjustments and set to point to be performed on the cylinder head and the engine distribution.
CE4.1 Know the operations of the maintenance of the cylinder head, replacement of the guides and valve seats, planned of the cylinder head and control of the seal.
CE4.2 Explain the process of adjustment of the taques, their need and the operation of the hydraulic taques.
CE4.3 Know the different provisions that can present the valves in the cylinder head, forms of actuation and differences between admission and escape; advantages of the multivalvula provisions.
CE4.4 Explain the various assemblies that may present the distribution in an engine according to the placement and number of camshafts and the drag, chain, belt or toothed wheels.
CE4.5 Drill down the components of the distribution drag system and its function.
CE4.6 Explain the importance and process of the distribution draught.
C5: Perform different processes of disassembly and assembly of the engines in the bank.
CE5.1 Unmount and mount a motor's shirts.
CE5.2 Perform the assembly of the bulb in the piston and the rod.
CE5.3 Perform the piston assembly on the cylinders of an engine, using the precise tooling and placing the segments in their correct position.
CE5.4 Unmount and mount the engine crankshaft, adjust the axial slack and the bearings; place the flywheel and the auxiliary pulley by checking the oscillation damper.
C6: Repair, unmount, and mount the cylinder head and distribution.
CE6.1 Verify the floor plan of the cylinder head with the appropriate means and determine its status.
CE6.2 Check the status of seats, guides, cameras, and precameras of the butt.
CE6.3 Perform the milling and grinding of valves and seats in a cylinder head.
CE6.3 Unmount and mount valves, springs, taques, camshafts, and other elements of the distribution following the proper process.
CE6.4 Perform the set of taques on a motor of mechanical taques.
CE6.5 Check the taques on a hydraulic taques engine.
CE6.6 Unmount and mount the distribution drag system in strap and chain assemblies, ensuring correct draught and tension.
C7: Diagnose and repair possible or actual faults, of the engine, using the techniques of diagnosis, equipment, testing tools and the manufacturer's manuals.
CE7.1 Carry out the necessary tests to determine possible internal engine breakdowns, verify the compression, the draught of the distribution, the presence of anomalous noises, etc.
CE7.2 Observe and analyze the engine elements carefully to detect the origin of possible breakdowns, damage to the piston and compression chamber, grits in the cylinder, block fissures, shirts or butt etc.
CE7.3 Verify internal and external engine tightness and non-presence of fluids, oil or coolant outside of their chambers and circuits.
CE7.4 Compare the values of the parameters obtained in the checks with the given in the technical documentation.
CE7.5 Check the functionality of repair, absence of leaks and those inherent to safety, for delivery of the repaired engine.
C8: Carry out periodic and preventive maintenance of different types of thermal engines used in vehicles.
CE8.1 Get and interpret the necessary data using the different media where you can present the information to perform the periodic maintenance.
CE8.2 Set the items subject to periodic maintenance on the engine either for the time since the last time or for the kilometers traveled.
CE8.3 Perform periodic maintenance operations such as changing the elements of the distribution subject to wear: strap, tensioners, and rollers.
CE8.4 Perform preventive maintenance operations as a replacement for the oscillation damper and motor supports.
CE8.5 Fill in the work parts by scoring the replacement materials and repair times by comparing them to the manufacturer's standard.
Contents
1. Thermal engines
-Two-, four-stroke and rotating engines.
-Diesel cycle engines, major types differences with Otto cycle.
-Thermodynamics: Theoretical and real cycles.
-Thermal performance and fuel consumption.
-Curves features of the engines.
2. Police engines
-The compression chamber, camera types and influence of the same.
-Placement of the engine and arrangement of the cylinders.
-Cylinder numbering and power-on order. UNE 10052-72 DIN 7302-1.
-Otto cycle engines and Diesel engines, constructive differences.
3. Elements of the alternate engines, the cylinder block
-Functions and request of engine elements, mechanical efforts, friction, heat dissipation and materials.
-Pistons, constructive forms, constitution, reinforcements.
-Segments and Bulons.
-Biels, constitution and verification, types.
-Biela piston assembly.
-The crankshaft, constitution, static and dynamic balance, crankshaft bearings, motor steering wheel and oscillation damper.
4. Elements of the alternative engines, the cylinder head and the distribution
-Engine culture, compression chamber, camera types and precameras.
-The board of the cylinder head, types and calculation of the board in diesel engines.
-Distribution of the engine, types and constitution.
-Drag elements of the distribution.
-Valves and seats, taques and camshafts, reglages.
-Hydraulic Tanks
-Work and control diagrams of the distribution.
-Reglages and marks. Put to point.
5. Periodic maintenance and diagnosis of breakdowns
-Regular engine maintenance tables.
-Technical diagnosis of breakdowns in mechanical elements.
-Workshop manuals and repairs developed by manufacturers.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF COOLING AND LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FOR THERMAL ENGINES
Code: UF1215
Duration: 90 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP4 in terms of maintenance of cooling and lubrication systems for thermal engines and RP3.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the characteristics of the lubricants used in the engines of the vehicles.
CE1.1 Explain the classification of the oils and lubricants used in the engines according to the regulations API and ACEA of classification of lubricants.
CE1.2 Explain the differences between the oils between synthetic and mineral and their applications, viscosity index SAE.
CE1.3 Compare the viscosity of an oil and a lubricating grease.
C2: Describe the constitution and operation of the lubrication systems of the thermal motors, in order to be able to diagnose them and select the procedure to be used in the maintenance operations.
CE2.1 Describe the lubrication system of an engine, listing the components that make it and the function that each one performs.
CE2.2 Know the various forms of engine grease, barbotheus, pressure, wet crankcase and dry carter.
CE2.3 Describe the function of the pump and the overpressure valve, describe different types of pumps.
CE2.4 Explain the function of the filter, valve by pass, and check valve.
CE2.5 Describe oil pressure control and oil change interval control systems.
CE2.6 Detailed different types of oil cooling and explain your need.
CE2.7 Explain the relationship with other systems, hydraulic tensioners, hydraulic tanks, distribution variators, etc.
C3: Describe the cooling systems of an engine by listing the components that make it, and the function that each engine performs.
CE3.1 Explain the specifications of refrigerant liquids for thermal motors, types and regulations (UNE, SAE).
CE3.2 Check with densimeter and refractometer the state and concentration of the fluid and the relationship between the concentration of antifreeze and the protection achieved.
CE3.3 Explain the operation of the thermostat and the circuit pressurization valve.
CE3.4 Describe temperature control systems, thermocontacts and electrofans, mechanical, bimetallic or hydrodynamic drag fans.
CE3.5 Knowing different types of radiators and mounting possibilities.
CE3.6 Explain the importance of the purging of the circuit and how the purge operation is performed, knowing the self-purgable systems.
CE3.7 Explain the particularities of the air cooling system.
CE3.8 Explain the current cooling of the gear.
CE3.9 Describe the elements that make up forced cooling.
C4: Perform the maintenance of the lubrication systems of the thermal motors with the equipment, tools and specific tools.
CE4.1 Identify the elements that make up the lubrication system of an engine and its location.
CE4.2 Select the necessary technical documentation to determine the assembly and disassembly process for the various components.
CE4.3 Perform the sequence of assembly and disassembly operations of an oil pump, following the one set in the technical documentation
CE4.4 Unmount, verify, and mount an engine oil radiator.
CE4.5 Check the operation and accuracy of the oil pressure control handles.
CE4.6 Check the absence of leaks and ensure tightness.
CE4.7 Check the operating pressure of the lubrication system according to the technical documentation.
CE4.8 Use the appropriate equipment, tools, and tools used in the various operations.
CE4.9 Respect the personal and environmental safety standards stipulated in the various operations.
C5: Perform the maintenance of the cooling systems of the thermal motors with the means and specific tools.
CE5.1 Identify the cooling system components of an engine and its location in the vehicle.
CE5.2 Select the necessary technical documentation to determine the process of verification, assembly and disassembly of the various components.
CE5.3 Unmount and mount a cooling pump, following the one set in the technical documentation.
CE5.4 Unmount, verify, and mount a cooling radiator, air pipes, and fans.
CE5.5 Replace a cooling thermostat and verify its operation.
CE5.6 Check the operation and accuracy of the fan control thermocontacts and the engine temperature sensor.
CE5.7 Check the absence of leaks and ensure tightness; check engine operating temperature as per the technical documentation.
CE5.8 To properly use the equipment, tools, and tools used in the various operations.
CE5.9 Respect the personal and environmental safety standards stipulated in the various operations.
Contents
1. Engine lubrication system
-Lubricants, types, properties and characteristics, classification, and maintenance intervals.
-lubrication systems. Types of crankcase.
-Types of pumps and motion transmission.
-Oil fritters.
-Oil filter technology.
-Oil pressure control and internal engine pressure control.
-System for degassing and recycling oil vapors.
-Regular system maintenance.
2. Engine cooling system
-Air or water cooling system.
-Types of heat exchangers.
-Types of fans and their transmission.
-Refrigerant fluids, characteristics and maintenance, importance of antifreeze concentration.
-Control of engine operating temperature, piloted thermostats.
-Operation and constitution of electrical elements and associated circuits.
-Regular system maintenance.
3. Waste collection techniques and equipment
-Collection of oils and refrigerants by discharge and suction.
-Preparation of oil and cooling collection equipment.
-Steps to be performed to remove the liquids and change filters.
-Handling and labeling of liquid containers for recycling.
-Traceability of the process of collecting liquid waste and filters.
4. Regular maintenance and repair of breakdowns.
-Maintenance periods according to manufacturers.
-Analysis of oils, lubricants and refrigerants.
-Puesta zero of maintenance indicators.
-Disassembly and assembly processes of elements in the repair of faults.
-Verification processes in breakdown repair.
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Denomination: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP5.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
-Work accident.
-Professional illness.
-Other pathologies derived from work.
-Economic and operational impacts.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
-The labor risk prevention law.
-The prevention services regulation.
-Scope and legal bases.
-Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
-National agencies.
-Autonomous bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
-In the handling of tools and equipment.
-In handling systems and installations.
-In the storage and transport of loads.
-Exposure to physical, chemical or biological agents.
-The fire.
-Physical fatigue.
-Mental fatigue.
-Job dissatisfaction.
-Collective protection.
-Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1213 | 50 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF1214 | 90 | 30 |
| 30 | 30 | |
|
| 20 | 20 |
Sequence:
To access the Formative Unit 2 or the Formative Unit 3, the Formative Unit 1 must have been exceeded. The Formative Unit 4 can be programmed without sequencing.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Naming: ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
Code: MF0133_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0133_2: Maintain the auxiliary systems of the thermal engine.
Duration: 180 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF OTTO CYCLE ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS
Code: UF1216
Duration: 90 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP2, and RP4.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the formation of the mixture in a gasoline engine.
CE1.1 Explain the characteristics and properties of commercial gasoline, octane index.
CE1.2 Know the different types of mixtures according to the torque demand of the engine.
CE1.3 Define the concept of stoichiometric mixing.
CE1.4 Explain how the mixture is formed in an indirect injection engine, homogeneous mixtures.
CE1.5 Explain how the mixture is formed into a direct injection engine, stratified mixtures, and poor mixtures.
C2: Describe the constitution and operation of the power-on systems in the Otto cycle engines.
CE2.1 Explain the need for progress to be made on different engine torque requests, influencing factors.
CE2.2 Know the parameters that define the quality of the spark, types of spark plugs, and thermal grade.
CE2.3 Define the concept of closing angle in a power-on system, its importance and characteristic values depending on the type of ignition.
CE2.4 Know the various systems of ignition, mechanical, electronic and electronic integral with static distribution of the high voltage.
CE2.5 Know the components of the different systems and the function of each one of them, ignition coils, power stages, calculators, inductive sensors and Hall effect.
C3 Identify and explain the function of the elements constituting the air circuit aspirated in an Otto cycle engine and the fuel circuit
CE3.1 Know the components of the air intake system and its function.
CE3.2 Explain the importance of filtering and know the different types of filters used in different thermal engines.
CE3.3 Analyze the intake manifold, its function, the importance of the design, and the variable geometry collectors.
CE3.4 Know the components of the fuel circuit, from the reservoir to the injector, explain its mission and operation and the different constructions according to the injection system.
C4 Analyze the various Otto engine injection systems, their constitution and operation.
CE4.1 Classify and know the injection systems by their characteristics.
CE4.2 Describe the sensors and actuators of the different systems, their mission, their function and the correct way to check them.
CE4.3 Analyze the electronic management of injection systems and understand the response of the calculator in certain operating situations.
CE4.4 To know in the LPG supply system: pressure of over-feeding, reducers and mixers (degassing), parameters to be controlled in the phases of start, post-start, heating, acceleration and full load and partial load.
C5 Explain the following functions, elements, or parameters in the anti-pollution systems:
CE5.1 Define which are the idle, partial load, and full load parameters.
CE5.2 Know the concept of closed loop regulation applied to the composition of exhaust gases and Lambda regulation.
CE5.3 Describe the operation of the exhaust gas purification system by a regulated catalyst.
CE5.4 Describe the nitrogen oxide accumulator, the NOx probe, its operation and its regeneration process.
CE5.5 Describe the secondary air injection system, its components, and its operation.
CE5.6 Describe the exhaust gas recirculation system, EGR.
CE5.7 Analyze the operation of the engine, assessing the influence it has on the performance and the formation of the exhaust gases, the variation of different parameters or breakdowns caused.
C6 Identify faults, real or simulated, in the auxiliary systems of the engine:
CE6.1 Describe the operation and management of the verification and diagnosis teams and the EOBD protocol; interpret the data obtained.
CE6.2 Identify in the vehicle or model the system or element to be checked, selecting the correct measurement point and locating the EOBD connection, using the necessary technical documentation.
CE6.3 Select and prepare the measurement or control equipment, taking into account the parameter to be controlled.
CE6.4 Make the connection of the equipment and perform the reading of the various parameters recorded by the Control Unit of the engine, obtain the possible faults recorded and interpret them correctly.
CE6.5 Perform the logical sequencing diagram of the fault diagnosis process and the correction process.
C7: Perform the repairs of diagnosed breakdowns and adjustments to the auxiliary systems of the engine
CE7.1 Make the adjustment and the turbocharger point:
-Adjust and check the waste gate of a fixed-geometry turbo.
-Replace and check the electrovalve for regulating a variable geometry turbocharger.
-Verify the operation of the turbocharger, the holguras and tightness.
CE7.2 Replace and check the air injection system in the exhaust.
CE7.3 Unmount and mount injection ramp and injectors, replace seals.
CE7.4 Replace and check the pulse sensors (inductive and/or Hall effect) of position and spin speed of the crankshaft, replace the position sensor of the camshaft in sequential systems.
CE7.5 Replace and check the power-on end power stage if it is accessible and the coils (EFS, DFS).
CE7.6 Unmount and mount the fuel pump, check the ramp pressure and the flow rate.
CE7.7 Replace and check and perform synchronization with respect to the butterfly potentiometer control unit and/or the butterfly box.
C8: Perform the basic maintenance of the auxiliary engine systems with the necessary equipment, tools and tools.
CE8.1 Perform the sequence of unmount, mount, and adjustment operations, following the established procedure.
CE8.2 Select the specific media, tools, and tools required to perform these operations.
CE8.3 Perform the reading of the control unit's breakdown memory, interpret it, and make the deletion.
CE8.4 Check the communication of the control unit with the other control units (ABS, immobilizer, dashboard, climatizer ...)
CE8.5 Check the input and output signals of the Control Unit, replace and encode it, adapt it to the vehicle immobilizer.
CE8.6 Restituting parameter values to those indicated by the technical specifications.
Contents
1. Power-on systems
-Power-on plugs, types, and features.
-The progress of the power-on.
-The Dwell percentage and the closing angle.
-Stress and intensity values in primary and secondary circuits.
-Most relevant oscillogras.
-Power-on systems: mechanical, electronic and electronic integral, static distribution of high voltage.
-Main checks on the system and its components.
2. Admission and escape systems
-The intake circuit, identification of the same and its components.
-The intake manifold, characteristics, the resonant tubes.
-Filtering of air, importance, and types of filters.
-Escape tube: collector, presilencer and exhaust muffler, joining elements.
-Main checks on the system and its components.
3. Engine torque corrective systems
-Variable geometry colector, benefits it provides.
-Variable distribution, operating principle, types and variations.
-Overpower: compressors and turbochargers, stepped over-power.
4. Fuel power systems
-The carburetor, principle of operation and diagnosis.
-Electronic fuel injection. Evolution and principle of operation.
-Types of fuel injection systems:
Continuous and discontinuous injection systems.
Monopunto and multipoint injection systems.
Multiple multiple injection systems, semi-equential and sequential.
Indirect and direct injection systems.
-LPG metering systems, particularities.
-Sensors used in systems.
-Updaters or terminal units and features.
-Control unit, mapping. Schemes.
-Self-diagnosis systems.
-EOBD protocol, multiplexed communication lines.
5. Gas debugging systems
-exhaust gas scrubber systems in Otto cycle engines:
Secondary Air Injection System.
The three-way catalyst, the gases that it treats and the reactions that occur in it.
Lambda Sondas, jump probes, broadband, applications, location and operation.
Lambda Sondas, function types and check them.
Nitrogen Oxide Accumulators, NOx probes, temperature probes in exhaust gases, the accumulator regeneration cycle.
-Particularities of the direct injection engines of gasoline and those fed by LPG (liquefied petroleum gases).
-The gas analyzer, parameter interpretation.
-Standard for exhaust gases, the EURO V standard.
6. Troubleshooting techniques.
-AMFEC techniques, analysis of failure modes, their effects and criticality.
-A breakdown tree and diagnosis boxes.
-Manuals about breakdown and repairs provided by manufacturers.
-A systematic method of obtaining diagnosis and analysis of symptoms.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF AUXILIARY SYSTEMS OF THE DIESEL CYCLE ENGINE
Code: UF1217
Duration: 90 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP3 and in relation to RP4 Diesel engines.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1 Explain the characteristics and properties of the air and fuel mixture.
CE1.1 Explain the characteristics of automotive gasoil, cetane index and cold behavior, filtrability.
CE1.2 Explain the importance of turbulence in the diesel engine, know the types of cameras and precameras.
CE1.3 Explain the process of forming the mixture and the development of the combustion in the direct injection engines and in the injection engines in the prechambers.
C2 Identify and explain the function of the elements or parameters that constitute the fuel circuit from the reservoir to the injection system.
CE2.1 Describe and locate the power and fuel return conduits.
CE2.2 Explain to the importance of the fuel temperature and the ways to control it, refrigerators and gas oil heaters.
CE2.3 Knowing the importance of fuel filtering, different types of filters and decanters.
CE2.4 Describe the characteristics and types of pumps, injection transfer pressure, advances, regulators, dosing and distribution, corrective systems.
CE2.5 Explain the principle of the operation of indirect injection and its particularities, precameras and injection pressure.
CE2.6 Explain the principle of direct injection operation, particularities and injection pressure.
CE2.7 Know the electronic management of different types of injection, online pumps, rotary, common rail and pump injector.
C3 Explain anti-pollution systems in diesel engines, functions, elements and parameters.
CE3.1 Describe the oxidation catalyst, its function, the gases it treats and the reactions in it, the function of the wide-band diesel lambda probe.
CE3.2 Describe the EGR (exhaust gas recirculation) system, its operation, and the importance of cooling the recirculating exhaust gases.
CE3.3 Describe the particle filter, its operation, the importance of the combustion temperature and exhaust gases, regeneration process, additives in the fuel.
C4 Analyze the operation of the engine, assessing the influence it has on the performance and the formation of the exhaust gases, the variation of different parameters or breakdowns caused.
CE4.1 Describe the operation and management of verification and diagnosis equipment, the EOBD protocol and its main functions.
CE4.2 Explain the importance of over-feeding in engines in general and in the Diesel cycle in particular and the different systems.
CE4.3 Explain the operation of the turbocharger fixed and variable geometry and its mechanical and electronic regulation systems, analyze the differences.
CE4.4 Explain the particularities of the volumetric compressor.
CE4.5 Know the importance of the air cooler (intercooler), the control of the air temperature aspirated and blown.
C5 Identify faults, real or simulated, in the auxiliary systems of the diesel cycle engine, analyzing the different circuits that make them, using the appropriate equipment, means and diagnostic techniques.
CE5.1 Identify in the vehicle or model the system or element to be checked, selecting the correct measurement point and locating the EOBD connection, using the necessary technical documentation.
CE5.2 Select and prepare the measurement or control equipment, taking into account the parameter to be controlled.
CE5.3 Verify the overpower system, control the air pressure and the operation of the regulation system, pressure and vacuum tubes, valves and electrovalves involved.
CE5.4 Make the connection of the equipment and perform the reading of the various parameters recorded by the Control Unit of the engine, obtain the possible faults recorded and interpret them correctly.
CE5.5 Perform the logical sequencing diagram of the fault diagnosis process and the correction process.
C6 Perform the maintenance of the auxiliary engine systems with the necessary equipment, tools and tools.
CE6.1 Describe the disassembly, mounting, and possible settings.
CE6.2 Select the specific means, tools, and tools required to perform these operations, after the failure has been identified.
CE6.3 Restituting parameter values to those indicated by the technical specifications.
CE6.4 Apply usage rules on equipment and media, as well as the security rules stipulated, during the work process.
C7 Perform the maintenance operations of the power and combustion system of a mechanical injection diesel engine with due accuracy.
CE7.1 Purgate or priming of the fuel power circuit.
CE7.2 Replace the stop electrovalve in injection pumps.
CE7.3 Unmount and mount the vehicle pump, performing the operation of draught and phase-on.
CE7.4 Adjust mechanical advancement mechanisms, minimum cold and hot idle and maximum speed.
CE7.5 Verify the preheat system and post-warm function.
-Check, unmount, and mount the heaters.
CE7.6 Unmount and mount the precameras on a disassembled butt.
CE7.7 Unmount and mount injectors:
-Check and adjust the opening pressure.
-Verify the spray and shape of the jet.
-Check for tightness
-Replace the nozzles.
CE7.8 Unmount and mount a turbocharger.
-Verify the turbo-tightness of the turbo and the entire pneumatic circuit, pipes and air cooler (intercooler).
-Control the efficiency of the air cooler (intercooler).
C8 Perform the maintenance operations of the power and combustion system of direct electronic injection diesel engines by rotary pump, common rail (common rail) and pump injector, with due accuracy:
CE8.1 Check for specific input and output signals from the Control Unit's diesel engines. Get the most representative oscilloms.
CE8.2 Unmount, check, and mount the EGR exhaust recirculation system.
CE8.3 Unmount and mount a particle filter.
CE8.4 Unmount, check, and mount the accelerator pedal sensor
CE8.5 Check fuel, power and return lines, filters, decanting systems, and return coolers and gasoil feed heaters.
CE8.6 On a direct injection engine by rotating pump verify and in your case disassemble and mount the particular elements of these motors (injector lift sensor, dispenser, slide position sensor ...)
CE8.7 On a direct injection engine by common rail check and in your case disassemble and mount the particular elements of these motors (injectors, pressure regulator, pressure sensor, disconnection of the third piston of the high pump ...).
CE8.8 On a direct injection engine by injection pump group verify and in your case disassemble and mount the particular elements of these engines (pump pump group, two-stage pump).
CE8.9 Check and replace the electrovalve regulating a variable geometry turbocharger.
CE8.10 Check the communication of the control unit with the rest of the control units (ABS, immobilizer, instrument frame, climatizer ...).
CE8.11 Perform the reading of the control unit's breakdown memory, make the deletion.
Contents
1. Fuel power systems injection diesel engines
-Basic fuel supply circuits in light and heavy vehicles.
-Fuel tank.
-Power, mechanical and electrical pumps.
-Manual Purge Pump.
-Fuel Decanter Systems.
-Filter element types.
-Power pipes and assemblies of these.
-Enters on the return.
-Rotary Pumps:
Top Types.
Features and auxiliary systems.
Operating Principle.
Calado of the different types.
Rotary Pumps with electronic control.
-Online Pumps:
Features and auxiliary systems.
Operating Principle.
Dossier and Calado of the Online Bomb.
Online Pumps with Electronic Control.
2. Direct diesel electronic injection systems
-Evolution, types and principle of operation.
-Identification of components.
-Sensors, Control Unit and actuators.
-Self-diagnosis systems.
-EOBD protocol, multiplexed communication lines.
-Unmount, mount, and repair processes.
-Common rail systems (common rail).
-Systems by electronic group pump injector, characteristic types.
3. Overpower systems, Turbocompressors and Compressors
-Operating principle, characteristics and types, differences between turbocharger and compressor.
-Systems for regulating the pressure of blowing, fixed and variable geometry.
-Main checks on the system and its components.
4. Anti-pollution systems in diesel engines
-The opacimeter, parameter interpretation.
-Standard for exhaust gases in diesel engines, the EURO V standard.
-The exhaust gas recirculation system (EGR, AGR).
-Principle of operation and identification of components.
-Cooling of recirculating exhaust gases.
-The Oxidation catalyst.
-The particle filter (FAP)
-Temperature and differential pressure probes.
-The cycle of regeneration, fuel additive.
-Identification of components and main checks.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1216 | 90 | 30 |
|
Unit 2-UF1217 | 90 | 30 |
Sequence:
The formative units of this module must be programmed in a sequenced manner.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
TRAINING MODULE NON-WORKING PROFESSIONAL PRACTICES OF AUXILIARY OPERATIONS OF MAINTENANCE IN ELECTROMECHANICAL VEHICLES
Code: MP0255
Duration: 80 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1. Participate in the processes of reception and delivery of the vehicle.
CE1.1 Generate the work order by writing the relevant data and the information provided by the customer to perform the maintenance and/or repair of the vehicle.
CE1.2 Handle in a real situation, the work parts and technical repair manuals.
CE1.3 Fill in the work parts, albarans and reports after the work has been done.
C2. Collaborate on warehouse management, parts ordering, and consumable products.
CE2.1 Perform the warehouse inventory, if any.
CE2.2 Fill in the documents used in the order items with the available means, scoring if the codes, quantities and denominations are required.
CE2.3 Log out of the warehouse exits by verifying the frame number and the parts reference.
C3: Repair the engines and their auxiliary systems, in a real working situation.
Ce3.1 Diagnose engine failure by taking data provided by the client and those contributed by the diagnosis techniques.
CE3.2 Placing the necessary internal and external protections on the vehicle
CE3.3 Elaborate the script on the stages of disassembly, assembly, and verification of the elements.
CE3.4 Verification of quality controls on repair performed.
CE3.5 With dexterity handle the tools and tools necessary to perform the repair.
CE3.6 Maintain the order and cleanup of the job.
CE3.7 Perform the repair according to the orders received.
C4. Collaborate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the workplace.
CE4.1 Behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE4.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE4.3 Undertake with diligence the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE4.4 Integrate into the production processes of the workplace.
CE4.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE4.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Participation in customer care processes
-Use of vehicle technical manuals to be repaired.
-Meet the work order of the vehicle.
-Create or update the vehicle tab by logging all the data of interest.
-Communication with the client to perform the failure diagnosis.
-Customer explanation of the operation to be performed on your vehicle and the expected costs.
-To estimate the length of time of the vehicle in the workshop and to inform the customer.
-Deliver the vehicle to the customer and explain the repair processes that have taken place.
-An explanation of the invoice customer indicating spare parts and labor.
2. Store Management
-Stake in the inventory.
-Mage of minimum stocks.
-Handling of parts and consumable materials catalogs.
-Deal with suppliers and request for materials and spare parts.
-Order and storage system.
-Albarans management and invoice collated.
3. Vehicle maintenance and breakdown repair
-Vehicle Protections to protect it during processing.
-Data collection for the maintenance and diagnosis of breakdowns.
-Determination of the tests required to diagnose the breakdown.
-Disassembly processes following a logical order and verifying the other elements and systems by analyzing possible malfunctions and/or misstate pieces that are hidden.
-Analysis of the damaged part or parts.
-Assembly processes following the reverse order of the disassembly, verifying in any case the correct assembly and attachment of the parts and components.
-Vehicle tests to verify the quality of the repair.
4. Integration and communication in the job center
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Tracking the regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS OF TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0132_2: Engines | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent qualifications • Professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professional level 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical of vehicles of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0133_2: Engine auxiliary systems | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent qualifications • Professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professional level 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical of vehicles of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SPACES, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 |
45 | 60 | |
|
Workshop | 200 | 300 |
| M1 | M2 | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
X | X | ||
|
| X | X | X |
| Equipment | |
|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audio-visual equipment -PCs installed in network, canon with projection and internet -Specialty specific software -2 Rotuder-write Pizarras -Rotafolios -Classroom material -Table and chair for the trainer -Table and chairs for students |
|
workshop | -Vehicles with petrol and diesel engines with current technology. -Motorcycle with two-stroke engine. -Truck engines, coach. -Maquettes with real engines. -Electronic injection machines. -Work banks with screws. -Headlight adjustment equipment. -Sierras, limes, gramiles, plot tips, threaded, male, terrajas and manneals, calibers, micrometers, gages of threads and thicknesses, comparator clock. -Calibers, indoor and outdoor micrometers, alexometers. -Use motor assembly (retainer and retainer extractor, cinch segments, cylinder head centers.) -Laves oil filter extraction. -Reflexometer and densimeter. -Vehicle elevators -4-gas Analyzer. -Opaceter. -Bans engine support. -hydraulic table extraction engines. -EOBD failure reading and diagnosis apparatus. -Diesel injector checker. -Common Rail injector excess flow tester. -Automotive adapted oscilloscope. -Multimeter. -Used for distribution. -Extractors of pulleys and toothed wheels. -Precam tractors. -Morts pinching cuffs. -Cooling system tester. -Bridge to hang the engine in the vehicle. -250 Kg pen crane. -Hydraulic Cats. -Borders. -Used oil collection. -Crane to take out engines -Equipment of pneumatic and electrical impact guns -Workrooms for tools and parts -Games of all types of manual keys -Game of all types of pliers and jaws -Game of all types of special tips, torx, allen, etc -All types of screwdrivers ' game -Destorbump -Scabocaos -Scissors, cutters, and blades -All types of hammers, plastic and steel -Paper, film, tape. -Clean point and containers. Daily cleaning tools. -Store products and tools. Locker room with lockers. Lavajos, Botiquín. -Specific installations: Compressed air line, Combustion Gas Aspiration. |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units that must be available for the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces, will be sufficient for a minimum of 15 students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to the higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX VI
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Denomination: MAINTENANCE OF NON-STRUCTURAL VEHICLE BODY ELEMENTS
Code: TMVL0209
Professional Family: Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles
Professional Area
Vehicle BodyProfessional qualification level: 2
Professional reference qualification:
TMV046_2 Maintenance of non-structural vehicle body elements (RD 295/2004 of 20 February).
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0127_2: Replace and/or repair removable elements of a vehicle.
UC0128_2: Perform metal and synthetic element repair.
UC0129_2: Replace and/or repair non-structural fixed elements of the vehicle in whole or in part.
General competition:
Perform the repair of removable, metallic, synthetic, and non-structural elements of the vehicle, adjusting to established procedures and times, achieving the required quality and safety conditions.
Professional Environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its activity in the body area of large, medium and small companies engaged in the manufacture and maintenance of vehicles.
Productive Sectors:
Construction of bodies.
Auto Repair: Removable elements and sheet metal.
Repair of agricultural machinery and public works: sheet, equipment, tools and optional transformations.
Repair of railways: Amovible elements of the body and sheet.
Aircraft Repair: Removable elements and sheet metal (with additional training).
In other productive sectors where sheet metal and equipment construction work is carried out.
Occupations or related jobs:
8209.1116 Monter in automotive assembly lines.
7293.1035A window/pane in vehicles.
Chapista repairer of removable and shaped elements of materials.
metallic and synthetic automobiles.
Chapista repairer of public works and agricultural machinery.
Heavy-duty vehicle repairman.
Chapista repairer of motorcycles and railway equipment.
Duration of the associated training: 630 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0127_2 Unmovable items (220 hours).
• UF0911 Basic electromechanical systems (80 hours).
• UF0912 External and internal removable elements, and systems for closing and lifting (90 hours).
• UF0913 Repair and replacement of moons (50 hours).
MF0128_2 Metal and synthetic elements (230 hours).
• UF0914 (Cross) Repair of metal elements (80 hours).
• UF0915 Repair of aluminum metal elements (40 hours).
• UF0916 Repair of synthetic elements (80 hours).
• UF0917 (transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MF0129_2 Non-structural fixed elements (140 hours).
• UF0918 (transverse) Disassembly and separation of fixed elements (60 hours).
• UF0919 Assembly and fixed element junction (50 hours).
• UF0920 (transverse) Disassembly and assembly of aluminum elements (30 hours).
MP0190: Professional practice module for Maintenance of non-structural vehicle body elements (40 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established in the UF0917 training unit of the MF0128_2 module, ensures the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the performance of the basic level job risk prevention functions, according to Annex IV of the prevention services regulation, approved by Royal Decree 39/1997 of 17 January.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Denomination: REPLACE AND/OR REPAIR REMOVABLE ELEMENTS OF A VEHICLE
Level: 2
Code: UC0127_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Unmount, mount, and, where appropriate, replace accessories and guarnades, with bolted joints, glued or rivet, according to the materials and procedures, with the prescribed quality and safety conditions.
CR1.1 The elements to be replaced or repaired are identified and determined correctly
CR1.2 The positioning of the replacement element maintains the homogeneity of the assembly according to the technical specifications.
CR1.3 The fixing cotes are obtained by positioning the element or by specifications of the manufacturer.
CR1.4 The cut or unsewn operation is executed according to procedure.
CR1.5 The drill obtained meets required specifications according to their subsequent use (threaded, riveted ..).
CR1.6 The paste operation is performed by selecting the appropriate products, according to the materials to be joined and the efforts they must support, applying the established procedure.
CR1.7 The areas adjacent to the repair are protected according to the operation to be performed, removing the debris after it is finished.
CR1.8 Anti-corrosive and/or tightness protection is performed, if applicable, following manufacturer's specifications.
CR1.9 The replaced element maintains or retrieves the operator prescribed by the manufacturer.
RP2: Unmount, mount and, if necessary, replace simple elements of electrical installations, affected or that interfere in the repair of removable elements, ensuring the total operability of the installation and its correct operation.
CR2.1 Unmounted or disconnected mechanisms or elements are the minimum necessary to perform body repairs.
CR2.2 The necessary replacements, adjustments and adjustments are made according to the manufacturer's technical specifications and current regulations.
CR2.3 The mounted electrical elements or assemblies return the prefixed operation to installations or equipment.
CR2.4 The reglages made are in accordance with the current rules.
CR2.5 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are carried out in each case.
RP3: Unmount, mount and, where appropriate, replace simple mechanical elements of different vehicle systems, affected or interfering in the repair of removable elements, carrying out the controls and adjustments necessary to ensure the operation of the systems.
CR3.1 Unmounted or disconnected mechanisms or elements are the minimum necessary to perform body repairs.
CR3.2 The replacements, adjustments and adjustments required are made according to the manufacturer's technical specifications and current regulations.
CR3.3 The mounted mechanical elements or assemblies return the prefixed operation to installations or equipment.
CR3.4 The reglages made are in accordance with the current rules.
Professional Context
Production media
Taladoring, pneumatic machine for cutting putty, machine for filling, riveting, stapling, polymeters, optical control bench, air conditioning load equipment. Equipment for the setting of headlamps. Team of tools of the chapista, windy. Bonnet, front and rear flaps, doors, paragoles, mirrors, moons, elements of guarnade ...
Simple body elements of the systems: lighting, manoeuvring and signalling.
Cooling system. Intake system, exhaust. Steering system. Suspension system. Wheels and tires. Disassembly, assembly and replacement of: Equipment and tools of agricultural machinery and public works.
Products and results
Replace and/or repair removable elements, accessories and guards, disassembly and assembly of simple elements that interfere with the repair of the body.
Methods, procedures, and sequence of operations defined. Parameters of operations not defined in their entirety.
Bolted or riveted elements: By means of the interpretation of croquis of transformations or assemblies the diagnosis of the fault has been carried out, dismounting the element is checked its state, carrying out the necessary repair or replacement operations, positioning the element with the appropriate adjustment, the fixing is made with the imposed tightening.
Glued elements: The attachment of the element to be replaced is cut, cleaning the non-recoverable product remains, anchoring products are applied if applicable on the new part and support, applying fixing putty, positioning the element to be pasted within the established bounds. Adjustments and adjustments of mechanical and electrical elements.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders of the workshop head or section manager. Microfiche, graphic and written. Computer media.
Competition Unit 2
Denomination: PERFORM METAL AND SYNTHETIC ELEMENT REPAIR
Level 2
Code UC0128_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Repair metal elements following different shaping processes.
CR1.1 The necessary tools, materials, and auxiliary means are selected for the logical development of the work process.
CR1.2 The technical documentation is correctly selected and interpreted and the parameters to be taken into account in the process development are determined.
CR1.3 The area to be repaired is identified by the different deformations determination processes (visual recognition, sanding, etc)
CR1.4 The deabolishment operation is considered complete when, according to the working procedure and considering the tolerances of the product for mastilling, the original surface is recovered.
CR1.5 The deabolishment process is performed according to standards, obtaining the cotas given by the manufacturer.
CR1.6 In the process of drawing and collecting sheet material the characteristics of the material are respected.
RP2: Conform and repair synthetic materials, using the appropriate techniques in each case.
CR2.1 The constitution of the part to be repaired is identified by the corresponding characteristic code, or in its defect applying the appropriate techniques (combustion tests or other), to select the repair material.
CR2.2 The drawing and making of templates and supports is the correct one, according to the repair rules.
CR2.3 The product, catalyst, and trigger is used, in each case, in the correct proportions.
CR2.4 The application of resins and masillas is performed according to the working process.
CR2.5 The various sanding phases are adjusted at all times to the needs of the repair process.
CR2.6 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are carried out in each case.
RP3: Run all repair operations in accordance with safety and health rules.
CR3.1 The safety standards of the workshop are extracted from the inherent risks inherent in the specific work, and the protection, personal and collective measures are checked
CR3.2 Personal and collective security rules are respected while keeping the work area free of risks.
CR3.3 The contingencies that have occurred are communicated with the necessary promptness to enable their supervision and resolution.
Professional Context
Production media
Folding, bending, shear, profiler, debarter, machine for applying heat points with graphite electrode. Chapista-specific tools.
Sets or elements of metal materials (fins, doors, roofs ..). Assemblies or elements of plastic materials or composite materials (capo, parolagus ..). Complete vehicles.
Products and results
Return the various repaired items to their original features.
Methods, procedures, and defined operations sequences. Parameters of operations not defined in their entirety.
Metallic elements: Diagnose the breakdown, deabolating the deformed zone, going through the small deformations and performing specific points heating if applicable.
Synthetic elements: Sanding of the broken or deformed surface, making the application of masillas, resins and fibers, making templates if the operation needs it.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders of the Head of Workshop or section manager. Microfiche, graphic and written. Computer media.
Competition Unit 3
Denomination: REPLACE AND/OR REPAIR NON-STRUCTURAL FIXED ELEMENTS OF THE VEHICLE IN WHOLE OR IN PART
Level 2
Code UC0129_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform partial or total disassembly of non-structural fixed elements, using appropriate techniques and equipment.
CR1.1 The machine or tool to be used is determined according to the operation to be performed.
CR1.2 The technical documentation is selected and interpreted correctly and the cutting zones and the join process are determined.
CR1.3 The element or elements to which the dismounted part is attached, does not suffer any damage or deterioration.
CR1.4 The delimitation or layout of the part to be disassembled is adjusted to the manufacturer's recommendations, according to the breakdown.
CR1.5 The cut or unsewn operation is executed according to procedure.
RP2: Prepare the mount by positioning the part and performing the corresponding join preparation.
CR.2.1 The profiling of the join zones is performed according to the job process.
CR2.2 Cleaning of the junction zones is done by removing the waste.
CR2.3 The fixing of the part for subsequent attachment is performed according to the original bounds.
CR2.4 Anti-corrosive protection if applicable and/or tightness is performed according to the manufacturer's standards.
CR2.5 The preparation of the join type fits the characteristics of resistance, coating ...
RP3: Run the junction by MIG/MAG welding and/or points by applying established techniques and methods.
CR3.1 The choice of the machine to run the solder fits the characteristics of the process.
CR3.2 The choice of input material, deoxidants and primers is performed according to the materials to be attached.
CR3.3 The welding process is run according to rules, achieving the required binding characteristics.
CR3.4 In point welding the intensity, time, sharpening and alignment of electrodes according to the type of attachment is determined.
CR3.5 In semi-automatic welding the intensity, pressure of the gas and the speed of the wire are suitable for making the union.
CR3.6 The executed weld meets the characteristics defined in technical specifications.
CR3.7 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case.
Professional Context
Production media
Electrical Welding by points, electric welding equipment with semi-automatic gas (continuous yarn), cutting edge, pneumatic or electric cutting, alternative saw, circular saw, profiler. Tool team of the chapista.
Sets or elements of non-structural metal materials (fins, bonnet, doors, roofs, sides) on which welded joints are made. Complete vehicles.
Products and results
Return to its original characteristics, with the different binding techniques, the different substituted elements.
Methods, procedures, and sequence of operations defined. Parameters of operations not fully defined.
The area to be replaced is determined by removing the joining systems (welding points, etc) by profiling and preparing the joints; the part to be mounted is then prepared, mounted and calibrated before the junction is executed according to the established procedure.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Sketches and transformations schemes. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders of the Head of Workshop or section manager. Microfiche, graphic and written. Computer media.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: AMOVELEMENT_ELEMENTS
Code: MF0127_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0127_2 Replace and/or repair removable elements of a vehicle
Duration: 220hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Denomination: BASIC ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Code: UF0911
Duration: 80 hours
Competition Referrer: This formative unit corresponds to the RP2 as referred to the simple elements of the electrical systems and the RP3.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the various mechanical and/or electrical elements that may be affected by interfering in the body repair operations.
CE1.1 Identify the functions each of the elements that make up the systems of its suspension, direction, engine cooling and lighting and maneuver.
CE1.2 Interpret which repair processes affect or interfere with suspension, steering, engine cooling and lighting and maneuver systems:
-Identify the necessary elements to be unmounted, whether they are affected or not.
-Prepare the necessary technical documentation.
-Set the working method, determining the parameters involved, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
C2: Unmount, mount and regulate mechanical and electrical elements, according to the manufacturer's technical specifications.
CE2.1 Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements, which may be affected by deformations suffered on the body in the suspension and steering system:
-Use the appropriate brakes for each type of junction.
-Apply the set tightening pairs.
-Perform the required reglages in each case.
-Check the absence of noise and vibration.
CE2.2 Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements, which may be affected by deformations suffered on the bodywork in the engine cooling system:
-Unmount, mount, and/or replace simple, cooling system elements.
-Repose the coolant.
-Verify the absence of leaks in the circuit.
-Check the operating temperature.
CE2.3 Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements, which may be affected by deformations suffered on the body in the intake and exhaust system:
-Unmount, mount, and/or replace simple elements of the exhaust intake systems.
-Make the necessary tightening and adjustments to avoid leakage, air intake and vibration in the exhaust, quiet, catalyst, intake and filters.
-Handle the catalysts taking into account environmental safety techniques for the handling of polluting materials.
CE2.4 Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements, which may be affected by deformations suffered on the body in the lighting and manoeuvring systems:
-Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements of the lighting and maneuver systems.
-Regulate the systems, adjusting the parameters necessary to adjust the luminosity, height and distance of lighting of the different elements according to norms.
-Perform basic maintenance of installations and equipment according to technical specifications.
CE2.5 Perform operations according to the specifications indicated in the technical documentation, checking the final operativity of the item.
CE2.6 Perform the operations in compliance with the stipulated personal and environmental safety standards.
Contents
1. Basic electrical systems of the vehicle
-Basic Electricity: Current Types and Ohm Law.
-Types of electrical and connection components.
-Facility types: copper, multiplexing, and fiber optics.
-Safety processes in the repair of vehicles with airbags, suitors, etc.
-Basic electrical circuit symbology of the automobile.
-Electrical system disassembly and assembly techniques.
-Interpretation of technical documentation.
-Replacement procedure and setting.
2. Electric lighting and manoeuvring systems
-Functionality and description of electrical components.
-Electrical system disassembly and assembly tools.
-Techniques for dismantling and assembling lighting and manoeuvring systems.
-Safety processes in the repair of vehicles with xenon.
-Interpretation of technical documentation.
-Replacement procedure and setting.
-Regulation of lighting and manoeuvring equipment.
3. Basic mechanical vehicle systems
-Description of mechanical components:
▫ Suspension.
▫ Address.
▫ Admission.
▫ Escape.
▫ Refrigeration.
-Elements most frequently affected in body repairs.
-Tools for dismantling and assembling mechanical systems. Features and operation.
-Technical disassembly and assembly of mechanical systems.
-Reglages and checks.
-Static and dynamic verification of the suspension system.
-Address drops: Divergence, convergence, falls, ...
-Deficiencies in the suspension and steering systems.
-Verifying the absence of leaks:
▫ Admission and escape circuit.
▫ Cooling system.
-Temperature check and engine operation.
-Environmental treatment of exhaust systems.
-Reposition of the refrigerant.
-Interpretation of technical documentation.
4. Air conditioning systems of the vehicle
-Functionality and description of components in air conditioning systems.
-Elements most frequently affected in body repairs.
-Technical documentation.
-Types of refrigerant gas and its technical and environmental characteristics.
-Verification of the absence of leakage in the air conditioning system.
-Temperature checking of the air conditioning system.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Denomination: EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR REMOVABLE ELEMENTS, AND CLOSING AND LIFTING SYSTEMS
Code: UF0912
Duration: 90 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1 and RP2 as referred to electrical systems present in the inner removable elements, locking systems and/or lifting systems.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Unmount, mount, and replace accessories and save by analyzing the types of joins, methods, equipment, and media to use.
CE1.1 Identify the different types of threads used in vehicles.
CE1.2 Describe different types of glues, accelerants and masillas, relating them according to the materials to be joined.
CE1.3 Relate the different types of rivets, with the materials to be joined.
CE1.4 Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected materials and equipment in the replacement of accessories and garnishes.
CE1.5 Identify the required elements to be unmounted, affected, or not.
CE1.6 Select the necessary technical documentation, determining the parameters involved.
C2: Use the tools, products, and materials, according to the established method, to perform the different types of joins.
CE2.1 Unmount and mount bolted items:
-Successfully position (cotas) the replacement element for subsequent mounting.
-Use the necessary brakes on the screws.
-Apply the required tightening pairs.
CE2.2 Unmount and mount the pasted elements:
-Successfully position (cotas) the replacement element for subsequent fixation.
-Unmount the item according to the sequence of operations set.
-Successfully prepare the junction zones.
-Perform product mixes in the required cases, meeting manufacturer specifications.
-Successfully apply the products.
-Perform the glue of the element by achieving the required quality.
CE2.3 Unmount and mount riveted items:
-Welding and drilling to remove or put rivets, taking into account the tolerances of the drill to be executed.
-Run the riveted correctly.
CE2.4 Perform operations according to the specifications indicated in the technical documentation, checking the final operativity of the item.
CE2.5 Perform the operations in compliance with the stipulated safety standards.
C3: Unmount, mount, and replace the various locking and lifting systems by analyzing the methods, equipment, and media to be used.
CE3.1 Identify the necessary elements to be unmounted, whether they are affected or not.
CE3.2 Identify and interpret the necessary technical documentation.
CE3.3 Choose the method, determining the parameters involved, explaining the characteristics of the selected equipment.
CE3.4 Run the adjustment of the components of the locking and lifting systems by checking the final operativity of the element.
CE3.5 Perform operations according to the specifications indicated in the technical documentation.
CE3.6 Perform the operations by using and respecting the stipulated safety standards.
Contents
1. Constitution of the vehicle
-Body types and their characteristics.
-Types of cabins and chassis.
-Description of auxiliary equipment of public works machinery and agricultural machinery.
-Description of exterior and interior removable elements.
2. Basic machining procedures
-Metrology; linear measurement devices.
-Rosecting and manual cutting.
-Taladry.
-Remachate.
3. Detachable junctions
-The characteristics of the junction and the elements used.
-Join procedures and techniques.
-Joins: Bolted, pasted, rivet, stapled, articulated.
4. Outer and inner removable elements
-Item types.
-Methods for replacement and tuning.
-Technical specifications.
-Unmounting and mounting processes for bolted elements.
▫ Thread types and their characteristics
▫ threaded element tightening techniques
▫ threaded element braking procedures.
-Disassembly and assembly processes of riveted elements.
▫ Types of rivets and their features.
▫ A drill of elements for later riveting.
-Disassembly and assembly processes of hinged elements.
▫ Joint systems and their features.
▫ Equipment required for the disassembled of articulated elements.
-Unmounting and mounting processes for glued elements.
▫ Types of adhesives and their features
▫ Imprimations, triggers, reagents ...
▫ Preparing the junction zone.
▫ Adhesive Application Systems: Types, throttling ...
▫ Accessories and moldings join procedures.
5. Closing mechanisms
-Closing systems: Mission, components, and features.
-Disassembly and mounting of the locking systems.
-Closing systems repair procedure.
-Unmounting, mounting and/or repair equipment: Features and operation.
-Reglages and checks.
-Maintenance of the equipment.
6. Lifting mechanisms
-Lift systems: Mission, components, and features.
-Disassembly and mounting of lifting systems.
-Lift systems repair procedure.
-Unmounting, mounting and/or repair equipment: Features and operation.
-Reglages and checks.
-Maintenance of the equipment.
7. Centralised locking systems
-Centralized shutdown teams: Types, mission, and features.
-Unmount and mount of centralized locking systems.
-A fault detection procedure.
-Lift systems repair processes.
-Modulos combined for the elevation of moons.
-Unmounting, mounting and/or repair equipment: Features and operation.
-Reglages and checks.
-Maintenance of the equipment.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: LUNGES REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
Code: UF0913
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1 in terms of the repair and replacement of moons.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Identify the different types of moons and their characteristics.
CE1.1 Describe the different types of moons and relate them to their properties.
CE1.2 Identify the identification code of the moon by extracting the information it includes.
CE1.3 Identify a laminated or tempered moon by analyzing its position in the vehicle or with its identification codes.
CE1.4 Identify accessories and variants that can present a moon, such as antennas, thermal cables, smokes, shields, etc.
CE1.5 Know the current regulations governing the properties and uses of the moons in vehicles.
C2: Unmount, mount, and replace lunges pasted by different techniques using appropriate methods, equipment, and media.
CE2.1 Identify the different types of joints stuck in moons by relating them to the technical specifications of the manufacturers.
CE2.2 Perform the disassembly of the pasted moon according to the established sequence of operations.
CE2.3 Successfully prepare the join zones for the pasted elements.
CE2.4 Successfully prepare products for attachment of glued elements, meeting the manufacturer's specifications before application.
CE2.5 Perform the correct application of the products for attachment of the pasted elements.
CE2.6 Perform the paste operations of elements by achieving the required quality.
CE2.7 Perform all operations in compliance with the specifications indicated in the technical documentation.
CE2.8 Check the final operation of the pasted moon.
C3: Unmount, mount, and replace heated or bolted moons by applying necessary methods, equipment, and means.
CE3.1 Identify the different types of gums, with the moons and on the supports with which they will be joined.
CE3.2 Identify the threads used for the attachment of moons, using the required brakes and applying the required torque.
CE3.3 Positioning the moon correctly has mounted for later fixation by means of gums or threads.
CE3.4 Positioning the gums of the heated moons taking into account their form, function, and fair tolerance.
CE3.5 Perform the disassembly and assembly of the required guards and accessories for the replacement of the moons.
CE3.6 Check the final operation of the mounted moon.
C4: Repair rolled moons, using the necessary methods, equipment and means.
CE4.1 Identify the conditions that enable the repair of laminated moons and analyze the viability of the repair.
CE4.2 Identify the equipment and means used in the laminated lunges repair processes.
CE4.3 Know the current regulations regarding the repair of laminated moons and the areas where repair is possible.
CE4.4 Perform the evacuation of small amounts of dirt and moisture from the damaged area, analyzing the viability of the repair.
CE4.5 Perform repair processes by meeting the technical specifications and achieving the required quality.
Contents
1. Moons according to their composition and assembly:
-Technical characteristics of the moons:
▫ Laminated.
▫ Templates.
-Legal rules for laminated and tempered moons.
-Precautions in the handling of temperate moons.
-Moons attachment systems by:
▫ Adhesive.
▫ Goma.
▫ threaded or pressure elements.
-Unmount and mount of elements prior to the replacement of the moon.
2.
{\cs6\f6\cf6\cf6\rquote}-Unmount Techniques
▫ piano string.
▫ Thermal knife.
▫ vibratory blade.
▫ pneumatic saw blade.
▫ Manual blade.
-Equipment and tools in the assembly of glued moons.
-The characteristics of the junction and the elements used.
-Characteristic products used in pasted joins.
-Replacement techniques and procedures.
-Equipment and tools for assembly processes.
-Preparation procedures for the surfaces to be joined.
-Union processes and adhesive application techniques.
-Mount processes, join features, and technical specifications.
-Subject to drying and curing times.
3. Unmounting and mounting processes of heated moons
-Dismantling and mounting techniques for heated moons.
-Methods and products to improve the replacement process.
-Types of clamping gums and precautions in handling.
-Water input absence verification.
4. Screw-up and mounting processes for bolted moons
-Thread types, tightening pairs, and clamping elements.
-Replacement techniques and procedures.
-Adjustment of tolerances and operativity of the mounted element.
-Set tightness check.
5. Rolling-mill repair techniques
-Equipment and tools in the repair of laminated moons.
-Types of damage.
-Required conditions prior to repair.
-Assessment criteria for the viability of the repair.
-Regulations concerning types and areas of damage repair.
-Technical specifications of laminated-rolled repair products.
-Repair processes.
-Verification of the required quality.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF0911 | 80 | 50 |
|
Unit 2-UF0912 | 90 | 20 |
| 20 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 2 must have been passed the formative unit 1.
To access the formative unit 3 must have been passed the formative unit 2.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Denomination: METALLIC AND SYNTHETIC ELEMENTS
Code: MF0128_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0128_2 Perform metal and synthetic element repair.
Duration: 230hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: REPAIRING METAL ELEMENTS
Code: UF0914
Duration: 80 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to RP1 as referred to the repair of metal elements, except aluminum.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the mechanical properties of metal materials, by interpreting test results that determine their characteristics.
CE1.1 Analyze the types of steel, smelters and light alloys, most used in the manufacture of vehicles, relating to their characteristics.
CE1.2 Describe the properties of metal materials when subjected to different heat treatments.
CE1.3 Describe the trials of metal materials to determine their characteristics.
C2: Analyze the repair process and the types of deformations, in order to select the repair method, to recover the original form and function.
CE2.1 Classify the diagnostic techniques used in the repair of metallic elements (visual, touch, sanding ..).
CE2.2 Run the various operations that comprise the repair process, taking into account the relationship that exists between them.
CE2.3 Analyze deformation types based on damage to repair:
-Identify the necessary elements to be repaired.
-Classify damage based on its extent and extent. (mild, medium, or strong)
-Classify damage based on location (easy, difficult, or without access)
-Determine the materials and parameters to use based on the selected method.
-Diagnose the viability of the repair based on damage.
C3: Identify tools that are involved in metal element repair.
CE3.1 Identify and describe the characteristics of the tools for the repair of steel sheet and its use:
-Select the tools for steel sheet shaping.
-Describe the tools used in the sheet metal collection.
-Analyze the operation of MIG/MAG equipment.
-Identify the different parts of the inertia hammer.
-Select the passive manual tools in the conformation.
CE3.2 Identify and describe the characteristics of the equipment and useful for the repair of steel sheet and its use:
-Select the traction equipment used in the repair.
-Describe equipment for the application of thermal treatments.
-Analyze the rules for the use and conservation of work equipment.
-Describe the different work tools used in the repairs.
C4: Conform metal elements to return the original shapes and bounds.
CE4.1 Conforming metal elements, recovering the original shapes and bounds:
-Run hammer and suffer dent repairs.
-Run repairs in areas that are easy to access, difficult to access, and without access.
-Conform dents with hot and cold inertia hammer.
-Repair deformations by means of carbon electrode and copper electrode elements.
-Verify that the element has recovered the original shapes and bounds.
Contents
1. Metal materials most used in vehicles
-Composition and properties of ferric alloys.
-Design of a self-supporting body in steel and aluminium.
-Composition and properties of light alloys (Al)
-Variation of properties by thermal treatments.
-Test techniques for the determination of properties.
-Characteristics of metal materials.
-Behavior of the material to the hit.
-Material behavior when heating it.
-Simbology of vehicle manufacturers.
2. Techniques used in the diagnosis of metal element repair
-Landed.
▫ Use of the body lime.
▫ Rubber Taco.
-Visual.
▫ Detection in light and dark colors.
▫ Use of sheet metal reflexes.
▫ Technical to locate water in sheet metal zones.
▫ Technical to locate cracks in putty and sealants.
▫ Technical to locate misalignments in sheet metal zones.
▫ wrinkle detection.
-To the touch.
-Peines.
-Manufacturer's manual.
3. Equipment and tools needed in the repair of metal elements
-Finish Marches.
-Marches of hitting.
-Cingels.
-Mashes.
-Tases.
-Limas of passing.
-Body Lima.
-Inertia Hammer.
-Copper electrode.
-Carbon electrode.
-Palancas de deabollar.
-Tracks.
-MIG/MAG welding equipment.
4. Damage classification based on grade, extent, and location
-Technical to determine repairs or replacements on sheet metal parts.
-Damage Classification:
-Grade: mild, medium and strong.
-Extension: substitution.
-Location: easy access, difficult access and no access.
-Vehicle value.
-Task Guides.
-Rating software.
-Direct and indirect damage.
5. Deabolishment techniques
-Suffered.
-Hit.
-Removing tensions.
-Thermal repair technique.
-Disabolishment of nerves or brittle.
-Disabolishment of areas with mouldings for mouldings.
-Disabolishment of easily accessible zones.
-Disabolishment of hard-to-reach or inaccessible areas.
-Stretched technique.
-Carbon electrode plate collection technique.
-Picking of sheet with copper electrode.
-Tensing and repair of large dents.
-Wide dent repair technique without stretching.
-Wide dent repair technique with stretch.
-Cold-picked technique.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: REPAIRING ALUMINUM METAL ELEMENTS
Code: UF0915
Duration: 40 hours
Competition Referrer: This formative unit corresponds to the RP1 in the aluminum.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Identify the tools, equipment and tools involved in the repair of metallic aluminum elements.
CE1.1 Identify and describe the characteristics of the equipment and useful:
-Select the work equipment based on the deformation.
-Analyze the operation of the MIG/MAG equipment for aluminium.
-Identify the different parts of the inertia hammer for aluminum.
-Describe the different work equipment used in aluminium repairs.
C2: Repair aluminum elements using the necessary equipment and tools to return the original shapes and bounds.
CE2.1 Repair aluminum elements, recovering the original shapes and bounds:
-Run repairs in either rivet or adhesive zones.
-Run dent repair with specific hammer and suffer.
-Run repairs in areas that are easy to access, difficult to access, and without access.
-Conform dents with aluminum-specific inertia hammer.
-Repair deformations by means of aluminum-specific collection elements.
-Check that the element has recovered the original shapes and bounds.
Contents
1. Required and useful equipment in the repair
-Aluminium finishing martils.
-Rubber strokes.
-Wood strokes.
-Aluminium chaps with specific thickness.
-Pistola bicomponent.
-Structural adhesive.
-Specific bank screw.
-Sufridera.
-Aluminium Remachter.
-Specific Brocas.
-Aluminium Tases.
-Specific inertia martils.
-Specific levers.
-MIG/MAG welding equipment for aluminium.
-Imprimation for aluminum.
-Using paraffin soap.
2. Repair techniques
-Suffered.
-Hit.
-Removing tensions.
-Repair of nerves or brittle.
-Repair of zones with mouldings for mouldings.
-Repair of areas of easy and difficult access.
-Repair of zones without direct access.
-Cold stretch technique.
-Cold-picked technique.
-Vehicle repair technique.
-Repair technique with dismounted part.
-Tensing and repair of large dents.
-Wide dent repair technique without stretching.
-Wide dent repair technique with stretch.
3. Check techniques for the repaired item.
-Check tolerances.
-Holguras check.
-Verifying the nerves or brittle with the adjacent areas.
-Water check on repaired parts.
-Check technique for rivets.
-Structural adhesive testing technique.
-Checking sealants on panels.
-Check the status of counter-sheets.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: REPAIRING SYNTHETIC ELEMENTS
Code: UF0916
Duration: 80 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP2.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the mechanical properties of plastic and composite materials by interpreting results and/or conducting tests to obtain their characteristics.
CE1.1 Analyze the types and nature of the most used plastics in vehicles.
CE1.2 Describe the types and nature of fiber composite materials with resins, more employees in vehicles.
CE1.3 Identify the elasticity, deformability and flexibility tests of thermoplastic, thermostable and composite materials.
CE1.4 Perform the material behavior tests on the heat.
CE1.5 Interpret the results of the technological tests, relating the different characteristics to each other.
C2: Analyze the repair process and the types of deformations that may suffer from the elements of plastic and composite materials, in order to select the method of repair, the equipment, the tools, tools and products to recover the original form and function.
CE2.1 Identify different types of plastic or composite materials by applying the most commonly used methods (flame testing, identification).
CE2.2 Relating materials with their fundamental properties.
CE2.3 Identify the various operations that comprise the repair process, taking into account the relationship between them.
CE2.4 Determine the repair method using technical documentation.
CE2.5 Determine equipment, tools, and materials to be used.
C3: Repair elements of plastic or composite material, using the tools, equipment and materials involved in the repair to return the original shapes and characteristics.
CE3.1 Perform the layout and conformed of templates and supports required for the repair of items or subsets.
CE3.2 Perform the various sanding processes of the joints, depending on the product or the required finish.
CE3.3 Identify and describe the characteristics of the different products to be mixed.
CE3.4 Repair and shaping plastic and composite materials, making the various repair processes:
-Make mixtures of products with the correct proportions, which allow the repair of laminated plastics, injected and composite materials, achieving the original form and function.
-Make the various product application processes (spatula, brush, thermal gun ...) taking into account the layer thickness, the time between layers, loads and reinforcements, according to the manufacturer's specifications.
-Join by welding thermoplastic materials to meet required specifications.
-Run the various finishing processes, to get the piece to recover the original shapes and features.
Contents
1. Plastic and composite materials
-Composition and characteristics of plastic materials.
-Behavior of the material to heat.
-Manufacture of templates and supports for repair (tracing and shaping).
-Composition of the fiberglass with polyester resin.
-Features and properties.
-Reaction products.
-Plastic variants.
-Blanket fibers of different thicknesses.
-Application of resins and masillas.
-Simbology of vehicle manufacturers and products.
2. Techniques used in the diagnosis of repair of synthetic elements
-A diagnostic technique for repairs or replacements in plastic parts.
-Diagnostics of sunken zones.
-Landed.
-Visual.
-To the touch.
-Rubber Taco.
-Detect of breaks in:
▫ Internal zones.
▫ Attachment Tabs.
▫ Consoles and onboard boards.
▫ Amovible element attachment zones.
-Peines.
-Detection of fissures in external areas and with nerves.
-Tensions diagnostics.
-Manufacturer's manual.
3. Equipment and tools needed in the repair of synthetic elements
-Hot-air Soplete.
-Plumber lamp.
-Drill.
-Button.
-Tablillas of different shapes and sizes.
-Bayeta.
-sponge.
-Small diameter Brocas.
-Chapist Tases.
-Sargents.
-Auto-blocant mugs.
-Screwdriver with curved tip.
-Pistola bicomponent.
-Reinforcing metal malas.
-Finished products.
-Resins.
-Corts-wires.
-Blades.
-orbital lijadora.
-Fresh.
-Broches.
-Spatulas.
4. Methods and techniques in repair processes.
-Thermostable repair techniques with resins, reinforcements and fiber.
-Conformation of semi-rigid and flexible thermosetting (boards).
-Methods for repairing synthetic materials.
-Technical repair of synthetic materials with adhesives.
-Method in the treatment and formation of thermoplastics deformations.
-Soldering thermoplastics repair techniques.
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Naming: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP2, RP3, and RP4 as regards the prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.3 Identify environmental protection requirements derived from actions with polluting products.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.1 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the identified risks, including the selection, conservation and correct use of the individual and collective protective equipment.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.1 Specify aspects of environmental regulations related to the risks arising from the activity of the workshop, such as noise, vibration, and the handling of combustible products, lubricants, paints and solvents, combustion gases, welding gases, waste materials, lijas, electrodes, etc.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.3 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the risks identified, including the correct handling of products and their storage, use of individual and collective protective equipment.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
▫ Work accident.
▫ Professional illness.
▫ Other pathologies derived from work.
▫ Economic and operational repercussions.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
▫ The labor risk prevention law.
▫ The prevention services regulation.
▫ Scope and legal bases.
▫ Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
▫ National agencies.
▫ Autonomic bodies.
-General risks and their prevention:
▫ In the handling of tools and equipment.
▫ In handling systems and installations.
▫ On storage and transport of loads.
▫ Exposure to physical, chemical, or biological agents.
▫ The fire.
▫ Physical fatigue.
▫ Mental fatigue.
▫ Job dissatisfaction.
▫ Collective protection.
▫ Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF0914 | 80 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF0915 | 40 | 20 |
|
30 | ||
|
| 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 2 must have passed the formative unit 1
To access the formative unit 3 must have passed the formative unit 2
The training unit 4 can be programmed independently.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 3
Denomination: NON-STRUCTURAL FIXED ELEMENTS
Code: MF0129_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0129_2 Replace and/or repair non-structural fixed elements of the vehicle in whole or in part.
Duration: 140hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: DISASSEMBLY AND SEPARATION OF FIXED ELEMENTS
Code: UF0918
Duration: 60 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Select the appropriate methods and equipment based on the type of join to be broken.
CE1.1 Analyze the separation processes of the different fixed elements by selecting the appropriate methods and equipment.
CE1.2 Relating metal element separation procedures with employee union media.
CE1.3 Describe the operation of the different machines and tools used to remove points and welding cords.
CE1.4 Determine the operation of the various machines used in metal sheet cutting operations:
-Identify the edge of the chisel in the separation process.
-Choose the type of arc or vaiven saw required in the separation.
-Choose the manual or pneumatic cutting method required for each repair.
-Identify the operation of the different types of blades for the roora.
C2: Replace parts or full elements, or partial sections:
CE2.1 Analyze the parts replacement processes, complete elements, or partial sections.
-Identify the element to be replaced, as well as the type of join used.
CE2.2 Choose the repair method, selecting the most appropriate cutting equipment.
-Perform the layout of the cut that allows you to run it according to technical specifications.
-Choose the cutting method, selecting the most suitable cutting equipment.
-Use the appropriate anti-corrosive media for each repair.
C3: Prepare the unmount and separation zone of fixed elements.
CE3.1 Identify the different operations to be performed in the preparation of fixed elements:
− Remove paints, sealants, and antigravels.
− Remove welding points with milling machines and drilling machines.
− Remove brass welding cords.
− Unpin tabs on panels.
− Taladry and point milling.
− Remove soldering points with pneumatic and manual cuts.
C4: Unmount and separate fixed items using equipment and tools correctly.
CE4.1 Describe the different operations to be performed on the unmounting of fixed elements:
− Identify the cutting zone according to specific manufacturer rules.
− Make cuts with different equipment (alternate saw, circular ...).
− Unengaged tab tabs.
− Perform cuts on the fixed elements to replace and on new parts.
− Verify that the cut operations performed conform to the specifications given in the technical standards.
Contents
1. Undotted operations.
-Preparing the point.
-Talked with specific bits.
-Point-off points in areas that are easy and difficult to access.
-Freed off points.
-Unengaged tab tabs.
-Unloading of areas with anti-gravel and sealants.
-Debarging of areas with cavities wax.
-Unset of tabs on panels.
2. Item-cutting operations.
-Graphic representation: Croquised and bounded.
-Plotting and preparing the cut.
-Removing paintings with specific disks.
-Court of items using manual tools.
-Court of elements by means of electrical and pneumatic tools.
-Anti-corrosive protection in the cutting zone.
-Concepts associated with cutting processes with tools and machines.
3. Equipment and tools necessary for the disassembly and separation of fixed elements.
-Manual and pneumatic brush.
-Cortafríos.
-Sierras: circular, arc, vaiven pneumatics and orbital saw.
-Flame retardants.
-Roora.
-Despunter.
-Electrical and manual drill.
-Interchangeable Brocas.
-Specific brocade for welding points.
-Amoladora.
-Disupbar and cutting discs.
-Marches of hitting and finishing.
-Chapist Tases.
-Limas of passing.
4. Methods and techniques in repair processes.
-Total or partial replacement method.
-The technique of using the cutting methods.
-The anticorrosive protection method of the element.
-Manufacturer's technical standards.
-Undotted technique in areas of easy and difficult access.
-Panel tabbed desenation method.
-Panel tab defusing technique.
-Method of preparing and adjusting the replacement.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: MOUNTING AND JOINING FIXED ELEMENTS
Code: UF0919
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP2 and RP3
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform the preparation of joins on non-structural fixed elements.
CE1.1 Perform junction preparation to apply point welding and MIG/MAG:
-Perform cleaning of the junction zones by removing existing waste.
-Profile the join zones.
-Make the overlap zone with the tiling.
-Apply the masillas or the antioxidants in the junction areas.
-Apply the reinforcements of the joints in the cases considered necessary, according to efforts that have to be supported by the union and/or constructive characteristics of the materials to be joined.
-Position the parts according to the parts given by the manufacturer, checking the alignment of the replaced elements, with the adjacent pieces.
-Verify that replacement of parts saves technical specifications in terms of assembly methods and anti-corrosive protection.
C2: Perform the join on non-structural fixed elements.
CE2.1 Perform the attachment of elements by beating and sealing tabs.
CE2.2 Perform the attachment of elements by using the welding types used in fixed join systems:
-Perform the welding of points and continuous yarn resistance under protective gas.
-Perform soft welding.
CE2.3 Check that the obtained welds meet the specifications of a standard solder (resistance, melting edges ..).
-Verify that the soldiers elements return the functional characteristics specified by the manufacturer and/or required needs.
C3: Perform the deburring of the bonded zone by welding.
CE3.1 Perform the scuppering of the united zone using the necessary tools.
-Perform the deburring with electric grinder with diss and low abrasion discs.
CE3.2 Verify the placement of the fire-retardant blanket to avoid projections in adjacent areas.
-Check that the fallow areas keep the technical specifications as to the thickness of the sheets.
CE3.3 Apply the necessary anticorrosive protections on the two sides of the attached sheets.
-Check that the unbarked areas comply with the necessary anti-corrosive protections.
Contents
1. Join operations
-Cleaning the junction zones.
-Graphic representation: Croquised and bounded.
-Plotting and preparing the area to join.
-Plot and join the overlap tab.
-Concepts associated with join processes with tools and machines.
2. Equipment and tools necessary for mounting and joining fixed elements.
-Tases.
-Finish Marches.
-Welding equipment:
▫ MIG/MAG.
▫ Soft Welding.
▫ Soldering by resistance points.
-Mordaces.
-Despunter.
-Filetear Alicates.
-Amoladora.
-Disk of:
▫ Court.
▫ Disbarbar.
▫ Braided Steel.
▫ Low abrasion.
-Drill.
-Spatulas.
-orbital lijadora.
-Cortafríos.
-Brush.
-Manta flame retardant.
-Self-blocating mugs.
-pneumatic piston for sealant and wax of cavities.
3. Welding methods
-Imprimations and deoxidants used in the welding processes.
-Preparation of joints and welding equipment.
-Input materials used with the various welding methods.
-Welding procedures.
-Power by resistance points.
-MIG/MAG.
-Soft tin/lead solder.
-The function, characteristics, and use of the equipment.
4. Methods and techniques in the join processes
-Join method in a total or partial replacement.
-Overlap technique in cutting zones.
-Soft solder utilization technique.
-Panel tabbed concealment method.
-Presentation technique of parts with adjacent elements.
-Conditioning technique and preparation of the tabs to be welded.
5. Methods and techniques in the scuppering processes
-Method of deburring with electric grinder.
-Method of deburring in areas with antigravillas and sealants.
-Disk utilization techniques, braided steel and low abrasion.
-Method of placement of the flame retardant in adjacent areas.
-Method of checking the thickness of the plate on the basis of the dice by the manufacturer.
-A technique for applying cavity waxes in the inner faces of the junction.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF ALUMINUM ELEMENTS
Code: UF0920
Duration: 30 hours
Competition Referrer: This formative unit corresponds to RP1, RP2, and RP3 as referred to aluminum elements.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform the disassembly of fixed aluminum elements correctly, with the different operations established in the work process.
CE1.1 Perform the disassembly of the fixed aluminum elements.
-Properly regulate the useful rivet.
-Unstapling the existing rivets into the junction of the piece to be repaired.
-Make cuts with the various appropriate aluminum equipment.
-Perform the overlap in the required parts of the parts.
-Verify that the cut operations performed conform to the specifications given in the technical rules.
C2: Perform the preparation, repair and attachment of fixed elements of aluminium, using the different equipment.
CE2.1 Perform junction preparation to apply different procedures:
-Perform cleaning of the junction zones by removing existing waste.
-Perform the cleaning of tools with soap for fining.
-Perform overlapping veneers in the required areas.
-Apply the contrachapas in the joints, in the cases considered necessary, according to efforts that have to be supported by the union and/or constructive characteristics of the materials to be joined.
-Perform the drilling on the surface to rivet with a special drill bit for aluminum.
-Apply the adhesive on the entire riveted surface to avoid noise.
-Apply the different types of rivets (blind and solid), using a specific rivet.
CE2.2 Perform Element Binding by MIG/MAG Welding
-Perform specific continuous yarn welding for aluminum under protective gas.
-Verify that the soldiers elements return the functional characteristics specified by the manufacturer and/or required needs.
Contents
1. Cutting and cutting operations
-Preparation of the rivet.
-Talked with specific bits.
-Graphic representation: Croquised and bounded.
-Plotting and preparing the cut.
-Court of elements using manual, electrical and pneumatic tools.
-Using soap for cutting tools.
-Anti-corrosive protection in the cutting zone.
-Concepts associated with cutting processes with tools and machines specific to aluminum.
-Undotted rivets in areas that are easy and difficult to access.
-Fresh rivets.
-Debarging of areas with adhesives.
2. Methods of welding and bonding in aluminium elements
-Imprimations and deoxidants used in the welding processes.
-Preparation of specific joints and welding equipment.
-The function, characteristics, and use of the equipment.
-Specific MIG/MAG welding procedures.
-MIG/MAG welding procedures to plug.
-Parts Union by means of specific MIG/MAG welding.
-Method of use of the flame-retardant blanket.
-Cleaning the junction zones.
-Realization of the overlap zone with the tiling of filetar.
-Graphic representation: Croquised and bounded.
-Plotting and preparing the area to join.
-Colocation of the pieces to be joined together with their adjacent elements.
-Specific rivet regulation procedure.
-Realization of joins with rivets.
-Procedure for regulating the bicomponent pistol.
-adhesive bonding technique.
-Realization of joins by adhesives.
-Join technique by cocked.
-Realization of joins by cocked.
-Concepts associated with join processes with tools and machines.
3. Performance against overlapping veneers
-Function, characteristics, and use of the counter-plate.
-Method for performing the different types of counter-sheets.
-Realization of counter-sheets by following the set parameters.
-Technical for the placement of the counter-plates.
-Realization of nerves or brittle.
-Technical for the application of stresses.
-Method for placement with adhesives.
-Colocation with adhesives.
-Method for placing with rivets.
-Colocation with rivets.
-Realization of anti-veneers in areas of easy and difficult access.
-Realization of counter-sheets in areas without direct access.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Unit training 1-UF0918 | 60 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF0919 | 50 | 20 |
| 30 | 10 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 2 must have been passed the formative unit 1.
To access the formative unit 3 must have been passed the formative unit 2.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
NON-WORKING PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE MODULE FOR THE MAINTENANCE OF NON-STRUCTURAL VEHICLE BODY ELEMENTS
Code: MP0190
Duration: 40 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Unmount and mount mechanical and electrical elements, according to the manufacturer's technical specifications.
CE1.1 Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements of the suspension and steering systems, affected in the body repairs.
CE1.2 Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements of the intake and exhaust systems, affected in the body repairs.
CE1.3 Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements of the lighting and maneuvering system, affected in the body repairs.
CE1.4 Unmount, mount and/or replace simple elements of refrigeration and air conditioning systems, affected in body repairs.
C2: Perform the replacement and repair of pasted, heated, and laminated moons.
CE2.1 Participate in the replacement of the pasted moon according to the established sequence of operations.
CE2.2 Participate in the disassembly, mounting and/or replacement of the crescent or bolted in accordance with the established sequence of operations.
CE2.3 Participate in the repair of laminated moons by meeting the technical specifications and achieving the required quality.
CE2.4 Collaborate on the watertight and sonority checks of the mounted moon.
C3: Repair elements of plastic or composite material.
CE3.1 Perform the conformation of mild deformations by applying heat.
CE3.2 Participate in the repair of cracks and breaks by welding or applying adhesives.
CE3.3 Participate in the application of products, which allow the repair of splatters and upholstered by obtaining the original form and function.
CE3.4 Collaborate on the various finishing processes, to ensure that the part recovers the original shapes and characteristics.
CE3.5 To differentiate the particularities of the processes of beautification of the plastic surfaces.
C4: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE4.1 Behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE4.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE4.3 Undertake with diligence the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE4.4 Integrate into the production processes of the workplace.
CE4.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE4.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Participation in the assembly of basic electrical and electrical elements of the vehicle
-Items or set affected in body repairs.
-Address Cots Regulation: Divergence, Convergence, Falls.
-Reposition of engine coolant.
-Check engine operating temperature.
-Reposition of the cooling gas of the air conditioning system.
-Collaboration in the verification process:
▫ Fugas in the air conditioning system.
▫ Fugas on the intake and exhaust circuit.
▫ Fugas in the cooling system.
▫ Quality required in the repair.
2. Replacement of glued, paged and bolted moons and laminated lunges repair
-Use of equipment and tools in the process of replacing glued and laminated moons.
▫ Collaboration on the various procedures for the replacement of moons
▫ The tightness and sonority checks of the mount.
▫ Participation in setting criteria for the assessment of viability in repair.
▫ Assistance in verifying the quality required in the repair.
3. Collaboration in the repair and shaping of plastic and composite materials
-Using specific machines and tools.
-Application of the plastic identification systems and their identification codes.
-Use of the criteria for the selection of the repair technique.
-Using repair techniques:
▫ Using the heat application.
▫ Using the products application.
-Application of the shaping techniques.
-Running processes to promote adherence.
-Realization of the equalization processes to the original textured.
-Realization of the painted and colored techniques of the repaired compound.
4. Integration and communication in the workplace
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Follow up on the rules on risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
-Reporting of the developed activity.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS FOR TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0127_2: Elements Removable | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Professional level 3 certificates from the professional vehicle body area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0128_2: Metal and synthetic elements | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Professional level 3 certificates from the professional vehicle body area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0129_2: Non-structural fixed elements | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Certificates of professional level 3 of the professional body of vehicles of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SPACES, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 | 45 | 60 | |
|
Workshop | 210 | 350 | |
| Store | 20 | 20 |
| M1 | M2 | M3 | |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Classroom | X | X | X |
|
Workshop | X | X | X |
| Store | X | X | X |
| Equipment | |
|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audiovisual Equipment. -network installed PCs, projection cannon, and internet. -Specialty specific software. -Pizarras to write with a marker. -Classroom material. -Table and chair for trainer. -Messes and chairs for students. |
|
Body Workshop | -Quick type with lift. -Cavalry. -4 TN Planchist hydraulic Cat. -Box tools and tools for the disassembly of basic electromechanical elements. -Different lunges extraction and placement equipment. -MIG/MAG welding equipment. -Soft welding equipment. -Unabolished machine from the outside. -Point welding equipment. -Tape (manual and pneumatic). -Vaiven pneumatic Sierra. -Roora. -Despunter. -Auto-blocant mugs. -Pistola bicomponent. -Mashes. -Tases. -Inertia hammer. -Abolish levers. -Tracks. -Aluminium finish martils. -Aluminium Remachter. -Specific Brocas. -Tases for aluminum. -Specific inertia martils. -Specific levers. -MIG/MAG welding equipment for aluminium. -Imprimation for aluminum. -Jabon for fining. |
|
Store | -Store products and tools. Locker room with lockers. Lavajos, Botiquín. -Specific installations: Aspiration Central, Aspirational Planes, Combustible Gas Lines (Oxygen and Acethylene), Compressed Air Line, Welding Gas Aspiration. |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units to be provided with the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces will be sufficient for a minimum of fifteen students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to a higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX VII
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF VEHICLE BODY STRUCTURES
Code: TMVL0309
Professional Family: Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles.
Professional area: Vehicle bodywork
Professional qualification level: 2
Professional reference qualification:
TMV045_2: Maintenance of vehicle body structures (RD 295/2004, February 20)
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0124_2: Replace fixed elements of the vehicle in whole or in part.
UC0125_2: Repair the structure of the vehicle.
UC0126_2: Perform metal elements and importance reforms.
General competition:
Perform the repair of fixed and structural elements of the vehicle, and important reforms, adjusting to established procedures and times, achieving the required quality and safety conditions.
Professional Environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its activity in the body area of large, medium and small enterprises engaged in the manufacture and maintenance of vehicles
Productive Sectors:
Construction of bodies.
Repairing cars: sheet and paint
Repair of agricultural machinery and public works: sheet, paint, equipment, tools and optional transformations.
Repair of railways: sheet metal and structures.
Aircraft repair: sheet and paint (with additional training).
In other productive sectors where sheet metal and equipment construction work is carried out.
Occupations or related jobs:
7313.1054 Industrial Charunway.
7313.1063 Chaista-Pintor of vehicles.
Car structure repairman.
Chapista repairer of public works and agricultural machinery.
Chapista repairer of heavy vehicles, motorcycles and railway equipment.
Metal element repairman.
Chapista of large optional transformations of vehicles, equipment and tools.
Duration of the associated training: 560 hours.
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0124_2: Fixed items (180 hours).
• UF0918: (transverse) Unmounting and separation of fixed elements (60 hours).
• UF0920: (transverse) Disassembly and assembly of aluminum elements (30 hours).
• UF0943: Methods of joining and disconnecting structural fixed elements (90 hours).
MF0125_2: Vehicle structural elements (200 hours).
• UF0944: Verification of deformed structures (40 hours).
• UF0945: Positioning and control of the structure in the bench (90 hours).
• UF0946: Repair en bancada (70 hours).
MF0126_2: Conformed metal elements (140 hours).
• UF0914: (Cross) Repair of metal elements (80 hours).
• UF0947: Transformations of importance in bodies (30 hours).
• UF0917: (Transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MP0196: Non-working professional practice module: Maintenance of vehicle body structures (40 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established in the training unit UF0917 of the training module MF0126_2 of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Denomination: REPLACE FIXED ELEMENTS OF THE VEHICLE IN WHOLE OR IN PART
Level: 2
Code: UC0124_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform partial or total disassembly of fixed elements, using appropriate techniques and equipment.
CR1.1 According to the operation to be performed, the machine or tool to be used is determined.
CR1.2 The element or elements to which the dismounted part is attached, does not suffer any damage or deterioration.
CR1.3 The delimitation or layout of the part to be disassembled is adjusted to the manufacturer's recommendations, according to the breakdown.
CR1.4 The cut or unsewn operation is executed according to procedure.
RP2: Prepare the mount by positioning the part and performing the corresponding join preparation.
CR2.1 The profiling of the join zones is performed according to the job process.
CR2.2 Cleaning of the junction zones is done by removing the waste.
CR2.3 The fixing of the part for subsequent attachment is performed according to the original bounds.
CR2.4 Anti-corrosive protection if applicable and/or tightness is performed according to the manufacturer's standards.
CR2.5 the preparation of the type of bonding is adjusted to the characteristics of resistance, coating, etc.
RP3: Run the junction using different welding techniques, used in vehicles.
CR3.1 The choice of the machine to run the solder fits the characteristics of the process.
CR3.2 The choice of the input and deoxidizing material is performed according to the materials to be attached.
CR3.3 The welding process is run according to rules, achieving the required binding characteristics.
CR3.4 In point welding the intensity, time, sharpening and alignment of electrodes according to the type of attachment is determined.
CR3.5 In oxyacetylenic welding the ratio of oxygen mixture and prefixed acetylene is achieved, as well as the choice of the nozzle according to the type of binding.
CR3.6 In semi-automatic welding the intensity, pressure of the gas and the speed of the wire are suitable for making the union.
CR3.7 In electric arc welding the intensity and the electrode are selected according to the type of attachment.
CR3.8 The executed weld meets the characteristics defined in technical specifications.
CR3.9 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case.
Professional Context
Production media
Electric Arc Welding Equipment, electrical welding equipment by points, electrical welding equipment with semi-automatic gas, oxiacetylene welding equipment, cutting edge, electric pneumatic cutting, alternate saw, circular saw, profiler, plasma cutting machine. Tool team of the chapista.
Sets or elements of metal materials (fins, bonnet, doors, roofs, structures ..). Equipment and tools for agricultural machinery and public works.
Products and results
Return to its original characteristics, with the different binding techniques, the different substituted elements.
Methods, procedures, and sequence of operations defined. Parameters of operations not fully defined.
The area to be replaced is determined by removing the joining systems (welding points, etc) by profiling and preparing the joints; the part to be mounted is then prepared, mounted and calibrated before the junction is executed by the different welding systems.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders of the workshop head or section manager. Microfiche, graphic and written. Computer media.
Competition Unit 2
Denomination: REPAIR THE STRUCTURE OF THE VEHICLE
Level: 2
Code: UC0125_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform the diagnosis of breakdown repair, handling technical documentation and instrumentation of measurement and control following established procedures.
CR1.1 Through visual recognition, the damaged zone is determined.
CR1.2 The selected technical documentation and the use of the measuring and control devices allow to narrow deformed areas as well as possible damage to other parts of the vehicle.
CR1.3 With dimensional control bench, the diagnosis is made by comparing the parameters obtained with those set by the manufacturer.
CR1.4 With positive control bench, the diagnosis is made by comparing the parameters obtained with those set by the manufacturer.
CR1.5 With optical control bench, diagnosis is made by comparing the parameters obtained with those set by the manufacturer
RP2: Locate the vehicles or components in the bench and know the shape and deformability of the body and/or frame, cabin and equipment or tools, position the stretchers, following specifications of the manufacturer of the bench.
CR2.1 For the logical development of the work process the necessary tools, materials, and auxiliary media are selected
CR2.2 The determination of the anchor points is made according to the specifications of the manufacturer of the bench.
CR2.3 The position of the body and/or the cab and the equipment on the bench is made according to the manufacturer's specifications.
CR2.4 The placement of the "stretchers" is done by observing the deformation of the body, frame, cabin and equipment determining the senses of the "shots".
CR2.5 To perform the stretch of the structure, until the recovery of the original bounds the necessary "setbacks" are positioned.
RP3: Retrieve the structure to its original cotas, using the appropriate techniques and means.
CR3.1 The vehicle has been returned to its original cotas, executing the "shots" and "hiccups", by means of the stretchers intended for this purpose.
CR3.2 The dimensions are checked with the measurement and control tools of the bench itself.
CR3.3 The specific templates for checking the framing are used correctly.
CR3.4 The final dimensions are those in the manufacturer's control tabs.
CR3.5 Basic maintenance operations for work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case
CR3.6 the process is developed in compliance with the personal and collective security measures.
Professional Context
Production media
Dimensional control bank, positive control bench, optical control bench, comparison calibers, measuring calibers, pressure cats, fixing tools, tensioners. Computer and computer media. Chapista-specific tools. Means of personal protection.
Metal structures of body, frame, cabin and equipment.
Products and results
Return the structure (body, frame, cab ...) to the original cotes given by the manufacturer. Defined methods, procedures, and sequence of operations. Parameters of operations not fully defined. Diagnose the failure posed. Positioning the vehicle on the bench, carrying out the measurement control according to technical sheets, executing the convenient shots and checking the final positioning (with templates, measurements, etc.).
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders of the Head of Workshop or section manager. Microfiche, graphic and written. Computer media.
Competition Unit 3
Naming: PERFORMING METAL ELEMENTS AND IMPORTANCE REFORMS
Level: 2
Code: UC0126_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Repair metal elements following different shaping processes.
CR1.1 For the logical development of the work process, the necessary tools, materials and auxiliary means are selected.
CR1.2 The technical documentation is correctly selected and interpreted and the parameters to be taken into account in the process development are determined.
CR1.3 The area to be repaired is identified by the different deformations determination processes (visual recognition, sanding, etc).
CR1.4 The deabolishment operation is considered to be completed when according to the working procedure and considering product tolerances for masillar, the original surface is recovered.
CR1.5 The deabolishment process is performed according to standards, obtaining the cotas given by the manufacturer.
CR1.6 In the process of drawing and collecting sheet material the characteristics of the material are respected.
RP2: Perform importance transformations on the body, following technical specifications.
CR2.1 The machines and/or tools to be used are determined according to the operations to be performed.
CR2.2 The transformation process is done according to the constitution of the elements, bonding materials and equipment used, handling technical documentation and following the specifications of the sketches and accessories.
CR2.3 The transformations made meet the characteristics of pre-set functionality and meet the specifications of the client's technical documentation and requests.
CR2.4 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are carried out in each case.
RP3: Run all plate and/or frame repair operations on bodywork and/or rack, cabin and equipment in accordance with safety and health standards.
CR3.1 Of the safety standards of the workshop, the risks inherent in the specific work are extracted, and protection, personal and collective measures are checked.
CR3.2 The work area remains risk-free and security, personal, and collective standards are respected.
CR3.3 The contingencies that have occurred are communicated with the necessary promptness to enable their supervision and resolution.
Professional Context
Production media
Folding, bending, shear, profiler, debarter, heat point application machine, graphite electrodes .... Chapista-specific tools
Sets or elements of metal materials (fins, bonnet, doors, roofs, sides). Complete vehicles.
Products and results
Return the various repaired items to their original features. Perform optional transformations of importance. Methods, procedures, and defined operations sequences. Parameters of operations not defined in their entirety. Metal elements: Diagnose the breakdown, deabolishing the deformed zone, repairing the deformations and performing specific points heating if applicable. Perform the operations required to perform transformations.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Sketches and transformations schemes. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders of the Head of Workshop or section manager. Microfiche, graphic and written. Computer media.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: FIXED ELEMENTS
Code: MF0124_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0124_2 Replace fully or partially fixed vehicle elements
Duration: 180 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: DISASSEMBLY AND SEPARATION OF FIXED ELEMENTS
Code: UF0918
Duration: 60 hours
Competition Referer: This formative unit corresponds to the RP1 as referred to the disassembly of fixed elements.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Select the appropriate methods and equipment based on the type of join to be broken.
CE1.1 Analyze the separation processes of the different fixed elements by selecting the appropriate methods and equipment.
CE1.2 Relating metal element separation procedures with employee union media.
CE1.3 Describe the operation of the different machines and tools used to remove points and welding cords.
CE1.4 Determine the operation of the various machines used in metal sheet cutting operations:
-Identify the edge of the chisel in the separation process.
-Choose the type of arc or vaiven saw required in the separation.
-Choose the manual or pneumatic cutting method required for each repair.
-Identify the operation of the different types of blades for the roora.
C2: Replace parts or full elements, or partial sections:
CE2.1 Analyze the parts replacement processes, complete elements, or partial sections.
-Identify the element to be replaced, as well as the type of join used.
CE2.2 Choose the repair method, selecting the most appropriate cutting equipment.
-Perform the layout of the cut that allows you to run it according to technical specifications.
-Choose the cutting method, selecting the most suitable cutting equipment.
-Use the appropriate anti-corrosive media for each repair.
C3: Prepare the unmount and separation zone of fixed elements.
CE3.1 Identify the different operations to be performed in the preparation of fixed elements:
-Remove paints, sealants, and antigravillas.
-Remove welding points with milling machines and drilling machines.
-Remove brass welding cords.
-Undo tabs on panels.
-Taladry and point milling.
-Remove soldering points with pneumatic and manual cuts.
C4: Unmount and separate fixed items using equipment and tools correctly.
CE4.1 Describe the different operations to be performed on the unmounting of fixed elements:
-Identify the cutting zone according to manufacturer-specific rules.
-Make cuts with different equipment (alternate saw, circular ...)
-Unengaged tab tabs.
-Make cuts on the fixed elements to replace and on new parts.
-Verify that the cut operations performed conform to the specifications given in the technical rules.
Contents
1. Undotted operations
-Preparing the point.
-Talked with specific bits.
-Point-off points in areas that are easy and difficult to access.
-Freed off points.
-Unengaged tab tabs.
-Unloading of areas with anti-gravel and sealants.
-Debarging of areas with cavities wax.
-Unset of tabs on panels.
2. Item-cutting operations
-Graphic representation: Croquised and bounded.
-Plotting and preparing the cut.
-Removing paintings with specific disks.
-Court of items using manual tools.
-Court of elements by means of electrical and pneumatic tools.
-Anti-corrosive protection in the cutting zone.
-Concepts associated with cutting processes with tools and machines.
3. Equipment and tools required in the disassembly and separation of fixed elements
-Manual and pneumatic brush
-Cortafríos.
-Sierras: circular, arc, vaiven pneumatics and orbital saw.
-Flame retardants.
-Roora.
-Despunter.
-Electrical and manual drill.
-Interchangeable Brocas.
-Specific brocade for welding points.
-Amoladora.
-Disupbar and cutting discs.
-Marches of hitting and finishing.
-Chapist Tases.
-Limas of passing.
4. Methods and techniques in repair processes
-Total or partial replacement method.
-The technique of using the cutting methods.
-The anticorrosive protection method of the element.
-Manufacturer's technical standards.
-Undotted technique in areas of easy and difficult access.
-Panel tabbed desenation method.
-Panel tab defusing technique.
-Method of preparing and adjusting the replacement.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF ALUMINUM ELEMENTS
Code: UF0920
Duration: 30 hours
Competition Referrer: This formative unit corresponds to RP1, RP2, and RP3 as referred to unmount, mount, and join methods.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform the disassembly of fixed aluminum elements correctly, with the different operations established in the work process.
CE1.1 Perform the disassembly of the fixed aluminum elements.
-Properly regulate the useful rivet.
-Unstapling the existing rivets into the junction of the piece to be repaired.
-Make cuts with the various appropriate aluminum equipment.
-Perform the overlap in the required parts of the parts.
-Verify that the cut operations performed conform to the specifications given in the technical rules.
C2: Perform the preparation, repair and attachment of fixed elements of aluminium, using the different equipment.
CE2.1 Perform junction preparation to apply different procedures:
-Perform cleaning of the junction zones by removing existing waste.
-Perform the cleaning of tools with soap for fining.
-Perform overlapping veneers in the required areas.
-Apply the contrachapas in the joints, in the cases considered necessary, according to efforts that have to be supported by the union and/or constructive characteristics of the materials to be joined.
-Perform the drilling on the surface to rivet with a special drill bit for aluminum.
-Apply the adhesive on the entire riveted surface to avoid noise.
-Apply the different types of rivets (blind and solid), using a specific rivet.
CE2.2 Perform the attachment of elements by MIG/MAG welding:
-Perform specific continuous yarn welding for aluminum under protective gas.
-Verify that the soldiers elements return the functional characteristics specified by the manufacturer and/or required needs.
Contents
1. Cutting and cutting operations
-Preparation of the rivet.
-Talked with specific bits.
-Graphic representation: Croquised and bounded.
-Plotting and preparing the cut.
-Court of elements using manual, electrical and pneumatic tools.
-Using soap for cutting tools.
-Anti-corrosive protection in the cutting zone.
-Concepts associated with cutting processes with tools and machines specific to aluminum.
-Undotted rivets in areas that are easy and difficult to access.
-Fresh rivets.
-Debarging of areas with adhesives.
2. Methods of welding and bonding in aluminium elements
-Imprimations and deoxidants used in the welding processes.
-Preparation of specific joints and welding equipment.
-The function, characteristics, and use of the equipment.
-Specific MIG/MAG welding procedures.
-MIG/MAG welding procedures to plug.
-Parts Union by means of specific MIG/MAG welding.
-Method of use of the flame-retardant blanket.
-Cleaning the junction zones.
-Realization of the overlap zone with the tiling of filetar.
-Graphic representation: Croquised and bounded.
-Plotting and preparing the area to join.
-Colocation of the pieces to be joined together with their adjacent elements.
-Specific rivet regulation procedure.
-Realization of joins with rivets.
-Procedure for regulating the bicomponent pistol.
-adhesive bonding technique.
-Realization of joins by adhesives.
-Join technique by cocked.
-Realization of joins by cocked.
-Concepts associated with join processes with tools and machines.
3. Performance against overlapping veneers
-Function, characteristics, and use of the counter-plate.
-Method for performing the different types of counter-sheets.
-Realization of counter-sheets by following the set parameters.
-Technical for the placement of the counter-plates.
-Realization of nerves or brittle.
-Technical for the application of stresses.
-Method for placement with adhesives.
-Colocation with adhesives.
-Method for placing with rivets.
-Colocation with rivets.
-Realization of anti-veneers in areas of easy and difficult access.
-Realization of counter-sheets in areas without direct access.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: STRUCTURAL FIXED ELEMENT (UNION) AND DEUNION METHODS
Code: UF0943
Duration: 90 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP2, and RP3 in terms of the join methods, disjoining the structural fixed elements.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Select the appropriate methods and equipment based on the type of join to be broken.
CE1.1 Analyze the different types of materials that form the structure of a vehicle.
CE1.2 Analyze the separation processes of the different structural fixed elements by selecting the appropriate methods and equipment.
CE1.3 Relating metal element separation procedures with employee union media.
CE1.4 Describe the operation of the different machines and tools used to remove points and welding cords.
CE1.5 Determine the operation of the various machines used in metal sheet cutting operations:
-Identify the edge of the chisel in the separation process.
-Choose the type of arc or vaiven saw required in the separation.
-Choose the manual or pneumatic cutting method required for each repair.
-Identify the operation of the different types of blades for the roora.
C2: Select the most indicated join method by knowing its specific characteristics.
CE2.1 Identify properties and value the use of fixed joins:
-A overlapping and overlapping overlap.
-Stop and stop with highlights.
-Reinforcements with flanges.
-Engatiladas.
-Clinched.
CE2.2 Identify the properties and advantages of adhesive joins.
CE2.3 Rate the efforts that the adhesive join will present:
CE2.4 Classify adhesives according to their composition and characteristics.
CE2.5 Design the general conditions of the adhesive bonding.
CE2.6 Identify the properties of the joints by means of the different welds: Welding Mg-Mag, electric welding by resistance, Blandda welding and oxiacetenic welding.
C3: Perform the preparation of joins on non-structural fixed elements.
CE3.1 Perform junction preparation to apply point welding and MIG/MAG:
-Perform cleaning of the junction zones by removing existing waste.
-Profile the join zones.
-Make the overlap zone with the tiling.
-Apply the masillas or the antioxidants in the junction areas.
-Apply the reinforcements of the joints in the cases considered necessary, according to efforts that have to be supported by the union and/or constructive characteristics of the materials to be joined.
-Position the parts according to the parts given by the manufacturer, checking the alignment of the replaced elements, with the adjacent pieces.
-Verify that replacement of parts saves technical specifications in terms of assembly methods and anti-corrosive protection.
C4: Perform the anticorrosive protection of structural fixed elements
CE4.1 Apply the putty or antioxidant sizing in the junction zones.
CE4.2 Dealing with specific protection products for the areas to be welded.
CE4.3 Apply cavity waxes indoors in hollow areas.
CE4.4 Apply the anti-sonorous insulators in the structural elements.
CE4.5 Apply antigravillates and bass protectors to the structural elements.
CE4.6 Verify that the replacement of parts saves the technical specifications in terms of anti-corrosive protection.
C5: Rejoin non-structural fixed elements.
CE5.1 Perform the attachment of elements by beating and sealing tabs.
CE5.2 Perform the attachment of elements by using the welding types used in fixed join systems:
-Perform the welding of points and continuous yarn resistance under protective gas.
-Perform soft welding.
CE5.3 Check that the obtained welds meet the specifications of a standard solder (resistance, melting edges ..).
-Verify that the soldiers elements return the functional characteristics specified by the manufacturer and/or required needs.
C6: Perform the deburring of the bonded zone by welding.
CE6.1 Perform the scuppering of the united zone using the necessary tools.
-Perform the deburring with electric grinder with diss and low abrasion discs.
CE6.2 Verify the placement of the fire-retardant blanket to avoid projections in adjacent areas.
-Check that the fallow areas keep the technical specifications as to the thickness of the sheets.
CE6.3 Apply the necessary anti-corrosive protections on the two sides of the attached sheets.
-Check that the unbarked areas comply with the necessary anti-corrosive protections.
C7: Conditioning the work zone to ensure security and quality in the process.
CE7.1 Keep the work area clean and clear in the process of preparing and protecting fixed joints.
CE7.2 Maintain optimal environmental conditions in the application of protection products.
CE7.3 Prepare a secure work zone for the welding processes.
CE7.4 Proceed in the processes complying with the safety standards dictated by the manufacturer.
Contents
1. Metal materials most used in vehicles
-Composition and properties of ferric alloys.
-Use of high elastic limit steels.
-Design of a self-supporting body in steel and aluminium.
-Design of deformable zones on impact.
-Composition and properties of light alloys (Al).
-Variation of properties by thermal treatments:
▫ Characteristics of metal materials.
▫ The behavior of the material to the hit.
▫ Material behavior when heating it.
▫ Simbology of vehicle manufacturers.
2. Equipment and tools necessary for mounting and joining fixed and structural elements
-Tases.
-Finish Marches.
-Welding equipment:
▫ MIG/MAG.
▫ Soft Welding.
▫ Soldering by resistance points.
-Mordaces.
-Despunter.
-Filetear Alicates.
-Amoladora.
-Disk of:
▫ Court.
▫ Disbarbar.
▫ Braided Steel.
▫ Low abrasion.
-Drill.
-Spatulas.
-orbital lijadora.
-Cortafríos.
-Brush.
-Manta flame retardant.
-Self-blocating mugs.
-pneumatic piston for sealant and wax of cavities.
3. Welding methods
-Imprimations and deoxidants used in the welding processes.
-Preparation of joints and welding equipment.
-Input materials used with the various welding methods.
-Welding procedures.
-Power by resistance points.
-MIG/MAG.
-Soft tin/lead solder.
-The function, characteristics, and use of the equipment.
4. Methods and techniques in the join processes
-Join method in a total or partial replacement.
-Overlap technique in cutting zones.
-Soft solder utilization technique.
-Panel tabbed concealment method.
-Presentation technique of parts with adjacent elements.
-Conditioning technique and preparation of the tabs to be welded.
5. Methods and techniques in the scuppering processes
-Method of deburring with electric grinder.
-Method of deburring in areas with antigravillas and sealants.
-Disk utilization techniques, braided steel and low abrasion.
-Method of placement of the flame retardant in adjacent areas.
-Method of checking the thickness of the plate on the basis of the dice by the manufacturer.
-A technique for applying cavity waxes in the inner faces of the junction.
6. Technical valuations in bonding by adhesive
-Union resistance rating:
▫ Traction and compression.
▫ Mearing and shear.
▫ jar.
▫ Appealed.
-Types of adhesives according to their composition and characteristics
-Design the form of the adhesive join:
▫ Solape
▫ Plate
7. Technical valuations in the union by welding
-Valuation of union resistors.
-Assessment of the warming received and consequences.
-Conformation with heat application.
-Types of join preparations in structural elements.
▫ Solape.
-Advantages and drawbacks of different join methods:
▫ Power by points.
▫ Mig/Mag:
-Oxiacetylenic.
-Tig.
-Soft welding.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Unit training 1-UF0918 | 60 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF0920 | 30 | 10 |
|
| 90 | 20 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 2 must have been passed the formative unit 1.
To access the formative unit 3 must have been passed the formative unit 2.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Naming: STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS OF THE VEHICLE
Code: MF0125_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0125_2 Repair the structure of the vehicle
Duration: 200 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: VERIFICATION OF DEFORMED STRUCTURES
Code: UF0944
Duration: 40 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the possible deformations and damage that the structure of a vehicle can suffer when subjected to different types of loads.
CE1.1 Compose and decompose forces systems.
CE1.2 Point out the deformation that the structure of a vehicle can suffer according to points of deformation given by the manufacturer and according to sources of information outside the manufacturer (crash-tests).
CE1.3 Different types of bodies and racks used by manufacturers.
CE1.4 Identify damage diagnosis methods and equipment, relating to the deformations to be controlled.
CE1.5 Determine the parameters to be checked in the vehicle structure, interpreting the corresponding technical documentation.
C2: Make measurements on models or vehicles with some structural deformation.
CE2.1 Perform measurements of the parameters determined with varas and structural meters.
-Select the measurement tools used on the floor of the structure.
-Perform measurements on the floor of the structure with varas compas, level gages, and structural meters.
-Select the measurement tools used in the door housing, engine compartment, trunk and moons compartment.
-Perform measures on the structure with structural meters.
CE2.2 Relate the data obtained in the measurement process with those provided by the technical documentation.
CE2.3 Diagnose damage to the deformed structure.
CE2.4 Diagnose the viability of the repair.
Contents
1. Concepts associated with structure verification
-Forces systems: composition and decomposition.
-Resulting and resulting moments.
-Graphic representation: symbology and normalization.
-Measurement techniques.
-Interpretation of the structural information given by the manufacturer.
-Body types and racks.
-Function and features of the crash-test.
-Types of damage.
2. Equipment and tools needed in the verification
-Elevator.
-Level Gages.
-Universal Meter.
-Varas compas.
-The role and characteristics of the aligner.
-Structure lifting systems.
-Useful for the movement of deformed structures.
3. Methods and techniques in verification processes
-Verification techniques for structural elements in floors.
-Method of structural verification in door housing.
-A method of verifying the habitacles of moons.
-Control techniques for structural deformations.
-Capo and trunk housing control method.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Denomination: POSITIONED AND CONTROL OF THE STRUCTURE IN BANADA
Code: UF0945
Duration: 90 hours
Competition reference: This formative unit corresponds to the RP2
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the elements that make up the different types of seats, relating them to the function they perform.
CE1.1 Analyze the elements that make up the positive control benches.
CE1.2 Describe existing universal bank types.
-Select the benches with mechanical measurement systems.
-Describe the tools used in the calibers benches.
-Analyze the operation of the benches by level gages.
-Identify the different parts of the bench with optical system.
-Analyze the operation of the benches with electronic systems.
CE1.3 Identify the necessary tools to hold the vehicle in the bench.
-Select the necessary tools depending on the vehicle manufacturer.
-Describe the fastening tools.
-Analyze the operation of the different types of useful.
CE1.4 Interpret the manufacturer's symbology in the technical documentation.
C2: Position the vehicle, frame or cab in bench determining the points or anchorage zones according to the manufacturer.
CE2.1 Place the vehicle, frame, or cab in positive control benches.
-Select the type of lift, to place the vehicle.
-Describe the tools used for anchoring, depending on the vehicle, frame or cabin.
-Select the type of clamping jaws depending on the vehicle, frame, or cab.
CE2.2 Place the vehicle, rack or cabin into universal benches.
-Select the type of lift, to place the vehicle, frame, or cab.
-Describe the tools used for anchoring, depending on the manufacturer's measurement sheets.
-Select the type of clamping jaws depending on the vehicle, frame, or cab.
CE2.3 Place the vehicle, rack or cab in seats with built-in lift.
-Identify the types of taps that exist on the bench and their use.
-Select the tap on the lift platform.
-Describe the types of useful necessary to upload the vehicle to the platform.
-Select the hydraulic jack needed to place the jaws.
C3: Control the status of the vehicle, rack, or cab by checking the control points that the manufacturer marks.
CE3.1 Perform checks on positive and universal control benches.
-Select the vehicle, frame, or cab measurement tab.
-Place the manufacturer's supplies in accordance with the technical specifications.
-Control the vehicle, frame, or cab parts by the dimensions that mark the bench and the measurement tab.
CE3.2 Perform checks on benches with built-in lift or pantographic pointer in elevator.
-Select the vehicle, frame, or cab measurement tab.
-Place the measurement system in undamaged areas of the structure, following the measurement tab.
-Check the level of the structure to be placed in the measurement system.
-Control the vehicle, frame, or cab parts by following the measurement tab.
CE3.3 Perform checks on vehicles with mounted and disassembled mechanics.
CE3.4 Perform checks on turrets and suspension anchors.
C4: Determine and position the necessary shots and setbacks in the repair of structural deformation.
CE4.1 Determine the correct directions for shots and setbacks.
-Determine whether the deformation is at the front, center, or rear.
-Determine whether deformation affects structural elements.
-Analyze the deformation in the structure to determine the shots and setbacks.
-Determine the composition of forces and moments, to select the direction and the force to perform.
CE4.2 Position the necessary shots and setbacks in the repair.
-Select the tools and tools needed in the positioning.
-Position the shot, depending on the warped zone and its magnitude.
-Position the setback, depending on the range.
-Place the necessary security systems in the shot and backfire.
Contents
1. Concepts associated with vehicle, frame or cab anchorage
-Placement method on:
▫ Positive and Universal Control Banking.
▫ powered by platform.
-Existing jaw types depending on the vehicle manufacturer, rack or cab.
-Placement of the jaws depending on the deformation.
-Technique for the interpretation of the manufacturer's symbology.
2. Techniques used in the control of structures
-Placement in Bans of:
▫ Specific head games on the positive control benches.
▫ Traviese and function of the slidable carts on universal benches.
▫ Horizontal and parallel bars on level gage control benches.
▫ The optical measurement system used in laser-beam benches.
▫ Aluminium cards and ultrasound sensors on benches with electronic measuring systems.
▫ The pantograph pointer on benches with built-in lift.
3. Techniques used in the control of suspension turrets
-Use of the specific tools for the control of the turrets.
-Placement of:
▫ Specific uses in positive and universal control benches.
▫ Pantographic pointer in the suspension turrets in seats with built-in lift.
▫ Torretas measuring sets, in benches with optical measurement system.
4. Technical documentation of vehicle structures
-The manufacturer's symbology.
-Vehicle manufacturer's symbology.
-Control sheets.
-Control sheets of the suspension turrets.
-Manual of use of:
▫ Banada with built-in lift.
▫ Tower of shooting.
▫ Type "L".
5. Tools and tools used in the positioning and control of structures
-Special anchor gag.
-Universal anchor gag.
-Pantographic pointer.
-Use the banner for positive control.
▫ Universal.
▫ By level gages.
▫ By optical measurement system.
▫ By Electronic Measurement System.
-Cadenas approved by the manufacturer.
-Stretched mugs.
-Pinza for traction.
-Self-muzzling scissor pinza.
-Crescent.
-Manual traction accessory for Mcpherson turrets.
-Universal traction ganchos.
-Rubber heads.
-Tirants to avoid misruns.
-Forward Polea.
-Security slings.
-Cabral.
-Flat-base Codo.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Denomination: REPAIR ON BATHED
Code: UF0946
Duration: 70 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP3
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Repair, with the equipment and tools of stretch, deformations in front.
CE1.1 Repair structural deformations in front.
-Select the proper cleaning method to prevent dirt from hiding the existence of damage.
-Unmount vehicle elements that do not affect the general conformation.
-Verify that the jaws are tied to the tabs of the stirrups.
-Apply pulls on the affected party to release trapped items.
-Control the parts of the affected party.
-Select the direction of shooting and backfire.
-Select the type of gag required in the stretch.
-Place the safety sling between the jaw and the vehicle.
-Apply the shot progressively and follow the evolution of the conformation at all times.
-Verify if it may be necessary to vary the direction of shooting by controlling the bounds.
C2: Repair, with the equipment and tools of stretching, deformations in central part.
CE2.1 Repair of structural deformations in central part.
-Unmount vehicle elements that do not affect the general conformation.
CE2.2 Verify the vehicle's cotas, because it can suffer torsion in its structure.
-Verify if the deformations affect the stirrup and the central pillar.
-Verify if deformations affect the floor and ceiling.
-Verify that the jaws are tied to the vehicle but not to the bench.
CE2.3 Place the setback on the back and front.
-Place the hydraulic jack between the two jaws on the affected side.
-Place the shot with a flat base elbow.
-Place the security sling.
-Make shots on the stirrup and floor.
-Verify the cotes and neglect in adjacent elements.
-Make shots in the stirrup to get the symmetry of it.
-Place the doors on the affected side to control symmetry.
C3: Repair, with equipment and drawing tools, deformations in the rear.
CE3.1 Repair structural deformations in rear.
-Unmount vehicle elements that do not affect the general conformation.
-Verify the cotes and neglect in adjacent elements.
-Verify that the jaws are tied to the vehicle.
CE3.2 Place the setback on the reverse side to the deformation.
-Place the shot on the side of the deformation.
-Place the required jaw for the application of the shot.
-Place the security sling.
CE3.3 Apply a shot on the deformed part.
-Apply a break with the hydraulic jack in the trunk hole.
-Check that the adjacent elements fit into your position.
-Apply shots on the rear stringer to remove tensions.
-Place the hydraulic jack at the bottom of the floor to make a combined shot.
-Verify the vehicle's bounds.
Contents
1. Concepts of methods and techniques in bench repair
-Method of repairing in part deformations in part:
▫ Front.
▫ Central.
▫ Trasera.
-Shooting and Setback Placement Technique in part:
▫ Front.
▫ Central.
▫ Trasera.
2. Techniques used in the making of shots
-Placement of:
▫ Eslinga on fire safety and hitches.
▫ Tirants to avoid door gaps.
▫ Mordaces, in shots in central part.
▫ Hydraulic Cat in shots in central part.
▫ Hydraulics Cat in rear.
▫ Hydraulic Cat to perform combined shooting.
▫ Procedures to be followed with doors and moons.
▫ Regulation of heights in towers and squads.
3. Tools and tools used in bench repair
-Shooting tower.
-"L" type shooting.
-Hydraulic Cat.
-Banking with integrated towers.
-Hydraulic pressure systems.
-Cadenas approved by the manufacturer.
-Stretched mugs.
-Pinza for traction.
-Self-muzzling scissor pinza.
-Crescent.
-Manual traction accessory for Mcpherson turrets.
-Universal traction ganchos.
-Tirants to avoid misruns.
-Forward Polea.
-Security slings.
4. Control techniques of the structure subjected to stretching
-Point-to-control location procedures.
-Verifying:
▫ Cots in adjacent zones.
▫ Drops with mounted and unmounted mechanics.
▫ Drops into structural elements.
-Measurement of habitacles.
-Cots check using removable elements.
-Colocation placement with measuring tools.
-Control in asymmetric vehicles.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF0944 | 40 | 10 |
|
Unit 2-UF0945 | 90 | 30 |
| 20 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 2 must have been passed the formative unit 1.
To access the formative unit 3 must have been passed the formative unit 2.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 3
Naming: FORMING METAL ELEMENTS
Code: MF0126_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0126_2 Performing metal elements and importance reforms
Duration: 140 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: REPAIRING METAL ELEMENTS
Code: UF0914
Duration: 80 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to RP1.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the mechanical properties of metal materials, by interpreting test results that determine their characteristics.
CE1.1 Analyze the types of steel, smelters and light alloys, most used in the manufacture of vehicles, relating to their characteristics.
CE1.2 Describe the properties of metal materials when subjected to different heat treatments.
CE1.3 Describe the trials of metal materials to determine their characteristics.
C2: Analyze the repair process and the types of deformations, in order to select the repair method, to recover the original form and function.
CE2.1 Classify the diagnostic techniques used in the repair of metallic elements (visual, touch, sanding ..).
CE2.2 Run the various operations that comprise the repair process, taking into account the relationship that exists between them.
CE2.3 Analyze deformation types based on damage to repair:
-Identify the necessary elements to be repaired.
-Classify damage based on its extent and extent. (mild, medium or strong).
-Classify damage based on location (easy, difficult, or without access).
-Determine the materials and parameters to use based on the selected method.
-Diagnose the viability of the repair based on damage.
C3: Identify tools that are involved in metal element repair.
CE3.1 Identify and describe the characteristics of the tools for the repair of steel sheet and its use:
-Select the tools for steel sheet shaping.
-Describe the tools used in the sheet metal collection.
-Analyze the operation of MIG/MAG equipment.
-Identify the different parts of the inertia hammer.
-Select the passive manual tools in the conformation.
CE3.2 Identify and describe the characteristics of the equipment and useful for the repair of steel sheet and its use:
-Select the traction equipment used in the repair.
-Describe equipment for the application of thermal treatments.
-Analyze the rules for the use and conservation of work equipment.
-Describe the different work tools used in the repairs.
C4: Conform metal elements to return the original shapes and bounds.
CE4.1 Conforming metal elements, recovering the original shapes and bounds:
-Run hammer and suffer dent repairs.
-Run repairs in areas that are easy to access, difficult to access, and without access.
-Conform dents with hot and cold inertia hammer.
-Repair deformations by means of carbon electrode and copper electrode elements.
-Verify that the element has recovered the original shapes and bounds.
Contents
1. Metal materials most used in vehicles
-Composition and properties of ferric alloys.
-Design of a self-supporting body in steel and aluminium.
-Composition and properties of light alloys (Al)
-Variation of properties by thermal treatments.
-Test techniques for the determination of properties.
-Characteristics of metal materials.
-Behavior of the material to the hit.
-Material behavior when heating it.
-Simbology of vehicle manufacturers.
2. Techniques used in the diagnosis of metal element repair
-Landed.
▫ Use of the body lime.
▫ Rubber Taco.
-Visual.
▫ Detection in light and dark colors.
▫ Use of sheet metal reflexes.
▫ Technical to locate water in sheet metal zones.
▫ Technical to locate cracks in putty and sealants.
▫ Technical to locate misalignments in sheet metal zones.
▫ wrinkle detection.
-To the touch.
-Peines.
-Manufacturer's manual.
3. Equipment and tools needed in the repair of metal elements
-Finish Marches.
-Marches of hitting.
-Cingels.
-Mashes.
-Tases.
-Limas of passing.
-Body Lima.
-Inertia Hammer.
-Copper electrode.
-Carbon electrode.
-Palancas de deabollar.
-Tracks.
-MIG/MAG welding equipment.
4. Damage classification based on grade, extent, and location
-Technical to determine repairs or replacements on sheet metal parts.
-Damage Classification:
-Grade: mild, medium and strong
-Extension: substitution
-Location: easy access, difficult access, and no access
-Vehicle venal value
-Task Guides.
-Rating software.
-Direct and indirect damage.
5. Deabolishment techniques
-Suffered.
-Hit.
-Removing tensions.
-Thermal repair technique.
-Unabolished of:
▫ Nerves or brittle.
▫ Zones with mouldings for mouldings.
▫ Easy-to-access zones.
▫ Hard-to-access or access-free zones.
-Stretched technique.
-Carbon electrode plate collection technique.
-Picking of sheet with copper electrode.
-Tensing and repair of large dents.
-Wide dent repair technique without stretching.
-Wide dent repair technique with stretch.
-Cold-picked technique.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: IMPORTANCE TRANSFORMATIONS IN BODIES
Code: UF0947
Duration: 30hours
Competition reference: This formative unit corresponds to the RP2
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Select and interpret the technical documentation, drawings and drawings that affect the transformation.
CE1.1 Select and interpret the technical documentation.
-Get the vehicle documentation to apply the transformation.
-Select the part or parts to transform.
-Get the technical documentation of the part or zone to be transformed.
-Interpret sketches and drawings of the part or zone to be transformed.
-Verify that the transformation meets the technical specifications.
C2: Positioning parts or zones to be transformed into the body, following technical specifications.
CE2.1 Position the part or zone to be transformed according to the technical specifications.
-Apply placement marks on the part or zone to be transformed.
-Perform drilling in the required areas.
-Check that the process meets the technical specifications.
CE2.2 Apply anti-corrosive products according to technical specifications.
-Prepare the surface on which the transformation is performed.
-Apply anti-corrosive products in the drilled zone.
-Apply beautification products if needed.
C3: Perform importance transformations on the body, following technical specifications.
CE3.1 Place the part or zone to be transformed according to the technical specifications.
-Place the part or area to be transformed into the vehicle.
-Place the join elements of the part or zone to the vehicle.
CE3.2 Check that the part or zone follows the level of the adjacent elements.
-Check that the part or zone does not interfere with the movement of the adjacent elements.
CE3.3 Perform the attachment between the part or zone to the vehicle.
-Check that the process meets the technical specifications.
Contents
1. Selection and interpretation of technical documentation
-Documentation the vehicle.
-Procedure to follow in:
▫ Type-approval case.
▫ A sketch of the sketch.
-Verification:
▫ By official bodies.
▫ Of the type-approval of the part to be transformed.
-Interpretation of technical plans and technical symbology.
2. Methods and techniques in placement processes
-Method of:
▫ Placement and positioning in the vehicle.
▫ Placement of the join elements.
▫ Union of the items with the vehicle.
-A check technique for adjacent elements.
3. Necessary equipment and tools in the importance transformations
-Measure Utiles.
-Drill.
-Small diameter Brocas.
-orbital lijadora.
-Anti-corrosive imprimations.
4. Techniques for checking the technical specifications made
-Check operations:
▫ The result of the transformation with the technical blueprints.
▫ The strength of the transformed part or zone.
▫ Water-tightness of the piece or transformed zone.
-Verification operations of:
▫ The subject of the transformed part or zone.
▫ Suspensions at rest and at full load.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Denomination: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP3
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
• Work accident.
• Professional illness.
• Other pathologies derived from work.
• Economic and operational implications.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
• The law on the prevention of occupational risks.
• The regulation of prevention services.
• Scope and legal bases.
• Directives on safety and health at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
• National bodies.
• Autonomous bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
• In the management of tools and equipment.
• In the handling of systems and installations.
• In the storage and transport of loads.
• Exposure to physical, chemical or biological agents.
• The fire.
• Physical fatigue.
• Mental fatigue.
• Job dissatisfaction.
• Collective protection.
• Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF0914 | 80 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF0947 |
20 | 20 |
|
| 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
The training unit 3 can be programmed independently.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
NON-WORKING PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE MODULE FOR THE MAINTENANCE OF VEHICLE BODY STRUCTURES
Code: MP0196
Duration: 40 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the mechanical properties of the materials and identify the most appropriate welding techniques.
CE1.1 Participate in the interpretation of test results that determine the technical characteristics of the materials.
CE1.2 Cooperating in the separation processes of the various fixed elements
CE1.3 Handle welding equipment used in the repair of vehicles with equipment and tools necessary for mounting fixed elements.
C2: Collaborate on repairs of deformations in front, center, and rear.
CE2.1 Placing the stretch media appropriately:
-The setback.
-The hydraulic jack for combined shots.
-The shot.
-The shot with a flat base elbow.
-The gag required for the application of the shot.
-The security sling.
CE2.2 Repair structural deformations in front, center, and rear.
-Apply pulls on the affected party to release trapped items.
-Apply the shot progressively and follow the evolution of the conformation at all times.
CE2.3 Verify cotes and neglect on adjacent elements.
-Control the parts of the affected party.
-Check that the adjacent elements fit into your position.
C3: Identify the process of transformation of parts or areas of the body.
CE3.1 Position the part or zone to be transformed by following the technical specifications.
-Apply placement marks on the part or zone to be transformed.
-Perform drilling in the required areas.
-Check that the part or zone does not interfere with the movement of the adjacent elements.
-Check that the process meets the technical specifications.
CE3.2 Perform importance transformations on the body, following technical specifications.
-Place the join elements of the part or zone to the vehicle.
-Make the join between the part or zone to the vehicle.
-Check that the process meets the technical specifications.
C4: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE4.1 Behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE4.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE4.3 Undertake with diligence the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE4.4 Integrate into the production processes of the workplace.
CE4.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE4.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Analysis of the properties of the materials and the use of welding equipment for the separation and attachment of fixed elements.
-Testing and interpretation of results to determine the characteristics of the materials.
-Interpretation of the variation of the properties of materials, subjected to thermal treatments
-Selecting and using welding equipment
-Verifying a proper welding process
2. Placement of tools used in shooting.
-Placement of the safety sling in shots and setbacks.
-Location of braces to avoid door gaps.
-Localization of the jaws in central shots.
-Placing of the hydraulic jack in central part, in the rear in the rear and for the combined shooting.
-Procedures to be followed with doors and moons
-Regulation of heights in towers and squares.
3. Positioning, checking and verification of parts in the transformation processes.
-Verification of the positioning and adjustment of the zone or part transformed with the adjacent zones.
-Check the result of the transformation with the technical plans, the resistance of the piece or the transformed zone and the watertightness of the piece or transformed zone.
-Verification of the attachment of the transformed part or zone and of the part or zone transformed with the suspensions in a state of rest and full load.
4. Integration and communication in the workplace.
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Follow up on the rules on risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS FOR TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0124_2: Elements fixed | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Professional level 3 certificates from the professional vehicle body area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0125_2: Vehicle structural elements | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Professional level 3 certificates from the professional vehicle body area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0126_2: Conformed metal elements | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Professional level 3 certificates from the professional vehicle body area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SPACES, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 | 45 | 60 | |
|
Workshop | 210 | 350 | |
|
220 |
| M1 | M2 | M3 | |
|---|---|---|---|
|
Classroom | X | X | X |
|
Workshop | X |
| X |
|
Workshop | X | X |
|
| Equipment | |
|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audiovisual Equipment. -network installed PCs, projection cannon, and internet. -Specialty specific software. -Pizarras to write with a marker. -Classroom material. -Table and chair for trainer. -Messes and chairs for students. |
|
Body Workshop | -Cavalry -MIG/MAG welding equipment. -Soft welding equipment. -Unabolished machine from the outside. -Point welding equipment. -Tape (manual and pneumatic). -Vaiven pneumatic Sierra. -Roora. -Despunter. -Auto-blocant mugs. -Mashes. -Tases. -Inertia hammer. -Abolish levers. -Tracks. -Aluminium finish martils. -Aluminium Remachter. -Specific Brocas. -Tases for aluminum. -Specific inertia martils. -Specific levers. -MIG/MAG welding equipment for aluminium. -Imprimation for aluminum. -Jabon for fining. |
|
Workshop | -Elevator. -Level Gages. -Universal Meter. -Varas compas. -Special anchor gag. -Universal anchor Mordaza. -Pantographic pointer. -Use the banner for positive control. -Use the universal banner. -Use the level of the level gages. -Use the optical system to measure the optical system. -Use the electronic metering system. -Manufacturer-approved chains. -Stretched mugs. ▫ Pinza for traction. ▫ Self-muzzling scissor paint. ▫ Media moon. -Manual traction accessory for Mcpherson turrets. -Universal traction ganchos. -Rubber heads. -Tirants to avoid misruns. -Forward Polea. -Security slings. -Cabral. -Flat-base Codo. -Shooting tower. -"L" type shooting. -Hydraulic Cat. -Banking with integrated towers. -Positive control basket. -Universal Banque. -Hydraulic pressure systems. -Manufacturer-approved chains. |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units to be provided with the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces will be sufficient for a minimum of fifteen students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to a higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX VIII
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Denomination: BEAUTIFICATION AND DECORATION OF VEHICLE SURFACES
Code: TMVL0409
Professional Family: Transportation and Maintenance of Vehicles
Professional area: Vehicle bodywork
Professional qualification level: 2
Professional reference qualification:
TMV196_2 Vehicle surface decoration and decoration (RD 1228/2006 of 27 October)
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0123_2: Perform the beautification of surfaces.
UC0625_2: Perform the customization and decoration of surfaces.
General competition:
Beautify, customize and decorate surfaces in vehicles, applying the techniques and procedures required in each case, achieving the required quality in safety conditions and complying with the customer's specifications.
Professional Environment:
Professional scope:
It carries out its professional activity, both for hire and self-employed, in medium and small businesses for the maintenance and decoration of vehicles, and for decoration and customization of surfaces.
Productive Sectors:
It is located in the industrial sector, automotive subsector and, in particular, in the following economic-productive activities: Sale, maintenance and repair of motor vehicles, motorcycles and mopeds; Manufacture of other transport equipment: subactivity construction and repair of ships; Other productive activities where work of beautification, customization and decoration of surfaces are carried out by means of aerographic techniques.
Occupations or related jobs:
Vehicle Rotulist.
Decorator of automobile surfaces, machinery of public and agricultural works, heavy vehicles, motorcycles and railway equipment.
Rotulist of boats.
Duration of the associated training: 540 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0123_2: (Transverse) Surface Beautification (230 hours).
• UF0948: Vehicle painting (90 hours).
• UF0949: Pinted from vehicles by blurring (90 hours).
• UF0950: Reconditioning and Predelivery Techniques (50 hours).
MF0625_2: Customizing and decorating surfaces (270 hours).
• UF0951: Franks, rolled and aircrafts (90 hours).
• UF0952: Customization techniques and tuning (90 hours).
• UF0953: Application of adhesives (60 hours).
• UF0917: (Transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MP0197: Module of professional non-working practices in Beautification and decoration of vehicle surfaces (40 hours).
Linking with professional trainings
The training established in the training unit UF0917 of the training module MF0625_2 of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Denomination: PERFORM SURFACE BEAUTIFICATION
Level: 2
Code: UC0123_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform preparation operations for the painting, executing the application of enamels, according to the systems that must be used to achieve the required quality and safety conditions.
CR1 .1. The area to be painted is checked to be dry, clean, and protected (masking control, absence of dust and small defects).
CR1.2 In the application of paint processes (monolayer, bilayer and other finishing effects), the parameters of: application pressure, viscosity, nozzle diameter are taken into account.
CR1.3 To determine the paint drying time, the evaporative time, drying, and temperature parameters of the oven are properly conjugated.
CR1.4 The application of the paint is performed by maintaining the application times between layers, the overlay of the fan, homogeneity of the load and distance from the gun to the surface.
CR1.5 Franking techniques are performed at the request of the customer, according to the product and process specifications.
CR1.6 The color equalization of the painted zone with respect to the adjacent zones is achieved by adapting the parameters of vivacity, tonality and clarity.
CR1.7 Process operations are executed in compliance with safety and health and environmental impact standards.
CR1.8 Basic maintenance operations for work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case
RP2: Perform colorimetry by attending color matching and composition techniques.
CR2.1 The paint mixture is performed according to the proportions established by the manufacturer.
CR2.2 The matching of the obtained color is achieved by applying the test pieces and the comparison in chromatic camera.
RP3: Identify and correct the damage and defects that paint can present by following the techniques of the processes according to the defect presented.
CR3.1 The localized damage and defects are analyzed, and it is determined whether they can be corrected by polishing and brightening, or you have to proceed to perform a more thorough operation or a repainting of the zone.
CR3.2 The work process to be followed is set to achieve the removal of the damage or defect and the different operations are sequenced.
CR3.3 the damage or defect is eliminated by operating out of the tools and products, and the required final quality is achieved.
Professional Context
Production media
abrasive, rotary, vibratory and roto-orbital livers. Aspiration plants. Painted cabin/oven, mixers, electronic scales, machine for washing guns, aircrafts. Aspirational planes. Degreasing and cleaning products. Infrared-drying equipment. Color cards, color cards applied to the gun, color indexes, viscosimeters, test pieces, color graphics, spectrophotometers. Thickness meter, magnifying glass, cloths and bayets, pocket lantern, ultrafine lijas and water pulverized. Polishing and brightening, renovators, specific products, sanding tacos, lijas and microabrasives, polishing machines, masquerading products. Assemblies or elements of metal materials (capes, fins, doors, bodies). Sets or elements of synthetic materials (parolagus, front flaps, gates).
Products and results
Metallic and synthetic surfaces, sanded, clean, degreased and matched in cases that are necessary, prepared for their later painted. Preparation, dosage and handling of paint products and varnishes to be applied. Get a quality paint finish, with good color-free color matching.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Technical manuals for the products. Color cards. Work orders of the workshop head or section manager. Microfiche. Information on paper and on computer support.
Competition Unit 2
Denomination: PERFORM SURFACE CUSTOMIZATION AND DECORATION
Code: UC0625_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform drawing, drawing, and cutting operations of templates and masks, applying the appropriate methods and techniques to each case, respecting client requests and in security conditions.
CR1.1 The image assembly is obtained and/or made from photographs, advertising posters, computer media or any other means provided by the client.
CR1.2 The choice of the material of the mask or template, is carried out taking into account the drawing or layout to be carried out and according to the surface to be painted and/or to decorate.
CR1.3 The drawing or drawing of images on the template or mask is done using the appropriate technique (manual or by means of computer media).
CR1.4 In the layout, the scales to be applied and the size of the surface to be painted or decorated are respected, according to the reference image and the wishes of the client.
CR1.5 The cutting of the mask is done with the appropriate techniques (manual and cutting plotter).
CR1.6 The area to be labeled and/or decorated is checked to be dry, clean and without apparent defects.
CR1.7 The templates or masks are located on the surface, taking into account the dimensional shapes of the assembly and the number of layers to the plasmar.
RP2: Make patrolled and franked following the techniques of the process and meet the customer's specifications.
CR2.1 The surface anchorage (in the cases required) is performed taking into account the products to be applied, the contrast of the tones to be obtained and the type of support.
CR2.2 The profiling of the object on the surface (in the necessary cases) is performed with respect to the specific scales and requests of the client.
CR2.3 The mixture of paints, dyes, among others, is done with the necessary proportions to obtain the different tones.
CR2.4 The aerographic application is made with the appropriate means for each part of the process (1/4, airbrush, brushes, among others).
CR2.5 The aerographic application is carried out by taking into account the pressure, flow, distance to the support, application extension and thickness of the layer to be deposited.
CR2.6 The realization of the tag out and/or franking is carried out by applying the appropriate techniques to each case (drawing on film, textures, creation of the horizon line, touches of light, among others).
CR2.7 The application is made in a way that does not cause spraying or mixing of colors in the protected areas and in which it should not be sprayed.
CR2.8 The tag out and/or franking performed meets the client's requests and the necessary technical specifications.
RP3: Perform the plasmation of images with volume and gradients respecting the rules of illumination, following the techniques of the processes and complying with the specifications of the client.
CR3.1 The preparation of the surface and the anchorage of the surface (in the necessary cases) is carried out taking into account the products to be applied, the contrast of the tones to be obtained and the type of support.
CR3.2 The planning of the aerograph project is performed taking into account the different phases of the process and the requests of the client.
CR3.3 Image acquisition, use or acquisition is done with the appropriate media and conforms to client requests
CR3.4 The masking media used in the different parts of the process (masking film, templates, masks, among others), as well as the realization and location, conform to technical specifications and the ways and ways of the good professional.
CR3.5 The different colors are obtained by applying the colorimetry rules and rules, correcting the tonality, purity and pitch height until the desired color is achieved.
CR3.6 The objects are translated onto the media by applying the different techniques involved in the different phases of the process.
CR3.7 The plasmation of the images on the media meets the client's requests and the technical specifications of the processes performed.
RP4: Run all repair operations in accordance with safety and health rules.
CR4.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR4.2 Personal and collective safety standards are respected while keeping the work area free of risks.
CR4.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Aspiration stations. Painted cabin/oven, mixers, machine for washing guns, aircrafts. Degreasing and cleaning products. Infrared-drying equipment. Color cards, color indexes, viscosimeters, test pieces, color graphics. Cloths and bayets, ultrafine lijas and water pulverized. Polishing and brightening, renovators, specific products, sanding tacos, lijas and microabrasives, polishing machines, masquerading products. Aerographs, brushes, roaders, blurs, pens, calcar papers, drawing compas, cutting compas, sets of rules, squads, cartabons, French curves, circle templates, rhomes, among others, computers, printing and cutting machines, masks, software. Assemblies or elements of metal materials (capes, fins, doors, bodies, etc.). Advertising posters. Sets or elements of synthetic materials (fins, gates, motor helmets, among others).
Products and results
Metal and synthetic surfaces clean and degreased in cases that are necessary, prepared for later decoration. Preparation, dosage and handling of paint products and varnishes to be applied.
Obtaining decorated, franked and/or labeled surfaces.
Information used or generated
Management manuals for the different teams. Technical manuals for the products. Color cards.
Work orders from the workshop manager or section manager. Microfiche. Information on paper and on computer support. Photographs, poster, images obtained through the use of computer programs, cameras, scanners, among others.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: BEAUTIFICATION OF SURFACES
Code: MF0123_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0123_2 Perform surface beautification
Duration: 230 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: PAINTED VEHICLES
Code: UF0948
Duration: 90hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1 as regards the application of the paint process, the drying times and the basic maintenance of equipment and tools, and in the RP2, as regards the mixture and proportions stipulated by the manufacturer of the product.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the different surface beautification processes, determining the methods to be used for the application of bases and varnishes.
CE1.1 Identify the various surface beautification processes relating to the different base types and coating materials.
CE1.2 Perform pre-painted preparatory work on parts or vehicles:
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Select the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Identify the different types of media coating on which you are going to paint.
-Identify the type of vehicle paint (monolayer, bilayer ... and other finishing effects), to select the necessary technical documentation.
C2: Get the right mix of paint, catalyst, diluent ... according to specifications given by the paint manufacturers.
CE2.1 Identify the properties of different types of varnish (paints and lacquers).
CE2.2 Differ the distribution of colors in a chromatic circle and use it.
CE2.3 Identify the methods of obtaining colors by means of mixtures from basic colors.
CE2.4 Perform vehicle color reading and make painting:
-Identify the color code according to the manufacturer's technical documentation.
-Interpret the technical documentation provided by the paint manufacturers by identifying the characteristics of the products.
-Select the different products required to perform the mixture.
-Make the product mix according to the rules of proportions and viscosity, handling the electronic and mixing scales.
-Perform color adjustment tests, performing the necessary tests in the chromatic chamber.
C3: Apply masking methods of surfaces, determining the equipment and materials that are necessary for the protection of areas that are not to be sprayed, selecting the most appropriate method based on criteria of quality, efficiency, speed in the installation and drying system.
CE3.1 Identify affected areas and items and need to be masked.
CE3.2 Identify and interpret the technical documentation, depending on the type of support and the equipment to be used.
CE3.3 Differ the different methods of masking of surfaces the necessary materials and tools.
CE3.4 Perform the masked in full vehicle painting.
CE3.5 Perform the masked in partial vehicle painting.
CE3.6 Perform the masked on vehicle customization jobs: franking, aircrafts.
CE3.7 Remove the material used in the masked.
C4: Use the paint application aircrafts, to obtain the results described.
CE4.1 Apply paint on loose elements and on complete vehicles:
-Perform the adjustment and adjustment of the aerographic equipment according to the type of paint to be applied (monolayer, bilayer, solvent base, water base, and other finishing effects).
-Adjust the operating parameters of the paint booth according to technical specifications or requirements.
-Apply paint with gun keeping the distance and angle constant to the application surface, superimposing the fans and allowing the appropriate time to elapse between the different layers.
-Check that the work done does not present any of the typical defects in the painting operations (neglect, orange skin ...).
-Perform basic maintenance of installations and equipment according to technical specifications.
CE4.2 Apply the appropriate drying systems to the part type:
-Use the oven-drying system by convection (cab).
-Use the drying system with IR screens.
Contents
1. Repair paintings.
-Composition:
▫ Pigments:
-Anticorrosive.
-Lieutenants.
-Specific action: aluminum, mica ...
-Cargas or extender.
▫ Fixed vehicle, resins or drying binders:
-By evaporation.
-By oxidation.
-By temperature.
-By chemical reaction.
▫ Volatile Vehicle:
-Solvents.
-Diluents.
▫ Dwarders and catalysts.
▫ Sectors.
▫ Additives.
▫ Background or preparation paints, masillas, prints:
▫ Appliances.
-Finish Paints:
▫ Monocapa solid colors.
▫ Bicapa solid and metallized colors.
▫ Tricas colored and perside colors.
2. Painted tools and equipment
-Equipment for generating, distributing, regulating and purifying compressed air.
-Application Teams:
▫ conventional suction or gravity guns.
▫ high transfer rate guns: HVL or hybrid.
-Drying equipment.
▫ By hot air convection.
▫ By short or medium wave IR.
▫ By UV.
-Auxiliary equipment used in the paint area.
3. Products and processes for the masking in surface beautification
-Products:
▫ Masked Paper.
▫ Film of masking, transparent self-fixing and for drying with IR.
▫ Plastic Fundas.
▫ Mantas to mask.
▫ Cover-ups
-General use, profiling and moldings adhesive tapes.
-Burlete to mask.
-Pyramid Cordon.
-Util puts together.
-Liquid mask.
-Processes:
▫ Complete vehicle painting.
-Masked of crystals and moons.
-Masked of mouldings and shooters.
-Wheel protection
-Internal protection:
-engine gap
-boot hole
-door interiors
▫ Partial Painting of Vehicles.
-Zone delimitation to be repaired.
-Protection of the rest of the vehicle.
▫ Interior Pinking.
-Protection of electrical installations:
-of electromechanical elements.
-of upholstered and garnishes.
4. Colorimetry
-Elementary principles of colorimetry:
▫ Daltonism.
▫ Light and color.
▫ Additive mix, subtractive mixture.
▫ Metamerism.
-The color on the body.
▫ Monocapa solids.
▫ Bicapa solids and metallized.
▫ Tricas perlates.
▫ Effect.
-Practical guidelines for mixing and matching colors.
-Color codes.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: PAINTED VEHICLES BY BLURRING
Code: UF0949
Duration: 90hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP2 as regards color matching processes using application techniques.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform body repainting processes using the dry-diffused technique.
CE1.1 Apply the blurring technique in single-layer paint systems
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Prepare the paint with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Properly use the integrative diluent in the splicing zones.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
CE1.2 Apply the blurring technique in bilayer paint systems.
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Prepare the base bilayer with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Properly use the integrative diluent in the splicing zones.
-Apply the finish varnish partially or completely to the piece, as required, achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
CE1.3 Apply the blurring technique in tricap paint systems.
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Apply the required background color in the formulation
-Prepare the tricap base with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute according to the environmental conditions for the correct application of the bases.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Properly use the integrative diluent in the splicing zones.
-Apply the finish varnish partially or completely to the piece, as required, achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
C2: Perform body repainting processes using the wet-blurring technique.
CE2.1 Apply the blurring technique in monolayer paint systems.
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Apply a hand from 1K varnish to the entire surface.
-Prepare the paint with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Apply 2K varnish to the entire part
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
CE2.2 Apply the blurring technique in bilayer paint systems.
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Apply a hand from 1K varnish to the entire surface.
-Prepare the base bilayer with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Apply the varnish 2K completely to the piece, as required, achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
CE2.3 Apply the blurring technique in tricap paint systems.
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Apply the required background color in the formulation.
-Apply a hand from 1K varnish to the entire surface.
-Prepare the tricap base with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute according to the environmental conditions for the correct application of the bases.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Apply the varnish 2K completely to the piece, as required, achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
Contents
1. Method of preparing surfaces for blurring.
-Application of monocomponent polyester masits
▫ Fast-drying tackle by ultraviolet light
▫ Tintables
▫ Quick-masked systems
-Equation of surfaces with dry abrasion techniques
2. Methods of blurring.
-Dry-dried.
▫ Single-Layer or Lost Patch
▫ Blurring and Pre-and End-Brightening Processes
▫ Two-layer difumined:
-diffused water-soluble color
-Wet-Difuining:
▫ Products for the wet technique
▫ Indications for use
-Process difficulties
-Rentability of the different methods
-Specific products:
▫ Integrators or solvents
▫ 1 K or specific Barnices
▫ Barns for Blurring
3. Blurring techniques
-Difumed by collected, by sweep, with finishing paint
-Difuining in:
▫ One piece
▫ Two Parts
▫ Multiple Parts
-Solvent paint integration techniques
4. Brightening and polishing techniques
-Use of the Polish:
▫ Types and features.
▫ The polish as abrasive:
-For surface preparation
-For final delivery.
-Pulled from splicing zones
-Pulled and brightened from areas adjacent to the repair.
-The brightness of the brightness of the parts that have not been repaired.
5. Equipment and accessories for the production of blurts
-Pistoles for blurring and equipment adjustments.
-Retouching Pistoles
-Auxiliary teams:
▫ Viscosimetro
▫ Probes
▫ Test-Drying Horno
▫ Paint Mix Machine
▫ calibrated rules and glasses for painting preparation
-Additives and integrative diluents.
-Auxiliary products:
▫ Single-component polyester Masillas.
▫ Fast-drying appliances by ultraviolet light.
▫ Paintable or colorable appliances.
-Rotorbials equipped with interface
-Infrared and ultraviolet-light drying equipment
-Masked elements
-Fine-grained three-dimensional Abrasives
-Puts
-Pulse with electronic speed regulation
-Pneumatic pulidage for work on small surfaces
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: RECONDITIONING AND PREDELIVERY TECHNIQUES
Code: UF0950
Duration: 50hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP 3
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: Analyze the damage and defects that the painting can present, following the processes ' own techniques according to the defect presented.
CE1.1 Identify the damaged materials and classification of the same (metallic, internal and external plastic, composites and elastomers.
CE1.2 Identify the methodology for the painting of metal parts, internal.
CE1.3 Determine the process to be followed in the repair of the damage of the vehicle taking into account the type of material (metallic, plastic, composites, elastometers).
C2: Repair the damage according to the techniques of the processes according to the defect presented.
CE2.1 Prepare the surface by applying the gear and anchor primers that allow a quality finish.
CE2.2 Perform a correct surface preparation that allows the application of the final paint.
CE2.3 Prepare the paint with the maximum approximation of tonality.
CE2.4 Catarizing and diluting according to the environmental conditions for a correct application of the product.
CE2.5 Painting through different application techniques the area that corresponds to a satisfactory result.
CE2.6 Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
C3: Recondition unpainted surfaces.
CE3.1 Pulir and open the parts adjacent to the repaired.
CE3.2 Clean crystals, gums and garnishes of product or pulverized debris and return the tonality.
C4: Perform the pre-delivery work of the vehicle following the established operation.
CE4.1 Perform upholstered, garnish, and interior cleaning operations and recondition the tires.
CE4.2 Mount add-ons, anagrams and logos, install license plates and moldings.
Contents
1. Causes, defects and damage of the paint
-Inadequate surface preparation.
-Incorrect mixing, application and drying of products.
-Incorrect use of the airfoil
-Incorrect maintenance of equipment and installations
-Lack of control over application environmental conditions.
-External agents: climatic, mechanical, industrial, biological factors.
2. Defect correction techniques
-abrasion and polishing techniques.
-Blurring techniques.
3. Materials and auxiliary products
-Abrasivos.
-Chemicals.
-Lijator supports.
-Machines.
4. Reconditioning and Predelivery
-Reconditioning of the paint of the different materials that make up the body: mouldings gums, shooters.
-Pulled from areas adjacent to the repair.
-Abbrillant of all the bodywork.
-Ceras.
-Brightness protectors.
-Cleaning up:
▫ The inside and outside of the vehicle.
▫ Tapized and saved.
▫ Engine Hueco.
▫ Of tires and tires.
-Technical information.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF0948 | 90 | 10 |
|
Unit 2-UF0949 | 90 | 10 |
|
50 | 50 | 10 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 3 must have been exceeded the training units 1 and 2.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Naming: CUSTOMIZING AND DECORATING SURFACES
Code: MF0625_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0625_2 Perform the customization and decoration of surfaces
Duration: 270 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: FRANKED, ROLLED, AND AEROGRAPHED
Code: UF0951
Duration: 90 hours
Competition Referer: This formative unit corresponds to RP1 and RP2 as far as template realization processes are concerned and what is required to impress them on the surface to be decorated
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform process of repainting on the body to customize that allow an optimal finishing finish.
CE1.1 Identify the different materials and the methodology for the painting of metallic, interior and exterior pieces of plastic, composites, elastomers and skin.
CE1.2 Prepare the pre-painted surface by identifying the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes:
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface by applying the gear and anchor primers that allow a quality finish.
-Perform proper surface preparation that allows the application of the final paint.
-Prepare the paint with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-To paint using different application techniques the area that corresponds to a satisfactory result.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
C2: Perform the decoration of vehicles by franking and kneecap.
CE2.1 Perform franking and progressive tone changes.
-Paint franked on the vehicle.
-Apply the techniques for the shift of progressive tone to the raised hand.
-Apply the techniques for ribbon franking.
-To distinguish defects produced in the application of the different finishing systems and to know them to be repaired.
CE2.2 Make roadsides on a vehicle.
-Study the available space and character to select the technique to use
-Apply tape-guided tag-out techniques
-Apply raised hand-out techniques
-Apply tag out techniques with templates
C3: Customize vehicles with aircrafts.
CE3.1 Apply your own aerography techniques to bodywork.
-Develop a design for aircrafts, studying possible masks
-Make the necessary masks, studying the job options with positive and negative, selecting the material to use.
-Study the chromatic ranges to use, and the techniques to use to highlight details
-Perform aircrafts from mobile and fixed masks.
-Perform Raised Aircrafts
CE 3.2Protect aircrafts through specific varnishes.
-Apply 1K varnishes for the protection of different phases of the process
-Apply 2K varnishes for the final finish
-Perform polishing techniques for the removal of edges and jumps in the contours.
-Correct defects.
Contents
1. Vehicle customization
-Techniques of:
▫ Layout and layout.
▫ Artistic Drawing
▫ Design and drawing using digital systems.
▫ Image treatment.
-Customization project.
-Auxiliary computer programs.
-Pigments for special effects.
-Products and attachments.
2. Painting techniques for customization
-Preparation of the substrate.
-Preparation of finishing products.
-Vinillos and masking polymers.
-Additives and their application.
-Aerograph techniques.
-Plot.
-Franjeados.
-Masks.
-Degraded.
-Templates.
-Materials and ancillary products.
▫ Abrasivos.
▫ Specific rules.
▫ Cutting media.
▫ Chemicals.
▫ Lijators media.
▫ Machines.
3. Aerography
-Materials and equipment.
-Application techniques.
-Basic Projects
-Effects and correction in aerographic technique
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: CUSTOMIZATION AND TUNING TECHNIQUES
Code: UF0952
Duration: 90hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP 3 as regards special surface decoration techniques with effect paints.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1. Performing tuning effects by applying different techniques
CE1.1 Apply unique tuning techniques and special customization finishes.
-Select the different finishing systems and apply them correctly.
-Apply marble effect technique.
-Perform "rat" or aged exterior finishes
-Water effect.
-Make textured and matted.
CE1.2 Perform special effects from paint mixes and different additives
-Perform tire painting.
-Perform the painted plastics and skin components.
-Perform the paint of plastics with chrome-effect paints.
-Apply varnish with special effects.
-Introduce new techniques that are incorporated into the customization of vehicles.
-Apply the finish varnish partially and completely by achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
-Apply safety, occupational health and environmental management standards throughout the work process.
C2. Decorate surfaces with image transfer.
CE2.1 Prepare the surface and perform the image transfer.
-Repair the damage that the surface may have.
-Apply the requested background color and dry the part.
-Apply varnish 1K to the part on which the image is to be transferred.
-Apply varnish 1K on the image to be transferred.
-Join the varnished surfaces and dry 24 hours
CE2.2 Remove image support paper with water sanding and polishing techniques.
CE2.3 Apply Aerograph Techniques to highlight image details.
CE2.4 Protect work with 2K varnishes.
CE2.5 Remove defects with polishing techniques.
Contents
1. Tuning streams or styles
-Rally
-Import
-Lowrider or highrider
-Rat
-Detailed
-Hot rod
-Hi-tec
-Dub
-Competition
-Custom
-Baroque
-Aerograph.
2. Materials
-Auxiliary Materials:
▫ Rubber Spatulas
▫ Film to mask
▫ Special masking tapes for curves
▫ Profile Cintas
▫ Pulverizers
-Special Barnices:
▫ 1K
▫ Dairy effect
▫ Tintados
▫ Additivated with Purpurines
▫ Mates
-Tricas and quad-effect paints
-Airport pistols:
▫ Retouches
▫ Double-Effect Aerographs
▫ HVLP
-Mixing machine, technical tokens, and precision scales.
-Hurno for test pieces
3. Image transfer
-Surface preparation techniques
-1K and 2K varnish application techniques
-Types of paper in which image printing is performed.
-Aerographic image retouching techniques.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: ADHESIVE APPLICATION
Code: UF0953
Duration: 60hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1 in terms of techniques for obtaining images by means of computer equipment.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: In a practical scenario, perform the design and manufacture of adhesives, using digital media.
CE1.1 Vectorize the design on an image of the vehicle to which the adhesives are to be applied.
CE1.2 Perform the digital image on vinyl, to apply to the vehicle.
-Distinguished the characteristics and uses of the vinyls used in adhesives.
-Perform with the cutting and printing plotter the vinyl design
-Use the vinyl conveyors.
CE1.3 Successfully perform image manipulation with computer programs.
C2: Apply the methodology for the adhesive transfer.
CE2.1 Put on wet.
CE2.2 Place with heat input.
CE2.3 Place on smooth surfaces.
CE2.4 Place on surfaces with bumps.
CE2.5 Place on surfaces with cavities.
CE2.6 Identify products for the transfer of adhesives in the body.
C3: Perform the Taining of Moons.
CE3.1 Know the regulations regarding adhesives for the tinted of moons:
-European legislation.
-State legislation.
-ITV requirements.
CE3.2 Apply the adhesive sheet placement technique:
-In the mobile crystals.
-On fixed moons.
CE3.3 Identify and properly use the products for the transfer of adhesives in the crystals.
Contents
1. Adhesive application and transfer
-Vinyl and Adhesive Polymers
-Preparing the media.
-Find.
-Transfer methods.
-Protection and finishing.
-Defects and correction in the application of vinyl.
2. Digital tools for the treatment and vectorization of images
-Photoshop
-Corel Draw.
-Adobe Ilustrator.
-Frenad.
-Arcut.
-FlexiStater.
3. Regulations for glazing materials
-EEC directives and recommendations
-National and regional regulations
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Denomination: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to RP4 in terms of personal and collective security rules.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
▫ Work accident.
▫ Professional illness.
▫ Other pathologies derived from work.
▫ Economic and operational repercussions.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
▫ The labor risk prevention law.
▫ The prevention services regulation.
▫ Scope and legal bases.
▫ Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
▫ National agencies.
▫ Autonomic bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
▫ In the handling of tools and equipment.
▫ In handling systems and installations.
▫ On storage and transport of loads.
▫ Exposure to physical, chemical, or biological agents.
▫ The fire.
▫ Physical fatigue.
▫ Mental fatigue.
▫ Job dissatisfaction.
▫ Collective protection.
▫ Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF0951 | 90 | 10 |
|
Unit 2-UF0952 | 90 | 10 |
|
20 | ||
|
| 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
The training units can be programmed independently.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
NON-WORKING PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE MODULE BEAUTIFICATION AND DECORATION OF VEHICLE SURFACES
Code: MP0197
Duration: 40 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform the preparation and equalization of surfaces.
CE1.1 Collaborate on the masked operations of vehicle elements or parts that are not to be blurred
CE1.2 Assist in the application of corrosion protection products.
CE1.3 Apply surface equalization products (putty) and sanding them.
CE1.4 Collaborate on the preparation and application of rigging.
CE1.5 Collaborate on the rigging sanding.
C2: Perform the beautification of surfaces.
CE2.1 Collaborate on the preparation of finishing paints.
CE2.2 Collaborate on the application of exterior finishing paints.
CE2.3 Apply finish painting in inner zones (trunk, hollow motor, interior of doors)
CE2.4 Participate in defect removal tasks.
C3: Perform the customization of surfaces.
CE3.1 Collaborate on the preparation of aircrafts:
-Design the image or reason.
-Design the masks
-Prepare the paints
CE3.2 Collaborate on Adhesive Placement.
CE3.3 Collaborate on the placement of tinted moons
C4: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE4.1 Behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE4.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE4.3 Undertake with diligence the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE4.4 Integrate into the production processes of the workplace.
CE4.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE4.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Preparation and equalization of surfaces.
-Masked parts with little difficulty: windshield, bumpers and mouldings.
-Removal of masked, and remnants of adhesive.
-Preparation and application of 2K masits.
-Mass sanding with mechanical and manual means
-Preparing to appear.
2. Application of finishing paints
-Localization, reading, and color preparation.
-Preparation of the painting.
-Adjustment of the aerographic equipment.
-Application of finishes in exterior elements and interior areas.
-Cleaning and maintenance of aircrafts.
-Removing defects.
3. Customizing surfaces
-Design of masks and equipment used.
-Design of aircrafts and image manipulation with digital media.
-Application of the techniques of remarking details in aerography.
-Application of adhesives on exterior body elements.
-Application of tinted sheets for moons
4. Integration and communication in the workplace
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Tracking the regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS FOR TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0123_2: Surface beautification. | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Professional level 3 certificates from the professional vehicle body area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0625_2: Customizing and decorating surfaces | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Professional level 3 certificates from the professional vehicle body area of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM SPACES, FACILITIES, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 | 45 | 60 | |
|
painting workshop |
200 | 250 | |
| Colorimetry Lab | 30 | 30 | |
|
50 |
50 | 60 | |
|
50 |
| 10 | 10 |
| M1 | M2 | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
X | X | |||
| X | ||||
| X | ||||
| X | X | X | ||
| X | X | X | X | X |
| Equipment | ||
|---|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audiovisual Equipment. -network installed PCs, projection cannon, and internet. -Specialty specific software. -Pizarras to write with a marker. -Rotafolios. -Classroom material. -Table and chair for trainer. -Messes and chairs for students. | |
|
Vehicle Painting Workshop | -Painted and Dried Cabin. -Applicant plane. -Short-wave infrared drying equipment. -Carro with masked equipment. -Handgun washing machine. -Handgun washing machine for water-based paints. -Recycladota of solvents. -A pneumatic and polished equipment. -Aerography equipment. -Ploter for vinillos and the like. -Media for parts in preparation. -Cavalry for painting parts. -Conventional aerographic of suction and gravity. -Hybrid suction and gravity airfoil. -suction and gravity HVLP airfoil. -Aerographic piston for suction and gravity rigging. -Airfoil for retouching. -Broken pneumatic eccentric livers. -Lijators: orbital, pneumatic. -Pneumatic roto-orbital livers. -Portable Aspirators. -Aspiration Brake. -Painter tool set. -Rotating Screw Compressor. -Portable dust extraction equipment. -Lava emergency | |
|
Colorimetry Lab | -Electrical Horno for Drying Specimens. -chromatic camera -Meter of paint thicknesses. -Cups to measure viscosity DIN, FORD. -Box for paint | |
|
paint store | -RF Armarium for flammable storage. -Metal Armaries. -Shelving systems for storage of boxes. -Shelving systems for door storage, capos ... | |
| paint waste store | -Containers to classify polluting waste: paint debris, contaminated paper, plastic and metal containers ... |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units to be provided with the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces will be sufficient for a minimum of fifteen students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to a higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX IX
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Naming:VEHICLE PAINTING
Code: TMVL0509
Professional family: Transportation and maintenance of vehicles
Professional area: Vehicle bodywork
Professional qualification level: 2
Professional reference qualification:
TMV 044_2 Vehicle Painting (RD 295/2004, February 20)
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0122_2: Perform vehicle surface preparation, protection, and equalization.
UC0123_2: Perform the beautification of surfaces.
General competition:
Protect, prepare and paint metal and synthetic surfaces in vehicles, applying the techniques and procedures required in each case, achieving the required quality in safety conditions.
Professional Environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its activity in the body area of large, medium and small companies engaged in the manufacture and maintenance of vehicles.
Productive Sectors:
Construction of bodies.
Repair of cars: plate and paint.
Repair of agricultural machinery and public works: sheet, paint, equipment, tools and optional transformations.
Repair of railways: sheet and paint.
Aircraft repair: sheet and paint (with additional training).
Repair of boats: plate and paint (with additional training).
Other productive sectors where sheet metal work, construction and repair of fiber and composite elements and paint are performed.
Occupations or related jobs:
7232,1054 Vehicle Pintor, in general.
7232,1054 Car vehicle Pintor.
7232.1054 Agricultural machinery and public works Pintor.
7232,1054 Aircraft Pintor.
7232.1043 Boat Pintor.
Painter of railway rolling stock.
Duration of the associated training: 500 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0122_2 Surface preparation (230 hours).
• UF0954: Masked techniques (30 hours).
• UF0955: Protection of surfaces (80 hours).
• UF0956: Igualation and preparation of surfaces (90 hours).
• UF0917: (Transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MF0123_2: (Transverse) Surface Beautification (230 hours).
• UF0948: Vehicle painting (90 hours).
• UF0949: Pinted from vehicles by blurring (90 hours).
• UF0950: Reconditioning and Predelivery Techniques (50 hours).
MP0198: Non-Labor Professional Practices Module for Vehicle Painting (40 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established in the training unit UF0917 of the training module MF0122_2 of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the royal decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Denomination: PERFORM VEHICLE SURFACE PREPARATION, PROTECTION, AND EQUALIZATION
Level: 2
Code: UC0122_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Prepare surfaces, treating them by different operations or processes.
CR1.1 The edge sanding is done by removing all step in the paint layers.
CR1.2 The pickling is done with physical or chemical pickling according to the procedure.
CR1.3 In pickling and/or sanding operations, it is ensured that no grooves or scratches are produced on the surface, higher than the manufacturer has established.
CR1.4 Cleaning and degreasing is performed at different stages of the process.
CR1.5 The "Tick" of the sanded zones is realized taking into account the surface to be covered and the thickness of the layer.
CR1.6 The application of phosphatant primers is performed in compliance with the characteristics of the product.
RP2: Apply the different protection products, sealing and matching surfaces, depending on the type of element and following the work process.
CR2.1 The application of polyester masillas is performed according to product indications (ratio of mixtures, thicknesses, drying time, etc.)
CR2.2 The application of masillas, devices, sealants, waxes and protection products is carried out by applying different systems according to the working process (extrusion, pulverization and brush).
CR2.3 The application of high-thickness, gun-to-gun masillas is suitable for the type of support.
CR2.4 The various sanding processes are performed according to the abrasive, selected according to the product to be lijar or level of finish.
CR2.5 The masked protects adjacent areas.
CR2.6 According to the characteristics of the plastic materials, the equalization with anchoring products and/or filling product is performed.
CR2.7 Basic maintenance operations for work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case
RP3: Meet the safety and health standards in the process of preparing and applying paints.
CR3.1 The safety standards of the workshop are extracted from the inherent risks inherent in the specific work, and the protection, personal and collective measures are checked
CR3.2 The work area remains risk-free and security, personal, and collective standards are respected.
CR3.3 The contingencies that have occurred are communicated with the necessary promptness to enable their supervision and resolution.
Professional Context
Production media
Products and results
New or repaired metal or synthetic surfaces, to which it is necessary to apply a paint treatment. Obtaining an equal and uniform surface, without the presence of "waters" or irregularities, suitable for receiving a quality painting treatment. Preparation, dosing and handling of the funds products to be applied. Restoration of anti-corrosive and anti-corrosive treatments and products
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original cotes are given. Management manuals for the different teams. Work orders of the workshop head or section manager. Microfiche, graphic and written. Computer media.
Competition Unit 2
Naming: PERFORM SURFACE BEAUTIFICATION
Level: 2
Code: UC0123_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform preparation operations for the painting, executing the application of enamels, according to the systems that must be used to achieve the required quality and safety conditions.
CR1.1 The area to be painted is checked to be dry, clean, and protected (masking control, no dust, and small defects).
CR1.2 In the application of paint processes (monolayer, bilayer ... and other finishing effects), the parameters of: application pressure, viscosity, nozzle diameter ...
CR1.3 To determine the paint drying time, the evaporative time, drying, and temperature parameters of the oven are properly conjugated.
CR1.4 The application of the paint is performed by maintaining the application times between the layers, the overlay of the fan, the homogeneity of the load and the distance from the gun to the surface.
CR1.5 Franking techniques are performed at the request of the customer, according to the product and process specifications.
CR1.6 The color equalization of the painted zone with respect to the adjacent zones is achieved by adapting the parameters of vivacity, tonality and clarity.
CR1.7 Process operations are executed in compliance with safety and health and environmental impact standards.
CR1.8 Basic maintenance operations for work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used are performed in each case
RP2: Perform colorimetry by attending color matching and composition techniques.
CR2.1 The paint mixture is performed according to the proportions established by the manufacturer.
CR2.2 The matching of the obtained color is achieved by applying the test pieces and the comparison in chromatic camera.
RP3: Identify and correct the damage and defects that paint can present by following the techniques of the processes according to the defect presented.
CR3.1 The localized damage and defects are analyzed, and it is determined whether they can be corrected by polishing and brightening, or you have to proceed to perform a more thorough operation or a repainting of the zone.
CR3.2 The work process to be followed is set to achieve the removal of the damage or defect and the different operations are sequenced.
CR3.3 The damage or defect is eliminated by operating out of the tools and products, and the required final quality is achieved.
Professional Context
Production media
abrasive, rotary, vibratory and roto-orbital livers. Aspiration plants. Painted cabin/oven, mixers, electronic scales, machine for washing guns, aircrafts. Aspirational planes. Degreasing and cleaning products. Infrared-drying equipment. Color cards, color cards applied to the gun, color indexes, viscosimeters, test pieces, color graphics, spectrophotometers. Thickness meter, magnifying glass, cloths and bayets, pocket lantern, ultrafine lijas and water pulverized. Polishing and brightening, renovators, specific products, sanding tacos, lijas and microabrasives, polishing machines, masquerading products. Assemblies or elements of metal materials (capes, fins, doors, bodies ...). Sets or elements of synthetic materials (parolagus, front flaps, gates ...).
Products and results
Metallic and synthetic surfaces, sanded, clean, degreased and matched in cases that are necessary, prepared for their later painted. Preparation, dosage and handling of paint products and varnishes to be applied. Get a quality paint finish, with good color-free color matching.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Technical manuals for the products. Color cards. Work orders of the workshop head or section manager. Microfiche. Information on paper and on computer support.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: PREPARATION OF SETTINGS
Code: MF0122_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC 0122_2 Perform vehicle surface preparation, protection, and equalization
Duration: 230hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: MASKING TECHNIQUES
Code: UF0954
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1 and RP2in the protection of surfaces that are not to be sprayed.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: Analyze the surface masking processes, in order to select the appropriate method, depending on the type of support.
CE1.1 Identify affected areas and items and need to be masked.
CE1.2 Identify and interpret the technical documentation, depending on the type of support and the equipment to be used.
CE1.3 Differ the different methods of masking of surfaces the necessary materials and tools.
CE1.4 Select the most appropriate method based on criteria of quality, efficiency, speed of installation and drying system.
C2: Apply masking methods, determining equipment and materials that are necessary for protection of areas that are not to be sprayed.
CE2.1 Perform the masked on full vehicles.
CE2.2 Perform the masked in partial vehicle painting.
CE2.3 Perform the masked on vehicle customization jobs: franked, xerographed.
Contents
1. Products for the masked
-Role of masked.
-Film to mask.
-Plastic Fundas.
-Mantas to mask.
-Cover wheels.
-Clear self-fixing film:
-Film for IR drying.
-General use, profiling and moldings adhesive tapes.
-Burlete to mask.
-Pyramid Cordon.
-Util puts together.
-Liquid mask.
2. Masked processes in the painting of vehicles
-Pinted from complete vehicles.
▫ Masked of crystals and moons.
▫ Masked of mouldings and shooters.
▫ Wheel protection
▫ Internal protection:
-engine gap
-boot hole
-door interiors
-Partial painting of vehicles.
▫ Delimitation of the zone to be repaired with systems that do not leave a cut line
▫ Protecting the rest of the vehicle by choosing the fastest system
-Painted interiors.
▫ Protection of electrical installations
▫ Protection of Electromechanical Elements
▫ Protection of upholstered and garnishes
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: PROTECTION OF YOUR
Code: UF0955
Duration: 80 hours
Competition reference:
This training unit corresponds to RP1 as regards the surface preparation required for the application of protection products and in the RP2 as regards the application of products.
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: Analyze the surface preparation processes, in order to select the appropriate method, depending on the type of support.
CE1.1 Identify the phenomena of corrosion in metal materials.
-Perform metal corrosion tests.
-Use the saline mist chamber.
CE1.2 Identify affected areas and elements and require anti-corrosive or protective treatment.
-Locate corrosion affected areas
-Prevent corrosive phenomena in replacement parts
-Determine vulnerable body areas and need protective coatings.
CE1.3 Identify anti-corrosive protection methods in the manufacturing process.
-Set the anti-corrosive procedures in the manufacturing line.
-Identify manufacturer warranties and conditions.
C2: Apply conditioning processes and anti-corrosive treatment of surfaces.
CE2.1 Prepare surfaces to be treated with anti-corrosion systems:
-Apply sanding procedures for removing oxides and paints in bad condition.
-Run pickling (chemical and physical) techniques on surfaces.
-Apply cleaning and degreasing procedures for the areas to be treated.
CE2.2 Perform the different anti-corrosive protection operations
-Perform "electrocking" operations on metal surfaces.
-Perform application operations of phosphatant primers, taking into account the technical documentation of the manufacturer of the products.
-Apply the different processes according to the characteristics of the surfaces.
C3: Perform product application operations used for surface protection
CE3.1 Interpret the technical documentation provided by the manufacturer of the products used for the preparation of surfaces.
CE3.2 Apply surface protection products to the body parts that require it:
-Apply cavity wax, antigravilla paints, bituminous products and soundproofing.
-Apply procedures for preparing mixtures of protection products together.
CE3.3 Identify substrates for the application of different products.
CE3.4 Perform sanding operations, taking into account the selection of the abrasive, the product to be sanded and the level of finish required for the application of protective products.
Contents
1. The phenomenon of corrosion
-Definition
-Causes of corrosion.
-Classification of corrosion.
-Corrosion tests.
-Corrosion-Pies
-The corrosion in the car.
2. Anti-corrosive protection
-Anti-corrosive protection in repair: processes, products and equipment.
-Preparing surfaces.
-Treatment of metallic coatings.
-Non-metallic coating treatments.
-Products, tools, and equipment.
-Work processes.
-Security.
-Environmental management.
3. Application of the protection products
-Composition and characteristics of anti-corrosive paints and protective materials.
-Surface protection products.
▫ Anti-corrosive products.
▫ Prints, types, and systems.
-Technical paint information.
-Pictograms.
-Technical and security sheets.
4. Equipment and useful in the application of products for the protection of surfaces
-Installations.
-Equipment and tools for sanding.
▫ Sanding Tacos.
▫ Lijators.
▫ Lijators media.
▫ Abrasivos employees in repair.
-Products and tools for masking.
▫ Products to cover surfaces.
▫ Useful for the contour masking.
-Cintas and masking of masking.
-Application teams.
▫ Airport pistols.
▫ Application Cabins.
▫ Auxiliary equipment.
-Equipment for cleaning.
-Equipment for drying products.
5. Paint processes for surface protection products
-Steel parts.
▫ New Piece.
▫ Pieza repaired.
▫ Pieza with surface damage.
-Parts of non-ferrous materials.
▫ Criteria for your application.
▫ New Piece.
▫ Pieza repaired.
▫ Pieza with surface damage.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: MATCHING AND PREPARING SURFACES
Code: UF0956
Duration: 90 hours
Competition Reference:
This training unit corresponds to the RP1 in terms of the surface preparation required for the application of protection products, in the RP2 as regards the application of products and the protection of undamaged areas.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Apply surface equalization products, ensuring the correct settlement of the successive applied layers.
CE1.1 Interpret the technical documentation provided by the manufacturer of the products used for the equalization of surfaces and the application thereof:
-Identify the pictograms used by the product manufacturers.
-Defer the concepts of viscosity and proportion.
-Interpret the security tokens for the chemicals.
CE1.2 Perform the preparation and application of the products necessary for the equalization of surfaces with minor damage:
-Identify substrates for the application of polyester masillas.
-Get putty mixes taking into account the type of metal surface on which it is to be applied.
-Preserve areas that should not be treated.
-Make the surface preparation to allow proper anchoring of the masillas (sanding, degreasing).
-Apply putty by choosing the type of load (fiberglass, zinc ...) depending on the damage the surface has to match (blow, small perforation, overlap of partial union ...), respecting the indications of the manufacturer of the product (proportion of mixtures, thicknesses, layers, times and systems of drying ...).
-Run high-thickness mass application processes (extrusion, spray, brush).
-Perform the above processes by changing the surface type (flat, curved, and/or with edges).
-Perform sanding operations, taking into account the selection of the abrasive, the product to be sanded and the level of finish and the shape of the surface (flat, curved, with edges) using profile templates.
-Perform cleaning and maintenance and adjustment operations if necessary from the equipment used.
CE1.3 Perform the preparation and application of the products necessary for the equalization of surfaces on plastic surfaces:
-Identify plastic substrates (thermosetting, thermoplastics) for the application of polyester masillas.
-Get mixtures of masillas taking into account the type of plastic or composite surface on which it is to be applied.
-Apply preparation procedures for mixing of anchor products.
-Apply polyester thickening procedures as indicated by the manufacturer of the product (ratio of mixtures, thicknesses, layers, drying time ...) preserving the areas that are not to be treated.
-Perform equalization operations of plastic surfaces with anchoring and/or filling products according to the characteristics of the materials.
-Perform sanding operations, taking into account the selection of the abrasive, the product to be sanded and the trim level.
-Perform cleaning, maintenance, and tuning operations if necessary from the equipment used.
C2: Perform application operations of products used for the preparation of surfaces, ensuring their correct anchorage and the absence of irregularities.
CE2.1 Interpret the technical documentation provided by the manufacturer of the products used for the preparation of surfaces and the application thereof.
-Identify the elements associated with the product (catalysts, diluents, elasticizers, convertor additives H/H. ..).
CE2.2 Perform the preparation and application of the necessary products on new or repaired metal or plastic surfaces:
-Make mixtures of gear, taking into account the ratio rule and the viscosity marked in the manufacturer's specifications.
-Choose the type of rigging depending on the state of the piece to be prepared (low, medium, high thickness, H/H), the size of the piece, and the color of the finishing paint to be applied.
-Choose the type of catalyst and diluent depending on the environmental conditions (temperature and humidity) of the workplace.
-Run rigging application processes by choosing the system (spray, spray gun, brush, roller ...) depending on the size of the surface or the location of the surface.
-Perform the necessary masking tasks to preserve the areas that are not to be sprayed, in any case choosing the most appropriate method.
-Make gear preparation according to the type of plastic (surfaces printed and/or filled).
-Perform the adjustment operations of the gear application aircrafts.
-Perform the cleaning, maintenance, and tuning operations of the equipment used.
-Perform sanding operations, taking into account the selection of the abrasive, the product to be sanded and the trim level, applying sanding guides.
Contents
1. Comparison of painted processes: factory-repair
-Painted characteristics in manufacturing:
▫ Washing and degreasing
▫ Phosphatation and Passivazo
▫ Catodic Electrophoresis
▫ Sellado and cataforesic protection
▫ Appliances
▫ Finishing paint application
▫ Application of cavity waxes
-Painter features in repair:
▫ 1K and 2K Print Application
▫ Application of equalization products: masillas and tackle
▫ Application of 2K, bilayer, and three-layer finish paints
2. Application of the preparation products.
-Composition and characteristics of paints, resins, pigments, solvents.
-Match and surface preparation products.
▫ Fill and rework masillas.
▫ Special masillas with reinforcement loads (fiberglass, zinc)
▫ Masillas for plastics
▫ Ayejos 1K, 2K, Wet on Wet and Convertible, tintables.
▫ Additives (converters, elasticizers), hardeners, and diluents that are added in the mixtures.
▫ Degreasing cleaning products and solvents
▫ Mixtures by weight and mixtures by volume.
-Technical paint information.
▫ Pictograms.
▫ Technical sheets.
▫ Security tokens.
3. Equipment for the preparation and equalization of surfaces.
-Facilities and services in the preparation zone.
-Equipment and tools for sanding.
▫ Tacos and manual sanding garlops with and without aspiration.
▫ orbital livers, and rotorbitals.
▫ Plates of different hardness for the sanders.
▫ Abrasivos employees in repair.
▫ Powder and spray sanding guides.
-Application teams.
▫ Spatulas for the application of masillas.
▫ Airport pistols.
▫ Application Cabins.
▫ aspirational Planes
▫ Auxiliary equipment.
-Equipment for cleaning.
-Solvent Recycladota
-Equipment for drying products.
▫ Dry by infrared (IR) radiation.
▫ Secado by ultraviolet (UV) radiation.
4. Process for preparing and equalizing surfaces.
-Steel parts.
▫ New Piece.
▫ Pieza repaired.
▫ Pieza with surface damage.
-Aluminium parts painting processes.
▫ New Piece.
▫ Pieza repaired.
▫ Surface Repainted.
-Plastic parts.
▫ Thermoplastic Paint. Rigid and flexible.
▫ thermostable paint.
▫ Soft foams.
▫ Elastomers Paint
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Naming: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP3
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.3 Identify environmental protection requirements derived from actions with polluting products.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.1 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the identified risks, including the selection, conservation and correct use of the individual and collective protective equipment.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
CE2.3 Adopt the basic sanitary measures, first aid techniques and transfer of accidents in different accident scenarios.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.1 Specify aspects of environmental regulations related to the risks arising from the activity of the workshop, such as noise, vibration, and the handling of combustible products, lubricants, paints and solvents, combustion gases, welding gases, waste materials, lijas, electrodes, etc.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.3 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the risks identified, including the correct handling of products and their storage, use of individual and collective protective equipment.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
▫ Work accident.
▫ Professional illness.
▫ Other pathologies derived from work.
▫ Economic and operational repercussions.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
▫ The labor risk prevention law.
▫ The prevention services regulation.
▫ Scope and legal bases.
▫ Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
▫ National agencies.
▫ Autonomic bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
▫ In the handling of tools and equipment.
▫ In handling systems and installations.
▫ On storage and transport of loads.
▫ Exposure to physical, chemical, or biological agents.
▫ The fire.
▫ Physical fatigue.
▫ Mental fatigue.
▫ Job dissatisfaction.
▫ Collective protection.
▫ Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF0954 | 30 | 10 |
|
Unit 2-UF0955 | 80 | 20 |
|
| 20 |
20 |
| 20 | 20 | 20 |
Sequence:
The training unit 4 can be programmed independently. To access training units 2 and 3, the training unit 1 and 4 must have been exceeded or professional experience can be established
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Naming: BEAUTIFICATION OF SURFACES
Code: MF0123_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0123_2 Perform surface beautification
Duration: 230 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: PAINTED VEHICLES
Code: UF0948
Duration: 90hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1 as regards the application of the paint process, the drying times and the basic maintenance of equipment and tools, and in the RP2, as regards the mixture and proportions stipulated by the manufacturer of the product.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyze the different surface beautification processes, determining the methods to be used for the application of bases and varnishes.
CE1.1 Identify the various surface beautification processes relating to the different base types and coating materials.
CE1.2 Perform pre-painted preparatory work on parts or vehicles:
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Select the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Identify the different types of media coating on which you are going to paint.
-Identify the type of vehicle paint (monolayer, bilayer ... and other finishing effects), to select the necessary technical documentation.
C2: Get the right mix of paint, catalyst, diluent ... according to specifications given by the paint manufacturers.
CE2.1 Identify the properties of different types of varnish (paints and lacquers).
CE2.2 Differ the distribution of colors in a chromatic circle and use it.
CE2.3 Identify the methods of obtaining colors by means of mixtures from basic colors.
CE2.4 Perform vehicle color reading and make painting:
-Identify the color code according to the manufacturer's technical documentation.
-Interpret the technical documentation provided by the paint manufacturers by identifying the characteristics of the products.
-Select the different products required to perform the mixture.
-Make the product mix according to the rules of proportions and viscosity, handling the electronic and mixing scales.
-Perform color adjustment tests, performing the necessary tests in the chromatic chamber.
C3: Apply masking methods of surfaces, determining the equipment and materials that are necessary for the protection of areas that are not to be sprayed, selecting the most appropriate method based on criteria of quality, efficiency, speed in the installation and drying system.
CE3.1 Identify affected areas and items and need to be masked.
CE3.2 Identify and interpret the technical documentation, depending on the type of support and the equipment to be used.
CE3.3 Differ the different methods of masking of surfaces the necessary materials and tools.
CE3.4 Perform the masked in full vehicle painting.
CE3.5 Perform the masked in partial vehicle painting.
CE3.6 Perform the masked on vehicle customization jobs: franking, aircrafts
CE3.7 Remove the material used in the masked.
C4: Use the paint application aircrafts, to obtain the results described.
CE4.1 Apply paint on loose elements and on complete vehicles:
-Perform the adjustment and adjustment of the aerographic equipment according to the type of paint to be applied (monolayer, bilayer, solvent base, water base, and other finishing effects).
-Adjust the operating parameters of the paint booth according to technical specifications or requirements.
-Apply paint with gun keeping the distance and angle constant to the application surface, superimposing the fans and allowing the appropriate time to elapse between the different layers.
-Check that the work done does not present any of the typical defects in the painting operations (neglect, orange skin ...).
-Perform basic maintenance of installations and equipment according to technical specifications.
CE4.2 Apply the appropriate drying systems to the part type:
-Use the oven-drying system by convection (cabin)
-Use the drying system with IR screens
Contents
1. Repair paintings.
-Composition:
▫ Pigments:
-anticorrosive
-cover
-specific action: aluminum, mica ...
-loads or extenders
▫ Fixed vehicle, resins or drying binders:
-by evaporation
-by oxidation
-by temperature
-by chemical reaction
▫ Volatile Vehicle:
-solvents
-diluents
▫ Endurecers and catalysts
▫ Sectors
▫ Additives
▫ Background or preparation paints, masillas, prints:
▫ Appliances.
-Finish Paints:
▫ Monocapa solid colors.
▫ Bicapa solid and metallized colors.
▫ Tricas colored and perside colors.
2. Painted tools and equipment.
-Equipment for generating, distributing, regulating and purifying compressed air.
-Application Teams:
▫ Conventional suction or gravity guns
▫ High Transfer Rate: HVL or Hybrid
-Drying equipment.
▫ By hot air convection
▫ By Short or Medium Wave IR
▫ By UV
-Auxiliary equipment used in the paint area.
3. Products and processes for the masking in the beautification of surfaces
-Products:
▫ Masked Paper.
-Film of masking, transparent self-fixing and for drying with IR.
-Plastic Fundas.
-Mantas to mask.
-Cover-ups.
-General use, profiling and moldings adhesive tapes.
-Burlete to mask.
-Pyramid Cordon.
-Util places junquillo
-Liquid Mask
-Processes:
▫ Full-vehicle painting
-Masquerade of crystals and moons
-Masked of mouldings and shooters
-Wheel protection
-Internal protection:
-engine gap
-boot hole
-door interiors
▫ Partial Painting of Vehicles.
-Zoning to repair
-Protecting the rest of the vehicle
▫ Interior Pinking.
-Protection of:
-of electrical installations
-of electromechanical elements
-of upholstered and garnishes
4. Colorimetry.
-Elementary principles of colorimetry:
▫ Daltonism
▫ Light and color
▫ Additive mixing, subtractive mixing
-Metamerism
-The color on the body.
▫ Solid Monocapa
▫ Solid and metallized Bicapa
▫ Perked Tricas
▫ Effect
-Practical guidelines for mixing and matching colors.
-Color codes
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: PAINTED VEHICLES BY BLURRING
Code: UF0949
Duration: 90hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP2 as regards color matching processes using application techniques.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform body repainting processes using the dry-diffused technique.
CE1.1 Apply the blurring technique in single-layer paint systems
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Prepare the paint with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Properly use the integrative diluent in the splicing zones.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
CE1.2 Apply the blurring technique in bilayer paint systems.
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Prepare the base bilayer with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Properly use the integrative diluent in the splicing zones.
-Apply the finish varnish partially or completely to the piece, as required, achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
CE1.3 Apply the blurring technique in tricap paint systems
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Apply the required background color in the formulation
-Prepare the tricap base with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute according to the environmental conditions for the correct application of the bases.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Properly use the integrative diluent in the splicing zones.
-Apply the finish varnish partially or completely to the piece, as required, achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
C2: Perform body repainting processes using the wet-blurring technique.
CE2.1 Apply the blurring technique in single-layer paint systems
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Apply a hand from 1K varnish to the entire surface.
-Prepare the paint with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Apply 2K varnish to the entire part
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
CE2.2 Apply the blurring technique in bilayer paint systems.
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Apply a hand from 1K varnish to the entire surface.
-Prepare the base bilayer with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute depending on the environmental conditions for proper application of the product.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Apply the varnish 2K completely to the piece, as required, achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
CE2.3 Apply the blurring technique in tricap paint systems.
-Identify the necessary equipment, tools, and tools in the various processes.
-Choose the method, explaining the characteristics of the selected teams.
-Prepare the surface for the application of the putty and tackle protecting adjacent areas.
-Apply tackle based on the tonality of the same according to the formulated color requirement.
-Perform a correct sanding of the surface that allows the application of the patch.
-Apply the required background color in the formulation
-Apply a hand from 1K varnish to the entire surface.
-Prepare the tricap base with the maximum approximation of tonality.
-Catalize and dilute according to the environmental conditions for the correct application of the bases.
-Pintar by means of the techniques of diffusing (swept or collected) the area that corresponds to achieving a satisfactory result.
-Apply the varnish 2K completely to the piece, as required, achieving the expected quality results.
-Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
Contents
1. Method of preparing surfaces for blurring.
-Application of monocomponent polyester masits
▫ Fast-drying tackle by ultraviolet light
▫ Tintables
▫ Quick-masked systems
-Equation of surfaces with dry abrasion techniques
2. Methods of blurring
-Dry-dried.
▫ Single-Layer or Lost Patch
▫ Blurring and Pre-and End-Brightening Processes
▫ Two-layer difumined:
-diffused water-soluble color
-Wet-Difuining:
▫ Products for the wet technique
▫ Indications for use
-Process difficulties
-Rentability of the different methods
-Specific products:
▫ Integrators or solvents
▫ 1 K or specific Barnices
▫ Barns for Blurring
3. Blurring techniques
-Difumed by collected, by sweep, with finishing paint
-Difuining in:
▫ One piece
▫ Two Parts
▫ Multiple Parts
-Solvent paint integration techniques
4. Brightening and polishing techniques
-Use of the Polish:
▫ Types and features.
▫ The polish as abrasive:
-for surface preparation
-for final delivery.
-Pulled from splicing zones
-Pulled and brightened from areas adjacent to the repair.
-The brightness of the brightness of the parts that have not been repaired.
5. Equipment and accessories for the production of blurts
-Pistoles for blurring and equipment adjustments.
-Retouching Pistoles
-Auxiliary teams:
▫ Viscosimetro
▫ Probes
▫ Test-Drying Horno
▫ Paint Mix Machine
▫ calibrated rules and glasses for painting preparation
-Additives and integrative diluents.
-Auxiliary products:
▫ Single-component polyester Masillas.
▫ Fast-drying appliances by ultraviolet light.
▫ Paintable or colorable appliances.
-Rotorbials equipped with interface
-Infrared and ultraviolet-light drying equipment
-Masked elements
-Fine-grained three-dimensional Abrasives
-Puts
-Pulse with electronic speed regulation
-Pneumatic pulidage for work on small surfaces
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: RECONDITIONING AND PREDELIVERY TECHNIQUES
Code: UF0950
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP3
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: Analyze the damage and defects that the painting can present, following the processes ' own techniques according to the defect presented.
CE1.1 Identify the damaged materials and classification of the same (metallic, internal and external plastic, composites and elastomers.
CE1.2 Identify the methodology for the painting of metal parts, internal.
CE1.3 Determine the process to be followed in the repair of the damage of the vehicle taking into account the type of material (metallic, plastic, composites, elastometers).
C2: Repair the damage according to the techniques of the processes according to the defect presented.
CE2.1 Prepare the surface by applying the gear and anchor primers that allow a quality finish.
CE2.2 Perform a correct surface preparation that allows the application of the final paint.
CE2.3 Prepare the paint with the maximum approximation of tonality.
CE2.4 Catarizing and diluting according to the environmental conditions for a correct application of the product.
CE2.5 Painting through different application techniques the area that corresponds to a satisfactory result.
CE2.6 Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
C3: Recondition unpainted surfaces.
CE3.1 Pulir and open the parts adjacent to the repaired.
CE3.2 Clean crystals, gums and garnishes of product or pulverized debris and return the tonality.
C4: Perform the pre-delivery jobs for the vehicle by following the established operation
CE4.1 Perform upholstered, garnish, and interior cleaning operations and recondition the tires.
CE4.2 Mount add-ons, anagrams and logos, install license plates and moldings.
Contents
1. Causes, defects, and damage to paint:
-Inadequate surface preparation.
-Incorrect mixing, application and drying of products.
-Incorrect use of the airfoil.
-Incorrect maintenance of equipment and installations.
-Lack of control over application environmental conditions.
-External agents: climatic, mechanical, industrial, biological factors.
2. Defect correction techniques.
-abrasion and polishing techniques.
-Blurring techniques.
3. Materials and ancillary products.
-Abrasivos.
-Chemicals.
-Lijator supports.
-Machines.
4. Reconditioning and pre-delivery.
-Reconditioning of the paint of the different materials that make up the body: mouldings gums, shooters.
-Pulled from areas adjacent to the repair.
-Abbrillant of all the bodywork.
-Ceras.
-Brightness protectors.
-Cleaning up:
▫ The inside and outside of the vehicle.
▫ Tapized and saved.
▫ Engine Hueco.
▫ tires and tires
-Technical information.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF0948 | 90 | 10 |
|
Unit 2-UF0949 | 90 | 10 |
|
50 | 50 | 10 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 3 must have been exceeded the training units 1 and 2.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
NON-LABOR PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE MODULE VEHICLE PAINTING
Code: MP0198
Duration: 40 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Perform the preparation and equalization of surfaces.
CE1.1 Collaborate on the masked operations of vehicle elements or parts that are not to be blurred
CE1.2 Assist in the application of corrosion protection products.
CE1.3 Apply surface equalization products (putty) and sanding them.
CE1.4 Collaborate on the preparation and application of rigging.
CE1.5 Collaborate on the rigging sanding.
C2: Perform surface beautification:
CE2.1 Collaborate on the preparation of finishing paints.
CE2.2 Collaborate on the application of exterior finishing paints.
CE2.3 Apply the finishing paint in inner zones (trunk, hollow motor, interior of doors).
C3: Perform reconditioning and predelivery tasks:
CE3.1 Participate in defect removal tasks.
CE3.2 Collaborate on cleanup tasks.
CE3.3 Perform the assembly of signalling and lighting elements.
CE3.4 Collaborate on the assembly of elements that have been painted separate from the body: paragolpes, capos, doors, etc.
CE3.5 Perform the assembly of complementary elements: license plates, embellishments, mouldings, etc.
C4: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE4.1 Behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE4.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE4.3 Undertake with diligence the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE4.4 Integrate into the production processes of the workplace.
CE4.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE4.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Preparation and matching of surfaces
-Selection of materials in masked operations
-Masked parts with little difficulty: windshield, bumpers and mouldings.
-Removal of masked, and remnants of adhesive.
-Preparing surfaces.
-Application of primers: both with aircrafts and manuals
-Cera of cavities.
-Preparation and application of 2K masits.
-Landing of putty with mechanical and manual means.
-Preparing to appear.
2. Application of finishing paints
-Localization, reading, and color preparation.
-Preparation of the painting.
-Adjustment of the aerographic equipment.
-Application of finishes in exterior elements and interior areas.
-Cleaning and maintenance of aircrafts.
3. Reconditioning and Predelivery
-Anchor of paragolpes, doors and capos.
-Application of Adhesives And Recovery Tapes.
-Adjustment of doors and capes.
-Repair of paint defects and repair.
-Use of upholstered and garnish cleaning products and techniques.
4. Integration and communication in the workplace
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Tracking the regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS FOR TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0122_2: Preparing surfaces. | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Level 3 professionalism certificates from the Vehicle Body Area of the Professional Family Transport and Maintenance of Vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0123_2: Surface beautification. | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Superior technician of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles. • Level 3 professionalism certificates from the Vehicle Body Area of the Professional Family Transport and Maintenance of Vehicles. | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM SPACES, FACILITIES, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
45 | 45 | 60 | |||||||||||
|
painting workshop | 200 |
| |||||||||||
| 30 | 30 |
| |||||||||||
|
60 | |||||||||||||
|
|
30 |
30 |
30 |
30 |
30 |
30 |
30 |
30 |
30 | 50 |
| 10 | 10 |
| M1 | M2 | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
X | X | |||
| X | ||||
| X | ||||
| X | X | X | ||
| X | X | X | X | X |
| Equipment | ||
|---|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audio-visual equipment -Network-installed PCs, projection canon, and internet -Specialty-specific software -Rotuder-write Pizarras -Rotafolios -Classroom material -Table and chair for trainer -Messes and chairs for students | |
|
painting workshop | -Painted and dried cabin. -Applicant plane. -Short-wave infrared drying equipment. -Carro with masked equipment. -Handgun washing machine. -Handgun washing machine for water-based paints. -Recycladota of solvents. -A pneumatic and polished equipment. -Aerography equipment. -Ploter for vinillos and the like. -Media for parts in preparation. -Cavalry for painting parts. -Conventional aerographic of suction and gravity. -Hybrid suction and gravity airfoil. -suction and gravity HVLP airfoil. -Aerographic piston for suction and gravity rigging. -Airfoil for retouching. -Broken pneumatic eccentric livers. -Lijators: orbital, pneumatic. -Pneumatic roto-orbital livers. -Portable Aspirators. -Aspiration Brake. -Painter tool set. -Rotating Screw Compressor. -Portable dust extraction equipment. -Lava emergency eyes. | |
|
Colorimetry Lab | -Electrical Horno for Drying Specimens. -chromatic camera -Meter of paint thicknesses. -Cups to measure viscosity DIN, FORD. -Box for paint | |
|
paint store | -RF Armarium for flammable storage. -Metal Armaries. -Shelving systems for storage of boxes. -Shelving systems for door storage, capos ... | |
| paint waste store | -Containers to classify polluting waste: paint debris, contaminated paper, plastic and metal containers ... |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units that must be available for the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces, will be sufficient for a minimum of fifteen students and must be increased, if necessary to attend to a higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX X
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC VEHICLE SYSTEMS
Code: TMVG0209
Professional family: Transportation and maintenance of vehicles
Professional area: Electromechanical vehicles
Professional qualification level: 2
Professional reference qualification:
TMV197_2 Maintenance of electric and electronic vehicle systems (RD 1228/2006. of 27 October)
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0626_2: Maintain vehicle load and boot systems.
UC0627_2: Maintain vehicle auxiliary electrical circuits.
UC0628_2: Maintain vehicle security and comfort systems.
General competition:
Perform the maintenance and assembly of accessories, in the electric and electronic systems of motor vehicles, industrial, motorcycles, agricultural machinery and public works, applying established techniques and procedures, achieving the required quality in safety conditions.
Professional environment:
Professional scope:
It carries out its professional activity both on its own and as an employed person, in small and medium-sized enterprises, mainly in the private sector, in the maintenance of vehicles or in the assembly of accessories in the electromechanical area.
Productive Sectors:
It is located in the industrial sector, automotive subsector and, in particular, in the following subsectors or economic-productive activities: Industry of the construction of machinery and mechanical equipment: subactivity repair of machinery and other agricultural material; Sale, maintenance and repair of motor vehicles, motorcycles and mopeds; Manufacture, sale and marketing of equipment for testing and diagnosis; Other productive activities where electromechanical maintenance works of vehicles and thermal motors are carried out.
Relevant Occupations and Jobs:
-Vehicle electronicist.
-Electronic maintenance and repair electrician in automotive.
-Car Electrician.
-Electricist of industrial vehicles, machinery of public and agricultural work.
7521.1091 Automotive and/or automotive electronics, in general.
Duration of the associated training: 520 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0626_2: Vehicle load and boot systems and basic electrotechnical circuits (210 hours).
• UF1099: Electricity, electromagnetism and electronics applied to the car (80 hours).
• UF1100: Vehicle engine start system maintenance (50 hours).
• UF1101: Maintenance of the load system with alternator (50 hours).
• UF0917: (Transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MF0627_2: Vehicle auxiliary electrical circuits (150 hours).
• UF1102: Maintenance of lighting and signalling systems (50 hours).
• UF1103: Maintenance of electric housing devices and motor chest (30 hours).
• UF1104: Maintenance of multiplexed networks (40 hours).
• UF0917: (Transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MF0628_2: Vehicle security and comfort systems (140 hours).
• UF1105: Maintenance of safety systems and driving support (40 hours).
• UF1106: Maintenance of air conditioning system (40 hours).
• UF1107: Assembly and maintenance of audio, video and telecommunications equipment (30 hours).
• UF0917: (Transversal) Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MP0230: Non-working professional practice module for the Maintenance of Electrical and Electronic Systems of Vehicles (80 hours).
Linking with professional trainings
The training established in the training unit UF0917 of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the qualification for the performance of the functions of prevention of occupational risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the services of prevention, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
The personal accreditation for the marketing and handling of fluorinated gases and equipment based on them in vehicles, will be obtained by overcoming the contents established in the training unit UF1106 "Maintenance of the air conditioning system", of this certificate of professionalism, as provided in Royal Decree 795/2010, of June 16.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Naming: MAINTAINING VEHICLE LOAD AND BOOT SYSTEMS
Level: 2
Code: UC0626_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform the diagnosis of faults in the vehicle load and start systems, using the technical documentation and measuring and control instruments, in suitable safety conditions.
CR1.1 The necessary information about the system to be maintained and allow its location and identification in an unambiguous way in the vehicle is selected from the technical documentation of the same.
CR1.2 The instruments or diagnosis.
CR1.3 The equipment to be used is selected in such a way as to enable the repair or replacement process to be carried out by the control of the electrical circuits.
CR1.4 In the diagnosis of the breakdown the possible causes of the same are determined by a reasoned process of cause-effect.
CR1.5 The causes of the breakdown are confirmed by appropriate reproduction of the fault or the implementation of the corrective measures.
CR1.6 The different repair alternatives are evaluated when appropriate.
CR1.7 The diagnosis will be performed without causing other breakdowns or damage.
CR1.8 The data obtained by the electronic management units are interpreted to make the diagnosis of the fault.
RP2: Maintain the load and boot circuits by adjusting the required parameters to achieve the required functionality.
CR2.1 The defective element is replaced by resetting the circuit functionality and, in case of repair, ensures its reliability.
CR2.2 The operation parameters of the alternator-regulator are verified in the test bench, checking that they are the ones stipulated by the manufacturer.
CR2.3 The characteristic curves of the starter motor are obtained by the bank tests and are compared with those given by the manufacturer.
CR2.4 The boot engine coupling system is proven to work correctly and, in the required cases, the appropriate adjustments are made.
CR2.5 The battery charge and discharge parameters are checked as stipulated by the manufacturer, after checking the status of the connections.
CR2.6 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used, are performed according to technical specifications.
RP3: Perform the assembly of new equipment in the load and boot systems, carrying out the necessary modifications and/or installations, and adjusting to the specific regulations.
CR3.1 The modification made is proven not to cause anomalies in the original installations, or negative interactions in the operation of other systems (electronic noise, mass loops, among others).
CR3.2 The chosen conductors, the joints made and other electrical elements used are verified to be in line with technical specifications.
CR3.3 The new installation or modification of the previous one is proven to meet and comply with the application regulations and specifications set by the manufacturer.
CR3.4 The installed equipment is verified to work according to the specifications set by the manufacturer.
CR3.5 The energy balance is calculated after the assembly of new equipment and it is verified that it is not negative.
CR3.6 The installation is located and fixed on the body, checking that it is not going to produce noises or deteriorate.
RP4: Verify the operation of circuits (drivers, connections, and other elements) after choosing the appropriate means of testing.
CR4.1 The measuring instrument is chosen based on the operation to be performed, ensuring that it is well calibrated.
CR4.2 The working rules apply, with special care to avoid damage or deterioration of the measuring instrument (adequate selection of the scale, measurement of resistance without tension in the circuit, among others).
CR4.3 The measurement point is chosen conveniently, using the relevant electrical scheme for this purpose.
CR4.4 The welded joints and the connection of electrical terminals are performed according to established procedures, checking that they do not present oxides, sulfates or any other type of deterioration.
CR4.5 Electrical and digital signal drivers are found to be undamaged, taking appropriate measures to prevent damage.
CR4.6 The measurement parameters obtained verify that the conductors meet the prescribed operating conditions.
RP5: Run all maintenance operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR5.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR5.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective safety standards.
CR5.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Combined Bank for electrical tests, oscilloscopes, polymeters, manufacturer-specific tools, small material (cables, terminal connectors, resistors, among others), simulator and assembly panels, models. Charging circuits (alternators, electromechanical and electronic regulators). Boot circuits (conventional, sliding induced, central demultiplication, among others).
Products and results
Preventive, predictive, corrective and installation maintenance of new equipment. Disassembly and assembly of electrical elements or assemblies. Adjustment, control and measurement of parameters. Handling of equipment.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original values are given. Cutting manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Computer media. Work orders.
Competition Unit 2
Name: MAINTAIN VEHICLE AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Level: 2
Code: UC0627_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Perform the diagnosis of breakdowns in the auxiliary electrical systems of the vehicle, using the technical documentation and measuring and control instruments, in suitable safety conditions.
CR1.1 The necessary information about the system to be maintained and allow its location and identification in an unambiguous way in the vehicle is selected from the technical documentation of the same.
CR1.2 The instruments or equipment to be used are selected in such a way as to enable the diagnosis process to be carried out.
CR1.3 The checkup of the various electrical parameters determines the system to be maintained and the elements to be repaired or replaced.
CR1.4 In the diagnosis of the breakdown the possible causes of the same are determined by a reasoned process of cause-effect.
CR1.5 The causes of the breakdown are confirmed by appropriate reproduction of the fault or the implementation of the corrective measures.
CR1.6 The different repair alternatives are evaluated when appropriate.
CR1.7 The diagnosis will be performed without causing other breakdowns or damage.
CR1.8 The data obtained by the electronic management units are interpreted to make the diagnosis of the fault.
RP2: Repair and/or replace elements or assemblies of the lighting and manoeuvring circuits and signalling, thereby restoring its previous operating conditions.
CR2.1 The defective element is replaced by resetting the system functionality and, in case of repair, ensures its reliability.
CR2.2 The intervention is carried out in a way that does not cause deterioration in the working area near, disassembled and mounted correctly and without damaging the elements of the guarnished, aesthetic or other.
CR2.3 The controls and the adjustment of parameters on circuits and equipment are performed in such a way as to ensure compliance with the regulations.
CR2.4 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used, are performed according to technical specifications.
RP3: Maintain control and auxiliary circuits according to manufacturer's specifications.
CR3.1 The elements of the different circuits are mounted, dismounted, and/or replaced, with the functionality of the system being restored in all cases.
CR3.2 The different acoustic elements are checked to work within the set parameters, adjusting their sonority in the required cases.
CR3.3 The repairs of the electric motors, electromagnets and sensors are carried out in a way that ensures the reliability of the various elements.
CR3.4 The values indicated by the measurement instruments of the different parameters, are found to match the actual values (fuel, temperature, speed, or other), adjusting in the necessary cases.
CR3.5 The operation of the control elements is checked, replacing them in the required cases.
CR3.6 The command unit is ensured to meet the functions set by the manufacturer.
RP4: Perform the assembly of new equipment in the auxiliary electrical circuits, carrying out the necessary modifications and/or installations, adjusting to the regulations.
CR4.1 The modification made is proven not to cause anomalies in the original installations, or negative interactions in the operation of other systems (electronic noise, mass loops, among others).
CR4.2 The chosen conductors, the joints made and the other electrical elements used are verified by checking that they comply with the technical specifications.
CR4.3 The modification that is made or the new installation is proven to meet and respect all legal aspects and manufacturer's specifications.
CR4.4 The installed equipment is checked to work according to the specifications set by the manufacturer.
CR4.5 The energy balance, after the assembly of new equipment, is calculated by checking that it is not negative.
CR4.6 The installation is located and fixed on the body, checking that it is not going to produce noises or deteriorate.
RP5: Run all maintenance operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR5.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR5.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective safety standards.
CR5.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Polimeters, manufacturer-specific useful. Oscilloscope. Equipment for the setting of headlamps. Small material (cables, terminal connectors, resistors, among others). Lighting, manoeuvring and signalling circuits. Control and auxiliary circuits (fuel indicator, windscreen wipers, among others).
Products and results
Preventive, predictive, corrective and installation maintenance of new equipment. Disassembly and assembly of electrical elements or assemblies. Adjustment, control and measurement of parameters. Handling of equipment.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original values are given. Cutting manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Computer media. Work orders.
Competition Unit 3
Naming: MAINTAINING VEHICLE SAFETY AND COMFORT SYSTEMS
Level: 2
Code: UC0628_2
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Maintain and/or mount different systems related to temperature control in the compartment, under safety conditions.
CR1.1 The heating and ventilation systems are proven to have the required functionality, keeping in the room the required temperature and ensuring the ventilation thereof.
CR1.2 In the cooling systems, the tightness is verified, and in the necessary cases, it is backed out with the appropriate means.
CR1.3 The recharging of the air conditioning and air conditioning circuit is carried out with the appropriate equipment, and the pressure takes are carried out at the pre-fixed points, following the technical sequence stipulated by the manufacturer, respecting the safety, environmental and personal standards.
CR1.4 The various regulatory elements are verified to maintain the pressures stipulated in the circuit within the established margins.
CR1.5 The values of the output air pressure and temperature parameters are checked by verifying that they comply with the prescribed efficiency of the air conditioning and air conditioning equipment.
CR1.6 The capacitor electrofan is connected and disconnected in the pressure range set by the manufacturer.
CR1.7 The maintenance of filters (antipollen, anti-pollution, or other) is performed according to the manufacturer's instructions.
CR1.8 The installation of new equipment is verified to meet the technical specifications and the location sites recommended by the manufacturer are respected for the different elements, without interfering with the operation of other systems.
CR1.9 On electronically governed systems it is verified that the temperature achieved matches the selected one.
RP2: Mount sound and communication equipment in the vehicle and keep the installation of the same.
CR2.1 The installation of the sound and communication equipment is performed according to the customer's criteria and technical specifications of the manufacturer.
CR2.2 The equipment is mounted and maintained without producing deterioration in the upholstered and garnishes, respecting the original characteristics of the vehicle.
CR2.3 The transmission and reception equipment is installed in compliance with the current law, ensuring that no interference occurs in other systems or vice versa.
CR2.4 The equipment is mounted ensuring the agreement of technical characteristics of the different elements to each other.
CR2.5 The installed sound and/or communication equipment is checked to give the expected response, and it conforms to the capabilities set by the equipment manufacturer.
CR2.6 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used, are performed according to technical specifications.
RP3: Maintain and/or mount security systems, both of persons and of goods complying with technical specifications.
CR3.1 The type of alarm is selected taking into account the perimeter and volumetric protection requested by the client, and its assembly is carried out according to the technical requirements of the manufacturer.
CR3.2 The operation of the alarm system is verified in its different phases (connected, disconnected, fired and disconnected), observing the lights, flashing, "leds" of signaling, of operation and the emission of acoustic signals.
CR3.3 In the remote control it is proven that it activates the various phases of the alarm and acts on the centralized closures and, if necessary, on the lifts.
CR3.4 The different self-diagnosis tests of the electronics plant are performed to check the absence of breakdowns.
CR3.5 The installation of the alarm is carried out with respect to the characteristics of the vehicle (guards, upholstered, among others), verifying that its operation does not interfere in other systems of the same.
CR3.6 The interventions in the passive safety systems (air-bag, suitors, among others) are carried out in compliance with the technical specifications of the manufacturer, and strictly respecting the safety standards.
RP4: Perform maintenance of peripheral systems and associated facilities, as well as the eventual entertainment of onboard computers and other information systems.
CR4.1 The correct use of the various diagnostic and electronic vehicle management equipment is proven to reproduce the cycle stipulated by the manufacturer.
CR4.2 The different elements that make up the system of computer peripherals (sensors, conductors, or others) are checked with the appropriate means, replacing them in the necessary cases.
CR4.3 The calibration and erasure of memory of the computer's history is performed in compliance with the technical specifications established by the manufacturer.
RP5: Run all maintenance operations in accordance with workplace risk prevention rules.
CR5.1 The risks inherent in the specific work are extracted from the safety standards of the workshop, and it is proven that the measures of personal and collective protection are fulfilled.
CR5.2 The work area remains risk-free, respecting personal and collective safety standards.
CR5.3 Contingencies are communicated as soon as necessary to enable them to be monitored and resolved.
Professional Context
Production media
Thermometers, manometers, air conditioning system recharge equipment, fluid leak detectors, polymer, useful and equipment specific to the manufacturer. Vehicles with room temperature control systems (heating, air conditioning, air conditioning), sound and communication systems, security systems of persons and goods ("airbag", alarms, among others), information systems and computer systems (electronic management systems, among others).
Products and results
Preventive, predictive, corrective and installation maintenance of new equipment. Disassembly and assembly of security and comfort elements or assemblies. Adjustment, control and measurement of parameters. Handling of equipment.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals, with partial drawings where original values are given. Cutting manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Computer media. Work orders.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
Naming: CHARGING AND STARTING SYSTEMS FOR VEHICLES AND BASIC ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
Code: MF0626_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0626_2: Maintain vehicle load and boot systems.
Duration: 210 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: ELECTRICITY, ELECTROMAGNETISM, AND ELECTRONICS APPLIED TO THE AUTOMOBILE
Code: UF1099
Duration: 80hours
Competition Referrer: This training unit corresponds to the RP1, RP2, RP3, and RP4 as regards the basic knowledge of electricity and electronics.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Apply the most relevant laws and rules of electricity to the resolution of electric current circuits.
CE1.1 Define the measures and units of measurement associated with the electrical phenomenon.
CE1.2 Explain the most common laws and rules of use applicable to the analysis and resolution of electrical circuits.
CE1.3 Explain the graphical symbology of electrical schemes.
CE1.4 Identify the electrical schemes of the circuits in the corresponding manuals.
CE1.5 Locate and identify the elements in the corresponding schema.
CE1.6 Explain the phenomenon of current generation by electrochemical effect.
CE1.7 Identify the elements that make up a battery.
C2: Describe the basic principles of electromagnetism.
CE2.1 Explain the phenomenon of electrical current generation by electromagnetic means.
CE2.2 Analyze the operation of the various electromagnetic elements of a vehicle (relays, sensors, motors, electrovalves, horns, ignition coils, etc.)
CE2.3 Explain the unwanted effects produced by electromagnetic inductions within the wiring.
CE2.4 Explain the phenomenon of electromagnetic emissions of electrical circuits and their disturbances in electronic circuits.
C3: Analyze the functionality of basic electronic-electronic assemblies, related to different vehicle systems.
CE3.1 Explain the functionality and properties of different components of an electronic circuit.
CE3.2 Describe applications of basic electronic-electronic assemblies.
CE3.3 Calculate the parameters of the circuit components.
CE3.4 Describe the most common sensors and actuators, and the application thereof in the corresponding electronic circuits.
CE3.5 Describe the principles of logic electronics and their application to the digital technique.
C4: Successfully handle electrical equipment (polymeters, oscilloscopes, diagnostic equipment, etc.) used in the maintenance of vehicle systems.
CE4.1 Identify typical characteristics of measuring devices (range, sensitivity, accuracy, etc.).
CE4.2 Interpret technical documentation of equipment, measuring devices, and diagnostic means.
CE4.3 Calibrate and adjust the measuring devices.
CE4.4 Measure the parameters of the circuits by determining the connection of the measuring device
C5: Carry out basic electrical circuit assemblies, using the required electrical/electronic elements, on a model or vehicle panel.
CE5.1 Make the necessary calculations for the selection of the materials.
CE5.2 Define the materials required to perform the installations.
CE5.3 Explain the rules and methods used in performing the circuits.
CE5.4 Explain the rules of use and security specific to the mounted circuit.
CE5.5 Logical Sequence of Operations for the Realization of Circuits.
CE5.6 Connect to the circuit the appropriate means of measurement and interpret, in the answer of the analysis, the measures obtained.
CE5.7 Check the functionality of the performed circuit.
Contents
1. Electricity applied to vehicle load and start systems
-Measures and Units
-Electric load. Condenser
-Electricity classes. Static and dynamic electricity.
-Electric field
-Electrical power
-Potential difference
-Current Intensity.
-Effects of the electrical current
-Electrical resistance
-Ohm Law
-Power and Power
-Joule Effect
2. Resolution and measurement of continuous stream basic circuits
-Application of the Ohm Law
-Serial, parallel, and mixed-coupling resistances
-Kirchoff Laws
-Serial, parallel, and mixed condensers
-Energy stored by a capacitor
3. Electrical and electronic measuring devices
-Test Lamp
-Polymeter types
-Polymeter applications
-The oscilloscope and its handling
-Diagnostic teams
4. Electromagnetism applied to vehicle load and start systems
-Motion production by electromagnetic effect.
-Power production procedure by rotating motion.
-The induction transformer applied to the ignition of the gasoline engine.
-Electromagnetic and inductive disturbances in the electronic circuits of the automobile. How to neutralize them at source and how to immunize electronic systems.
5. Electrical and electronic components technology
-Fuses and intensity limiters
-Resistance and reostats
-Dependent or special resistance
-Condensers
-Rels
-Semiconductor diodes
-Transistors
-Tyristors
-IGBT's
-Operational Amplifiers
-Microprocessor Notions
6. Provision of the electrical installation. Wired
-Electrical Cables and Fixes
-Connection and fuse box
-Electrical drivers
-Terminals and Connectors
-Electrical and flat symbology
-Interpretation of electrical schemes
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF THE VEHICLE ENGINE BOOT SYSTEM
Code: UF1100
Duration: 50hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP2 RP3, and RP4 as regards engine boot systems.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Maintain the boot engine and the elements associated with the boot circuit in an appropriate manner to its characteristics.
CE1.1 Replace the induced, stator, brushes, and boot relay.
CE1.2 Replace defective cabling and other system elements.
CE1.3 Test the test bench boot engine and replace the defective items.
CE1.4 Get the characteristics curves of the boot engine by checking that their values match the values specified.
CE1.5 Realization of the boot circuit on panel or model, making its assembly according to technical specifications of schemes and calculations made.
C2: Identify breakdowns of the electrical start-up system, analyzing the operation of the electrical system, using the appropriate equipment, means and diagnostic techniques.
CE2.1 Select and interpret technical documentation on the boot circuit.
CE2.2 Describe the characteristics and constitution of the boot circuits by performing a system sketch.
CE2.3 Identify and describe the key points and parameters to be measured to perform the appropriate tests based on the breakdown symptoms.
CE2.4 Check the elements by following a logical sequence of diagnosis and meeting technical specifications.
CE2.5 Play as far as possible the breakdown by acting on the supposed causes.
CE2.6 Explain the causes of the breakdown and the process of correcting it.
CE2.7 Elaborate the reason-effect-effect tables of the breakdowns.
C3: Operate with specific materials, equipment, tools and tools, according to established and streamlined processes, necessary to develop the maintenance of load and boot systems.
CE3.1 Set the correct sequence of the unmount and mount operations of the sets and elements.
CE3.2 Successfully use test and measurement equipment as well as diagnostic means.
CE3.3 Check for the accuracy of the measurements of the tarred settings.
Contents
1. Boot engine
-Start engine operating principle
-Counter-electromotive force in the boot engines
-Boot engine components
-Coaxial and sliding-induced boot engine
-Booting and running the boot engine
-Boot engine command systems
-Reducing and Gear System
-Features of the boot engines
-Curves features of the boot engines
-Nominal voltage and power of the boot engines
2. Boot Circuit
-Features and constitution
-Technical documentation for the boot circuit
-Key points and parameters
3. Verification and control of the boot system
-Installing, using, and maintaining the boot engines
-Verification of the boot circuit
-Verification and control of the components of the starter motor (induced, stator, brush cap, others)
-Bank and vehicle boot engine tests
4. Maintenance of boot systems
-Specific materials, equipment, tools and tools for the maintenance of load and boot systems.
-Test and Measurement Equipment
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: MAINTAINING LOAD SYSTEM WITH ALTERNATOR
Code: UF1101
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP1, RP2 RP3, and RP4 as regards the electric charging systems of the vehicles.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Maintain the electrical charging system in an appropriate manner to its characteristics.
CE1.1 Replace the rotor, stator, brushes, and the alternator diodes plate.
CE1.2 Test the alternator on test bench and replace the defective items.
CE1.3 Get the alternate features of the alternator by checking that they match their values with those specified.
CE1.4 Perform the electrical charge of the battery boot and standard downloads to evaluate your status.
CE1.5 Perform the load circuit on a panel or model, making it assembly according to technical specifications of the schemes and calculations made.
C2: Identify breakdowns of the electric charging system, analyzing the operation of the electric system, using the appropriate equipment, means and diagnostic techniques.
CE2.1 Select and interpret technical documentation on the load circuit.
CE2.2 Describe the characteristics and constitution of the load circuits with alternator by performing a system sketch.
CE2.3 Identify and describe the key points and parameters to be measured to perform the appropriate tests based on the breakdown symptoms.
CE2.4 Check the elements by following a logical sequence of diagnosis and meeting technical specifications.
CE2.5 Play as far as possible the breakdown by acting on the supposed causes.
CE2.6 Explain the causes of the breakdown and the process of correcting it.
CE2.7 Elaborate the reason-effect-effect tables of the breakdowns.
CE2.8 Put in charge a group of accumulators with different modes of connection between them and check their operating state.
C3: Operate with specific materials, equipment, tools and tools, according to established and streamlined processes, necessary to develop the maintenance of the load system.
CE3.1 Get the correct sequence of the unmount and mount operations of the sets and elements.
CE3.2 Use test and measurement equipment correctly.
CE3.3 Expose in the measures of the tarred settings.
CE3.4 Get the characteristic curves by checking that their values match the values specified.
C4: Specify a small modification or a new installation to be carried out on the vehicle load system, selecting the materials, components and elements necessary to perform it.
CE4.1 Define the load circuit from the vehicle scheme.
CE4.2 Perform the necessary calculations to select the materials.
CE4.3 Determine the materials required for the installation.
CE4.4 Successfully connect the elements that make up the load circuit.
CE4.5 Connect correctly to the circuit the precise apparatus, to perform the appropriate measurement.
CE4.6 Recognize the parameters to be measured in the circuits.
CE4.7 Check that the system works according to the criteria set.
Contents
1. Accumulators for automobiles
-Disolutions and electrolytes
-The electrolysis
-Accumulator Battery
-Structure and components of a lead accumulator,
-Loading and unloading a battery
-Battery electrical characteristics
2. Loading and verifying accumulators
-Transformers
-Battery chargers
-Fast and training loads
-Recommendations for loading accumulators
-Spontaneous downloading and overloading of a accumulator
-Measure of electrolyte density
-Battery voltage measurement
-Installing new accumulators
-Evolution of boot batteries
-Verification and control of batteries
-Maintenance of accumulators
-Accumulators Averies
3. Load circuit with alternator
-Load Circuit
-Principle of operation of the alternator
-Alternator structure and components
-Operation of the alternator
-Operation of the rectifier bridge
-Excitation circuit
-Alternate features of the alternator
-Power balance of the alternator
-Alternator runs: types
4. Load Regulators
-Need of regulation
-Contact Regulators
-Electronic help for contact regulators
-Fully transistorized electronic regulators
-Electronic regulators built into the alternator
-New Generation Electronic Regulators
5. Verification and control of the load system
-Installing and maintaining the alternator
-Bank alternator test
-Verification and control of the alternator
-Verification and control of the regulator
-Full load circuit verification
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Denomination: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP5
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
-Work accident.
-Professional illness.
-Other pathologies derived from work.
-Economic and operational impacts.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
-The labor risk prevention law.
-The prevention services regulation.
-Scope and legal bases.
-Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
-National agencies.
-Autonomous bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
-In the handling of tools and equipment.
-In handling systems and installations.
-In the storage and transport of loads.
-Exposure to physical, chemical or biological agents.
-The fire.
-Physical fatigue.
-Mental fatigue.
-Job dissatisfaction.
-Collective protection.
-Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1099 | 80 | 40 |
|
Unit 2-UF1100 | 50 | 20 |
| 20 | 20 | |
| 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
To access the Formative Units 2 and 3, the Formative Unit 1 must have been exceeded. The Formative units 2, 3 and 4 can be programmed independently.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Name: VEHICLE AUXILIARY ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS
Code: MF0627_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0627_2: Maintain vehicle auxiliary electrical circuits.
Duration: 150 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF LIGHTING AND SIGNALLING SYSTEMS
Code: UF1102
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP2, RP3, and RP4 as regards lighting and signalling circuits.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the operation and identify the faults of the exterior lighting systems (population, crossing, road, fog, etc) of the vehicle using appropriate diagnostic techniques and equipment.
CE1.1 Explain the operation of exterior lighting, as well as the different systems and elements that compose it by interpreting diagrams and drawing croquis of the circuits if necessary.
CE1.2 Choose and configure the most appropriate control and measurement means for each type of circuit to be checked.
CE1.3 Discover operational breakdowns by analyzing the causes and reproducing the effects by acting on them using the most appropriate means.
CE1.4 Unmount and mount the elements that make up the system in order to be able to replace the element that is broken, respecting the manufacturer's requirements and safety standards.
CE1.5 Set a historical file to record the experiences acquired in the repair to facilitate the work in future breakdowns.
C2: Describe the operation and identify the faults of the interior lighting systems (housing, guantera, doors, reading spot, etc.) of the vehicle using suitable diagnostic techniques and equipment.
CE2.1 Explain the operation of the interior lighting system and the elements that compose it, and interpreting the layout and drawing of the circuits if necessary, taking into account the conditions of the lighting and the power-off and the timing and ramps if any.
CE2.2 Discover operational breakdowns by analyzing the causes and reproducing the effects by acting on them and using the most appropriate means.
CE2.3 Unmount and mount the elements that make up the system in order to be able to replace the element that is broken, following the manufacturer's instructions and safety standards.
CE2.4 Set a historical file to record the experiences acquired in the repair to facilitate the work in future breakdowns.
C3: Analyze the operation and identify the faults of the external signalling systems (intermittent, emergency lights, stop, acoustic indicator, etc.) of the vehicle using appropriate diagnostic techniques and equipment.
CE3.1 Explain the operation of the exterior signaling and its systems and components, interpreting schemas and drawing croquis of the circuits if necessary.
CE3.2 Discover operational breakdowns by analyzing the causes and reproducing the effects by acting on them.
CE3.3 Unmount and mount the elements that make up the system in order to be able to replace the item that is broken down.
CE3.4 Set a historical file to record the experiences acquired in the repair to facilitate the work in future breakdowns.
C4: Describe the operation and identify the faults of the internal signalling systems (witnesses, odometers, buzzers, messages on the screen, word synthesis) of the vehicle using appropriate diagnostic techniques and equipment.
CE4.1 Analyze the lighting systems explaining the constitution and operating characteristics of the different systems, as well as the elements that compose it by interpreting diagrams and drawing croquis of the circuits if necessary.
CE4.2 Discover operational breakdowns by analyzing the causes and reproducing the effects by acting on them.
CE4.3 Unmount and mount the elements that make up the system in order to be able to replace the item that is broken down.
CE4.4 Set a historical file to record the experiences acquired in the repair to facilitate the work in future breakdowns.
C5: Maintain and/or replace elements or assemblies of the lighting and manoeuvring circuits and signalling, thereby restoring their previous operating conditions.
CE5.1 The defective element is replaced by resetting the functionality of the system and ensures its functionality.
CE5.2 The intervention is carried out in such a way that it does not cause deterioration in the work area near, disassembled and mounted correctly and without damaging the elements of the guarnished, aesthetic or other.
CE5.3 The controls and the adjustment of parameters on circuits and equipment are carried out in such a way as to ensure compliance with the regulations.
CE5.4 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used, are carried out according to technical specifications.
Contents
1. External lighting and car signage
-Fotometry and units of measurement
-Asymmetric beam lighting
-Faros. Arrangement of headlamps
-Halogen Lamp and Other Types
-Position, stop, and reverse lights
-Intermitency Lights
-Additional Fars
-Lighting installation
-Effects of voltage variation on the lighting circuit
-Electronic help for the lighting circuit:
▫ Auto-on of position lights
▫ Acoustic light warning
▫ Automatic change to the crosswalk
▫ Fotorresistors LDR
-Regulation of headlamps
-Verification and control of the lighting circuit.
-Intermitter Circuit
-Electronic intermitment center
-Emergency intermittent device
2. Power-to-drive electrical devices
-The claxon. Arrangement of the horns
-Verification and control of the claxon circuit.
-Wipers. Automatic stop devices
-Two or more speeds
-Intermittent Wiper Device
-Verification and control of wiper systems
-Lava windscreen
-Clean-lava lunets and clean-lava projectors
-Current auxiliary Tomas.
3. Board board and travel computer
-Control indicators
-Fuel Level Indicator
-Other level indicators (hydraulic brake circuit, oil level indicator, cooling liquid level indicator)
-Oil Pressure and Temperature Indicators
-refrigerant liquid temperature indicators
-Other acoustic and light warning devices
-Velocimeter and storytellers
-Set of dashboard
-Travel Computer
-Verification and control of the dashboard.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Denomination: MAINTENANCE OF THE ELECTRIC HOUSING AND ENGINE COFRE DEVICES
Code: UF1103
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP3, and RP4 as regards auxiliary electrical circuits.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the operation and identify the breakdowns of the electrical devices of the passenger compartment and the vehicle engine using suitable diagnostic techniques and equipment.
CE1.1 Analyze the auxiliary devices explaining the constitution and operating characteristics of the different systems, as well as the elements that compose it by interpreting diagrams and drawing croquis of the circuits if necessary.
CE1.2 Discover operational breakdowns by analyzing the causes and reproducing the effects by acting on them.
CE1.3 Unmount and mount the elements that make up the system in order to be able to replace the item that is broken down.
CE1.4 Set a historical file to record the experiences acquired in the repair to facilitate the work in future breakdowns.
C2: Maintain and/or replace elements or assemblies of the electrical auxiliary devices of the housing and engine, thereby restoring its previous operating conditions.
CE2.1 The defective element is replaced by resetting the functionality of the system and ensures its functionality.
CE2.2 The intervention is carried out in such a way that it does not cause deterioration in the working area near, disassembled and mounted correctly and without damaging the elements of the guarnished, aesthetic or other.
CE2.3 The controls and the adjustment of parameters on circuits and equipment are carried out in such a way as to ensure compliance with the regulations.
CE2.4 The basic maintenance operations of the work equipment and tools, as well as the facilities used, are carried out according to technical specifications.
C3: Perform the assembly of new equipment in the auxiliary electrical circuits, carrying out the necessary modifications and/or installations, adjusting to the regulations.
CE3.1 The modification made is proven not to cause anomalies in the original installations, nor negative interactions in the operation of other systems (electronic noise, mass loops, among others).
CE3.2 The chosen conductors, the joints made and the other electrical elements used are verified by checking that they comply with the technical specifications.
CE3.3 The modification that is made or the new installation is proven to meet and respect all legal aspects and specifications of the manufacturer.
CE3.4 The installed equipment is checked to work according to the specifications set by the manufacturer.
CE3.5 The installation is located and fixed on the body, checking that it is not going to produce noises or deteriorate.
Contents
1. Electrical devices of the compartment
-Door electromagnetic locks
-Electric lift systems
-Courtesy lights and inner room lighting
-Cigarette-Encender and Time Clock
-Security belt alarm systems
-Alarm and anti-theft systems
2. Power-of-engine electrical devices
-Fuel electric pump
-Cooling fan engine
-Spark distributor, spark plug cables
-Caldeo plugs for diesel engines
-Electromagnetic-Embrague
-Electromagnetic Brake
3. Cabling and Protections
-Electrical Cabling. Protective tapes. Connectors.
-Connection and fuse box
-Electrical Schemes
-Mass Circuit
-Fuses and intensity limiters
-Deworming and suppression of interference.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: MAINTAINING MULTIPLEXED NETWORKS
Code: UF1104
Duration: 40 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP2, and RP3 regarding new data transmission and cabling typologies.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Interpret the technical documentation (multiplexed network topography, electrical schemes and bus tracking through them), identify the electronic systems connected to the bus and the general functionality of each one to determine, in each case the signals they receive from different sensors and those that they exchange with other systems.
CE1.1 Explain the data multiplexing phenomenon
CE1.2 Conversion of binary data value (bit and byte)
CE1.3 General features of the various protocols used in automotive
CE1.4 Means used for data transmission (the bus).
CE1.5 Frame Notion and Time Valuation used in the transmission of this according to the speed of the protocol used.
C2: Diagnose, analyze and repair faults of electronically controlled systems in the various automobiles equipped with multiplexed networks by selecting and using the most suitable means for this.
CE2.1 Identify the breakdown and choose the most appropriate means of measurement and self-diagnosis for your analysis.
CE2.2 Get and interpret the information and parameters provided by the self-diagnostic team
CE2.3 Recognize the parameters that affect the existing problem.
CE2.4 Relating the mechanical parameters to be controlled with the electrical signals developed by the means of self-diagnosis.
CE2.5 Correct the detected problem and check that it has been solved by using the self-diagnostic means, if necessary.
C3: Correct configuration and/or programming problems in the electronic systems that require it.
CE3.1 Describe the procedure to enable/disable functions that make up the configuration of a calculator.
CE3.2 Describe the procedure for updating the software version of a calculator.
Contents
1. Data transmission means. Multiplexed
-Data transmission modes
-Media and transmission paths:
▫ Cable, fiber optics
▫ Ultrasounds, infrared, radio-frequency ...
-Binary system. Encoding the data
-Generalities on Multiplexing of Information
-The digital information frame
-Auto Justification and Limitations
-More automotive employees protocols:
▫ I2C, KL, VAN, LIN, CAN, MOST, and FLEXRAY
2. CAN (Controller Area Network)
-CAN Protocol, its particularities
-Principles
-CAN Standard
3. Diagnostic, analysis and repair of vehicles equipped with CAN bus
-General architecture.
-Reading memory and diagnosing failures.
-Dynamic sign record.
-Configuring the multiplexed network.
-Modifying the configuration on the systems that allow it.
-Updating the software version of the calculators and code learning.
-OBD (On Board Diagnostic).
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Denomination: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP5
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
-Work accident.
-Professional illness.
-Other pathologies derived from work.
-Economic and operational impacts.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
-The labor risk prevention law.
-The prevention services regulation.
-Scope and legal bases.
-Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
-National agencies.
-Autonomous bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
-In the handling of tools and equipment.
-In handling systems and installations.
-In the storage and transport of loads.
-Exposure to physical, chemical or biological agents.
-The fire.
-Physical fatigue.
-Mental fatigue.
-Job dissatisfaction.
-Collective protection.
-Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1102 | 50 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF1103 | 30 | 10 |
| 40 | 20 |
|
| 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
Formative Units 1, 2, and 4 can be programmed independently.
To access the Formative Unit 3, the Formative Units 1 and 2 must have been exceeded.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 3
Naming: SAFETY AND VEHICLE COMFORT SYSTEMS
Code: MF0628_2
Professional qualification level: 2
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0628_2: Maintain vehicle security and comfort systems.
Duration: 140 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Denomination: MAINTENANCE OF SECURITY AND DRIVING SUPPORT SYSTEMS
Code: UF1105
Duration: 40 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP3 and RP4
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Describe the operation of auxiliary safety and driving support systems by analyzing their technical characteristics to perform component substitutions
Ce1.1 Reintroduce Systems Using Block Diagram, explaining how it works
CE1.2 Represent standardized electrical schemes for systems and their elements or assemblies
CE1.3 Explain the interrelations of the safety systems, of support to the driving and the motor-traction management.
C2: Operate with materials, equipment, tools and specific tools necessary to replace and/or repair the elements or equipment that configure the safety systems and support to the driving.
CE2.1 Set a dismount and mount sequence.
CE2.2 Perform disassembly and assembly of essential parts of the vehicle, according to the predetermined times and with the appropriate quality.
CE2.3 Check the electrical parameters of the power circuits of the security systems.
C3: Maintain peripheral systems and facilities related to safety systems and support for driving, as well as the maintenance of on-board computers and other information systems.
CE3.1 Describe the process of disassembling and assembling elements of the systems
CE3.2 Perform periodic maintenance prescribed by the manufacturer, using the appropriate tools.
CE3.3 Verify the operation of the circuit that has been intervened for maintenance.
CE3.4 Use the special verification teams correctly.
C4: Repair the breakdowns of the auxiliary safety systems and support to the driving according to the manufacturers ' guidelines and safety and occupational health standards.
CE4.1 Apply appropriate diagnosis techniques to the broken down system.
CE4.2 Describe the flow-effects of the most common breakdowns.
CE4.3 Unmount components and repair or replace the defective item. Rear assembly.
CE4.4 Check the safety and functionality parameters of the repaired systems, ensuring the quality of the repair and the restoration of safety.
Contents
1. Electronic vehicle safety systems
-Airbag, seat belts, sillitas anchor pretensioners, memory seats, chromatic electro mirrors, screen windscreen.
-Electronic braking aids (ABS and others)
2. Dynamic Driving Control Systems
-Traction Control Systems
-differential locking systems
-Anti-slip systems
-On-ramp help systems
3. Parking and parking support systems
-Distance Catch Systems
-Vehicle locking systems in parking
4. Technology of safety systems and support for driving
-Mission and Synoptic Operating
-Specific Capers
-Electric circuits.
-Associated hydraulic circuits.
-Special teams for verification and control
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: MAINTENANCE OF AIR CONDITIONING
Code: UF1106
Duration: 40 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Identify the components of the air conditioning system (ventilation, heating and air conditioning) by analyzing its operation, using the appropriate diagnostic techniques, equipment and means.
CE1.1 Describe ventilation and heating systems.
Ce1.2 Graphically reintroduce, using sketches or diagrams, system blocks.
CE1.3 Identify the systems and components in the vehicle or model.
CE1.4 Select specific equipment and tools required for assembly, disassembly, and verifications.
CE1.5 Perform logical sequence diagrams of the fault diagnosis process.
CE1.6 Describe the constitution of the air conditioning and air conditioning system using a block diagram explaining the operation of the system.
CE1.7 Explain the operation of each of the components.
CE1.8 Explain the process of emptying and loading of refrigerant, safety and environmental standards to be observed.
CE1.9 Identify the air conditioning or air conditioning system in the vehicle or model of the elements to be checked by selecting the parameters to be measured.
C2: Operate with materials, equipment, tools and specific tools necessary to replace and/or repair the elements or equipment that make up the air conditioning system.
CE2.1 Perform the disassembly and assembly of sets or elements of the systems
CE2.2 Perform system item checks.
CE2.3 Check the proper functioning of the air conditioning system, once both its hydraulic part and its electrical parts have been identified.
CE2.4 Perform operations according to technical specifications.
CE2.5 Apply the safety and environmental standards in the work processes.
CE2.6 Prepare and calibrate measuring equipment and instruments.
CE2.7 Make the connections of the test and reading equipment of the different parameters by giving the measurement values with the appropriate approach.
CE2.8 Successfully use the specific tool to mount or disassemble the elements that are part of the air conditioning and air conditioning system.
CE2.9 Detect coolant leaks from both refrigerant gases and liquid heat carriers and correct the detected leaks.
CE2.10 Handle vacuum pump, gauge bridge, recovery-recycling equipment for gases, scales and metering.
CE2.11 Thoroughly manipulate coolant load equipment, bottles, and service valves without causing any leakage into the atmosphere.
C3: Maintain the vehicle's air conditioning system and solve the breakdowns.
CE3.1 Perform periodic maintenance of the air conditioning system, change of filters, belt change, pressure checking, temperatures and operating parameters.
CE3.2 Perform the logical sequence diagram of the failure diagnostic process.
CE3.3 Compare the values of the parameters obtained in the checks with the given in technical documentation to determine the elements to be repaired or replaced.
CE3.4 Explain the causes of the breakdown and the correction process.
CE3.5 Perform, following the established procedure, the sequence of check, dismount, and mount operations.
CE3.6 Check the correct operation of electrical components with electrical measuring devices
CE3.7 Explain the safety and environmental standards of mandatory compliance regarding the repair of air conditioning and air conditioning system elements.
Contents
1. The air conditioning in vehicles
-Mission. Safer driving.
-Verano-Winter comfort conditions. External and internal loads.
-Temperature, relative humidity, air speed, and quality parameters.
-Climate processes: Cool, heat, dehumidize, renew and filter the air.
-Bloking of the solar radiation by the crystals.
-The basic outline of a climatizer. Functions of the floodgates.
-Multizone and/or multicircuito systems.
-Scales and temperature units.
-The heat and its units.
-Status changes. Sensitive and latent heat.
-Absolute and relative pressure. Pressure units.
-Fundamental gas laws.
-Theoretical cold cycle on Mollier diagram.
2. Environmental impact of refrigerants and relevant environmental regulations
-Climate change, Kyoto and Montreal protocols
-Depletion of ODP Ozone Layer.
-Atmospheric heating and greenhouse effect of the PCA gases.
-Using alternative refrigerants.
-European Regulation: Regulation (EC) No 1005/2009 of the European Parliament, Directive 2006 /40/EC of the European Parliament
Regulation (EC) No 842/2006-Spanish Regulations: Royal Decree 795/2010
3. The cold system, components and their characteristics refrigerant gases and lubricating oils
-Inline and axial piston compressors, paddle compressors, spiral compressors and variable cylinder compressors.
-Electromagnetic-Embrague.
-The condenser, heat exchange parts.
-The electrofan and its management. Position relative to the capacitor.
-Dehydrating filters and their relative position in the circuit.
-Liquid accumulators. Reevaporators and shock absorbers.
-L-type expansion valves with external sensor, type H with internal sensor, and OT-type expansion valves.
-The evaporator, heat exchange parts. Drainage.
-Manguages, fittings, O-rings, service valves, and safety valve.
-particle filters, activated carbon, plasma and antipollen filters.
-Thermodynamic properties of R-134 a and other gases used.
-Properties of lubricating oils. Polyolester and P.A.G.
-Bottles for the transport and storage of refrigerant gases.
-Handling and handling of refrigerant gases.
-Rules for the prohibition of discharges into the atmosphere.
-Refrigerant gas charging, recovery and recycling station.
-The manometer bridge integrated into the charging station.
-Forbidden use of old load stations and non-integrated bridges.
4. Control and control devices for air conditioning
-Basic electrical scheme. Fuses and main relays.
-Separate Presostats. Presostat trinary, quadinay. Pressure probes.
-Antiice termostat. Mechanical thermostats. PTC and NTC probes of external and housing temperature, temperature probe of air mixture and evaporation.
-Solar radiation probe. Relative humidity probes.
-Electronic fan speed variants.
-Electric motors and servo motors of air gates.
-Electrovalves and air-gate pneumatic actuators.
-Climaters panel.
-The organizational architecture of the air conditioning and communication with central motor management.
5. Diagnosis of breakdown and repair processes
-Extract all gas, weighing and recycling. Drainage of the extracted oil.
-Make empty on the circuit or separate components.
-Load oil or add oil to the system.
-Add contrate dye to detect leaks.
-Empty tightness control.
-Dry nitrogen tightness tests.
-Full load of the refrigerant gas.
-System temperature and performance checks.
-Partial load of refrigerant gas.
-Detection of leaks with electronic detector and by means of ultraviolet lamps.
-Replacing service valve shells.
-Most frequent Averies.
-Cause-effect tree. Workshop manuals.
-Diagnosis by means of pressure gauge bridge and temperatures.
-Menus of malfunctions incorporated in diagnostic machines.
-Removing system items for repair from other systems.
-Replacement or component repair procedures.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: MOUNTING ANDMAINTENANCE OF AUDIO, VIDEO, AND TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Code: UF1107
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This formative unit corresponds to the RP2
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Mount audio, video, and telecommunications equipment and maintain the installation of the same
CE1.1 Explain the characteristics of your computers and their installation using block diagrams
CE1.2 Describe the assembly and disassembly process of the equipment elements. CE1.3 Locate the components of the equipment correctly in the room
CE1.4 Make the power connection taking into account the protection of the circuit with the appropriate fuse.
CE1.5 Check the functionality of the system according to its capabilities.
C2: Operate with materials, equipment, tools and specific tools necessary to replace and/or repair the audio, video and telecommunications elements or equipment.
CE2.1 Perform the assembly of the equipment on a model or vehicle by analyzing the factors that will be involved in the assembly:
-Preinstallation of the manufacturer. New hardwired.
-Spaces available for the location of the items.
-Successfully position the speakers, displays, antenna, anti-parasitic capacitors, etc.
CE2.2 Use the appropriate measuring instruments.
CE2.3 Check the correct operation of the system.
CE2.4 Apply usage rules on equipment and media and security rules stipulated during the work process.
C3: Repair breakdowns in audio, video, and telecommunications equipment.
CE3.1 Employ diagnostic techniques appropriate to the broken down system.
CE3.2 Repair or replace equipment items.
CE3.3 Explain the causes and effects of the most common breakdowns.
CE3.4 Check the functionality of the system according to its capabilities.
Contents
1. Audio equipment
-Features of sound equipment and its technology.
-Preview, Amplification, and Equalization.
-Altboxes and boxes. Sound pressure and performance.
-Interpretation of assembly and cabling schemes.
2. Video and multimedia equipment.
-Features of video, multimedia and technology equipment.
-Screens and Interfaces for console video.
-Interpretation of assembly and cabling schemes.
3. Telecommunications equipment.
-Voice, message, tele help system.
-Guided systems via GPS.
-Communications via Bluetooth.
-Interpretation of assembly and cabling schemes.
FORMATIVE UNIT 4
Denomination: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP5
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.3 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the risks identified, including the correct handling of products and their storage, use of individual and collective protective equipment.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
-Work accident.
-Professional illness.
-Other pathologies derived from work.
-Economic and operational impacts.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
-The labor risk prevention law.
-The prevention services regulation.
-Scope and legal bases.
-Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
-National agencies.
-Autonomous bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
-In the handling of tools and equipment.
-In handling systems and installations.
-In the storage and transport of loads.
-Exposure to physical, chemical or biological agents.
-The fire.
-Physical fatigue.
-Mental fatigue.
-Job dissatisfaction.
-Collective protection.
-Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1105 | 40 | 20 | |
|
Unit 2-UF1106 | 40 | 10 | |
| 30 |
10 | ||
|
| 20 | 30 | 20 |
Sequence:
The training units for this module can be programmed independently.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
TRAINING MODULE FOR PROFESSIONAL NON-INDUSTRIAL MAINTENANCE OF VEHICLE ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
Code: MP0230
Duration: 80 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE1.1 Behave responsibly both in human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE1.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE1.3 Diligently undertake the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE1.4 Integrate into the production processes of the work center.
CE1.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE1.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
C2: Participate in customer support processes, accompanying the manager.
CE2.1 Log relevant data to perform maintenance and/or repair of the customer's electronic vehicle systems.
CE2.2 Handle in a real situation, work parts and repair technical manuals.
CE2.3 Fill in the work parts and albarans after the work has been done.
C3: Participate in warehouse management, parts ordering, and consumable products.
CE3.1 Perform the warehouse inventory, if any.
CE3.2 Fill in the documents used in the order items with the available means, scoring if the codes, quantities and denominations are required.
C4: Participate in the diagnosis and repair of electrical and electronic breakdowns of vehicles in a real situation.
Ce4.1 Diagnose and analyze the presented failures.
CE4.2 Perform the unmount and mount sequence of the involved elements.
CE4.3 Follow the guidelines established by the company or command staff, in relation to the repair procedures.
CE4.4 Perform relevant checks to ensure customer repair and to ensure the safety of the vehicle.
Contents
1. Integration and communication in the job center
-Responsible behavior in the job center.
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the workplace.
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received.
-Recognition of the organization's production process.
-Using the communication channels established in the job center.
-Adequation to the work rate of the company.
-Tracking the regulations for risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
2. Customer Care Processes
-Handling of personal data.
-Opening tab to the vehicle.
-I treat customers.
-Valuation of the information received.
3. Store Management
-Inventory.
-Store types and shelves.
-Handling of parts and consumable materials catalogs.
4. Vehicle maintenance and breakdown repair
-Data collection for maintenance.
-Data collection and diagnosis of breakdowns.
-Parts Request
-Fulfillment of work parts and albarans.
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS OF TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the field of the competency | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| If you have accreditation | If no accreditation is | ||
|
MF0626_2: Vehicle load and boot systems and basic electronic circuits | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent qualifications • Professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professional level 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical of vehicles of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0627_2: Vehicle auxiliary electrical circuits | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent qualifications • Professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professional level 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical of vehicles of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
|
MF0628_2: Vehicle security and comfort systems | • Industrial Engineer, Specialty in Mechanics • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree degree or other equivalent qualifications • Professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles • Certificates of professional level 3 of the professional area of Electromechanical of vehicles of the professional family of transport and maintenance of vehicles | 2 years | 4 years |
V. MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR SPACES, FACILITIES AND EQUIPMENT
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | ||
|---|---|---|---|
|
45 |
45 | 60 | |
|
Power Workshop | 200 | 300 |
| M1 | M2 | M3 | |
|---|---|---|---|
|
| X | X | X |
|
Power Workshop |
X |
X | X |
| Equipment | |
|---|---|
| Gétion Aula | -Audio-visual equipment -PCs installed in network, canon with projection, and Internet -Specialty specific software -2 Rotuder-write Pizarras -Rotafolios -Classroom material -Table and chair for the trainer -Table and chairs for students |
|
electricity workshop | -Vehicles for internships. -Teaching machines for electricity-electronic vehicles. -Teaching machines for electronic power systems, active and passive safety systems, comfort and communication systems between units of control. -Oscyloscopes -Bank-alternator verification equipment and boot engines -Polimeters -Test Lamp. -Electronic system diagnosis equipment. -Electronic system diagnosis software. -Battery loader -Battery checker. -Pressure and vacuum equipment. -Headlight adjustment equipment. -Refrigerant gas charging, recovery and recycling station. -Refrigerant and waste gas bottles. -Electronic leak and ultraviolet detector. -Contact and infrared thermometers. -Work banks with screws. -Vehicle elevators -pneumatic and electrical impact gun equipment -Workcars for tools and parts -Games of all types of manual keys -Games of all types of pliers and jaws -Games of all types of special tips, torx, allen, etc -Games of all types of screwdrivers -Scaboca_body -Scabocaos -Scissors, cutters, and blades -All types of hammers, plastic and steel -Paper, film, tape. -Clean point, containers. Daily cleaning tools. -Store products and tools. Locker room with lockers. -Botiquin. -Specific installations: Compressed air line, Combustion Gas Aspiration. |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units that must be available for the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces, will be sufficient for a minimum of 15 students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to the higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
ANNEX XI
I. IDENTIFICATION OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Naming: PLANNING AND CONTROL OF THE BODY AREA
Code: TMVL0609
Professional family: Transportation and maintenance of vehicles.
Professional area: Vehicle bodywork
Professional qualification level: 3
Professional reference qualification:
TMV049_3: Body area planning and control (RD 295/2004 of February 20)
Relationship of competency units that configure the certificate of professionalism:
UC0134_3: Plan the repair processes for removable and fixed non-structural elements, controlling the execution of the same.
UC0135_3: Plan the vehicle structure repair processes, controlling the execution of the vehicle structures.
UC0136_3: Plan the processes of protection, preparation and beautification of surfaces, controlling the execution of the same.
UC0137_3: Manage vehicle maintenance and associated logistics, meeting criteria for efficiency, safety and quality.
General competition:
Organize, program, and monitor the execution of maintenance operations and their logistics in the area of the vehicle sector, drawing up budgets and appraisals and solving contingencies that may arise.
Professional Environment:
Professional scope:
Exercises its activity in the body area of large, medium and small companies engaged in the manufacture and maintenance of vehicles.
Productive Sectors:
Vehicle repair and maintenance workshops: automobiles, motorcycles, industrial vehicles, agricultural machinery, public works machinery.
Vehicle and component manufacturing companies.
Companies dedicated to the Technical Inspection of Vehicles.
Test labs for vehicle assemblies and subassemblies.
Companies engaged in the manufacture, sale and marketing of testing equipment, diagnosis and replacement of vehicles.
Fleet companies for rental vehicles, utilities, passenger and/or freight transportation.
Occupations or related jobs:
3160.1063 Quality control technician in automotive industries
7521.1129 Head of Mechanical Maintenance Workshop Equipment
3405.1030 Vehicle appraiser
4412.1048 Vehicle Receptionist
Head of body shop: sheet and paint
Workshop Manager
ITV Manager
Sales Manager
Duration of the associated training: 660 hours
Relationship of training modules and training units:
MF0134_3: Unstructural fixed and removable elements (180 hours).
• UF1250: Conforming metal elements (60 hours).
• UF1251: Repair and conformation of synthetic elements (40 hours).
• UF1252: Amovible and non-structural fixed elements (80 hours).
MF0135_3: Vehicle structures (130 hours).
• UF1253: Diagnosis of structural deformations (50 hours).
• UF1254: Repair or replacement of structural elements of vehicles (50 hours).
• UF1255: Carrosed planning and development and important reforms (30 hours).
MF0136_3: Preparation and beautification of surfaces (180 hours).
• UF1256: Planning, control and execution of protection, preparation and equalization of surfaces (60 hours).
• UF1257: Planning and control of the beautification and decoration processes of surfaces (60 hours).
• UF1258: Planning and control of defect correction processes in surface finishing and decoration (60 hours).
MF0137_3 (Transversal): Management and logistics in vehicle maintenance (130 hours).
• UF1259: Planning of vehicle maintenance and workload distribution processes (50 hours).
• UF1260: Management of the reception of vehicles (50 hours).
• UF0917: Prevention of occupational and environmental risks in vehicle maintenance (30 hours).
MP0263: Non-working professional practice module for Planning and Control of the body area (40 hours).
Linking with professional trainings:
The training established in the training unit UF0917 of the training module in MF0137_3 of this certificate of professionalism, guarantees the level of knowledge necessary to obtain the performance of the functions of the Prevention of Work Risks basic level, according to Annex IV of the regulation of the prevention services, approved by the Royal Decree 39/1997, of January 17.
II. PROFESSIONAL PROFILE OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
Competition Unit 1
Denomination: PLAN THE REPAIR PROCESSES FOR REMOVABLE AND NON-STRUCTURAL FIXED ELEMENTS BY CONTROLLING THE EXECUTION OF THEM
Level: 3
Code: UC0134_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Analyze the types of deformations in metal parts and select the repair method, equipment, and tools necessary for each element to retrieve the original shape and function.
CR1.1 Deformations detection techniques are applied correctly, and the magnitude and extent of the deformations are determined.
CR1.2 The most appropriate technical decisions and solutions are applied to ensure the final operability of the set.
CR1.3 Depending on the type of material (steel, special steels, aluminium) and the nature of the damage the work process is determined, selecting the tools, equipment and products to be used.
CR1.4 The possibilities for repair or replacement in terms of technical, quality, manufacturer's guidelines and economic issues are valued and evaluated.
CR1.5 The times invested in the operation are adjusted to the scales and rates.
CR1.6 The final quality obtained is checked to meet the criteria and recommendations in force.
RP2: Analyze the types of deformations in pieces of plastic or synthetic material and select the method of repair, equipment and tools necessary for each element to recover the original form and function.
CR2.1 Interpreting the corresponding characteristic code correctly, or failing to apply appropriate techniques (combustion tests or other), the type of material is identified.
CR2.2 The final operativity of the set is guaranteed by the adoption of the most appropriate technical decisions and solutions.
CR2.3 Depending on the type of material: (thermoplastics, thermosets or compounds) and the nature of the damage the work process is determined, selecting the tools, equipment and products to be used.
CR2.4 The times invested in the operation are adjusted to the scales and rates.
CR2.5 The possibilities for repair or replacement in terms of technical, quality, manufacturer's guidelines and economic issues are valued and evaluated.
CR2.6 The final quality obtained is checked to meet the criteria and recommendations in force.
RP3: Determine the processes of replacing parts or removable and fixed elements, selecting the equipment and materials to be used according to the type of union to be performed.
CR3.1 The manufacturer's technical information is correctly interpreted in relation to cutting, bonding techniques, marketing of the replacement and limitations of the operation.
CR3.2 Depending on the type and extent of the damage and the manufacturer's technical recommendations, it is decided whether a total or partial replacement of the affected element is performed.
CR3.3 The work process to be followed, as well as the tools, equipment and products to be used, is determined.
CR3.4 The times invested in the operation are adjusted to the scales and rates and/or ways and ways of the good.
CR3.5 The final quality obtained is proven to conform to the prevailing criteria and recommendations by maintaining the pre-set operativity and/or dimensional shapes of the set.
Professional Context
Production media
Official rates, scales of repair of metallic and plastic elements, tools of valuation, documentation on cutting and spare parts.
Products and results
Analyze repair and/or replacement processes by selecting the most appropriate methods and equipment based on the work to be performed. Evaluate the economic costs associated with any intervention, optimizing the means available in the workshop. To know the different techniques and processes for the repair of removable and fixed non-structural elements.
Information used or generated
Workshop manuals, cutting and price of spare parts, tariffs, scales, books and technical documentation and information systems, computer support, paper and microfiche.
Competition Unit 2
Denomination: PLAN THE VEHICLE STRUCTURE REPAIR PROCESSES, CONTROLLING THE EXECUTION OF THE VEHICLE STRUCTURES.
Level: 3
Code: UC0135_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Diagnose deformations in the structure of the vehicle, determining the extent of the damage and the repair process to follow for its conformation verifying that the final results are in accordance with the established qualities and times.
CR1.1 The identification of the fuse points or zones of the structure is performed, knowing the general behavior and the transmission of efforts that results in the same.
CR1.2 The damages present are analyzed, determining their scope and the forces causing them, as well as the need or not, of a bench for their conformation.
CR1.3 The sequence of operations required to perform the structure of the bench structure is determined, establishing a logical process of work.
RP2: Analyze the damage present in structural elements, determining the process of work to be followed and the tools and equipment to be used to carry out their repair or replacement, verifying that the final results are in accordance with the established qualities and times.
CR2.1 The manufacturer's technical information regarding cutting, bonding techniques, marketing of the replacement and limitations of the operation is correctly interpreted.
CR2.2 In total or partial substitutions of affected elements, cutting zones are determined according to the damage present and the technical recommendations of the manufacturer.
CR2.3 For the total conformation of the set, the necessary "shots and setbacks" are determined.
CR2.4 The assembly method to be performed is determined by relating it to the adjacent pieces and to the measurement planes of the bench.
CR2.5 The operation and final behavior of the vehicle is checked.
RP3: Adopt the necessary measures and decisions for the planning and development of carrosed and important reforms.
CR3.1 The existing technical information relating to: manufacturer's information, carrozado regulations and current legislation is selected, and where necessary, the drawings and drawings necessary to perform optional transformations are elaborated.
CR3.2 In relation to the usual procedures, the contrariities and uncertainties that can be presented are identified.
CR3.3 It is decided on the different permissions or authorizations that affect the operations to be performed on the vehicle.
CR3.4 The different spare parts, parts and accessories needed to adapt the superstructure are managed and prepared.
CR3.5 The final operativity of the set, is checked to conform to the current regulations and the reform requested by the client.
Professional Context
Production media and measuring equipment. Steering aligner. Elevators. Working moat.
Equipment and cutting tools. Pneumatic shear. Hydraulic press. Hydraulic press for riveting. MIG/MAG welding equipment. Equipment for the restoration of anti-noise and anti-corrosive treatments. Manual tool (keys, screwdrivers, dynamometer key, etc).
Products and results
Adopt measures and take decisions in the course of an intervention directly related to the type of repair, spare parts and materials to be used and equipment and facilities to be used, in order to solve any type of contingency that can be presented in the development of the activity. Decide on different permits or authorizations that affect the operations to be performed on the vehicle. Know the cutting areas, reinforcements and type of joints. Know the types of treatments and coatings to be applied. Present, adjust, and assemble different sets and auxiliary groups. Make possible modifications to the rack.
Information used or generated
Information and technical documentation, both in computer support, paper, relative to: technical information of the manufacturer, carrozado manuals, technical information of the manufacturers and distributors of spare parts, parts and accessories and/or requests of the customer. Legislation and legislation in force. Standards for the use and management of the different manufacturers of tools and equipment. Books and technical manuals.
Competition Unit 3
Denomination: PLAN THE PROTECTION, PREPARATION, AND BEAUTIFICATION PROCESSES OF SURFACES, CONTROLLING THE EXECUTION OF THE SURFACES
Level: 3
Code: UC0136_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Plan and control the processes and means necessary for the preparation, matching of surfaces and application of background paints, verifying that the final results are in accordance with the established qualities and times.
CR1.1 According to the identification of the finished level achieved in the body area, the products, means and equipment necessary for the conditioning of the substrates are selected.
CR1.2 The work process to be followed is established based on the type of substrate and type of operation to be performed, sequencing the different operations.
CR1.3 The applications made are checked to meet the quality criteria specified to allow for further application of the finishing products.
CR1.4 In the color identification of the vehicle and the elaboration thereof, it is verified that the parameters of vivacity, purity and height of the stipulated tone are met.
RP2: Plan and control the processes and means necessary for the preparation and application of the finishing paint, verifying that the final results are in accordance with the established qualities and times.
CR2.1 Depending on the type of substrate and the type of operation to be performed, the work process is determined to continue taking into account the type of vehicle and qualities to be obtained.
CR2.2 In the applications made it is proven that the prescribed specifications are met, reaching the required level of quality for each type of finish. and there is no presence of typical defects associated with painting works.
CR2.3 In the jobs that are performed, they are checked to conform to the default times.
RP3: Plan and control the processes and means necessary for the correction of damage and defects in the painting operations.
CR3.1 The damage or defects of the paint are located and identified by determining its magnitude, location and layer of affected paint.
CR3.2 The damage or defect is determined if it can be corrected by polishing or brightening, or you have to proceed to perform a more thorough operation or a repainting of the zone.
CR3.3 The final quality of the work is proven to be the appropriate one, without giving rise to any merma in the paint finish.
Professional Context
Production media
abrasives. Rotary, vibratory and roto-orbital livers. Aspiration plants. Painted cabin/oven. Mixers. Electronic balance. Machine for washing guns. Aircrafts. Aspirational planes. Degreasing and cleaning products. Infrared-drying equipment. Background paintings. Finishing paintings. Anti-corrosive products. Color tools.
Products and results
Methods, procedures, and sequence of operations defined. Parameters of operations not fully defined. Obtaining a uniform surface without the presence of water and irregularities. Obtaining a final finish with a good color matching and free of painted defects. Solve small external damages that may suffer the layers of paint. Protect by masking adjacent areas by cleaning and degreasing the areas to be prepared. The sanding and surface equalization operations are performed. The different anti-corrosive and preparation products are applied, leaving a homogeneous and suitable surface to receive the finishing paint. Finishing paint is applied by finishing the process.
Information used or generated
Manufacturer's technical manuals. Management manuals for the different teams. Technical manuals for the products. Color cards. Receiving work orders. Microfiche. Information in computer support and/or paper.
Competition Unit 4
Denomination: MANAGE VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND ASSOCIATED LOGISTICS, MEETING CRITERIA FOR EFFICIENCY, SAFETY AND QUALITY
Level: 3
Code: UC0137_3
Professional realizations and realization criteria
RP1: Manage the reception of vehicles, taking care of the clients, applying the techniques and executing the operations involved in the same.
CR1.1 In the previous diagnosis, the problem is accurate, leaving it appropriately reflected in the repair order.
CR1.2 The date of delivery of the vehicle is determined according to the availability of the workshop hours.
CR1.3 The customer is informed at all times of the situation of their vehicle, causes of the breakdown, scope of the same, costs, new breakdowns detected when performing the repair ....
CR1.4 The delivery of the vehicle is carried out, after a quality check, that ensures the correct performance of the repair and/or modification, as well as the absences of damage, cleaning ....
CR1.5 Customer satisfaction is sought, properly and appropriately, giving a good image of the company.
CR1.6 The client file is kept up-to-date being timely informed of scheduled periodic reviews of its vehicles.
CR1.7 In the description of the breakdowns or damages to perform the appraisal and/or budget, they are determined in a detailed and precise manner, the elements, subassemblies or sets to be replaced or repaired, reflecting it in the relevant documentation.
CR1.8 The quantitative cost assessment is done using the necessary documentation (tables, scales, guides, etc.).
CR1.9 The assessment is performed assuming the professional and legal responsibility involved.
CR1.10 In the budget, the complete description of the operations to be carried out, using documentation and terminology, is clearly defined in the budget.
CR1.11 In the preparation of the budget, all the variables involved are taken into account, with the total costs being accurately reflected.
RP2: Define maintenance processes in the workshop, or where appropriate, make modifications to the existing ones, in order to achieve the objectives set by the company, taking into account the human resources and means available, as well as the established quality criteria.
CR2.1 The current process object of study for its improvement, is selected, using for it, all the available timely documentation, and performing an examination of it, using the appropriate techniques in each case.
CR2.2 The new process as a normal practice, is implemented by making the necessary adjustments to it for total operability
CR2.3 Setting up periodic inspections is followed by the process, in order to detect possible deviations.
CR2.4 The objectives to be achieved in the workshop are identified with the action plan.
CR2.5 The action plan is systematically reviewed by incorporating modifications, organizational changes or new processes to optimize the available resources.
RP3: Determine repair times through a process study, in order to obtain the productivity set by the company, ensuring that the quality prescribed by the manufacturer is obtained.
CR3.1 The part of the process, or complete process to be measured, is selected by accurately recording productive and unproductive times, under existing conditions at that time
CR3.2 The time analysis is performed exclusively with objective systems (timekeeping, default times ...).
CR3.3 Unproductive times are removed by a thorough examination, without this leading to increased operator fatigue or security standards.
CR3.4 The application of the new times allows you to set the value of the unit of work, obtaining reliable indices of the performance of the labor force.
CR3.5 For each intervention the appropriate means are used, ensuring that the process is respected in all the established aspects.
CR3.6 Established a new method, the necessary training is determined for the operators in the application of the same.
CR3.7 In each intervention the established quality standards are respected.
RP4: Schedule maintenance operations based on workloads, human resources, facilities and equipment, scheduling performances and organizing maintenance of facilities and equipment.
CR4.1 In the programming for the distribution of the work are taken into account, the technical conditions (means available, ergonomics of the same, state of use ...), the humans (training of the operator, dexterity ...), the environmental conditions (light, ventilation ...) as well as the standards of safety demanded.
CR4.2 The different operations are programmed to achieve maximum performance, facilities and equipment.
CR4.3 The interventions are programmed, taking into account priority criteria, and having alternatives to any deviation.
CR4.4 The organization of work does not cause unnecessary movements of people, media or vehicles.
CR4.5 The maintenance plan for installations and equipment is organized in compliance with the standards specified by the manufacturers of the same and trying to optimize costs and times.
RP5: Define and implement a maintenance plan for large fleets or introduce improvements to the established needs, depending on the needs.
CR5.1 In the preventive and predictive maintenance of the vehicles the indications marked by the manufacturer are met.
CR5.2 The incidents generated by the environment or type of work of the vehicles, frequency and periodicity if it exists, are recorded to be taken into account in the maintenance plan.
CR5.3 Possible variants to be introduced into preventive maintenance due to the specificity of the fleet work are introduced into the maintenance plan.
CR5.4 The overall maintenance plan, or variations of the existing one, is established taking into account the productive capacity of the workshop and that preventive and corrective maintenance must be performed
CR5.5 In the definition and implementation of the maintenance plan or variations of the existing one, the objectives set by the company are taken into account.
RP6: Manage the spare parts area, organizing the physical distribution of the warehouse, controlling stocks, and completing orders.
CR6.1 According to the criteria determined by the company, the minimum of existence of parts, materials or products is established, controlling these and valuing them.
CR6.2 Orders are placed at the right time, physically checking stocks and their contrast to inventory, based on the minimum "stock" set.
CR6.3 The different variables that influence the purchase (quality, prices, discounts, delivery times ...) are analyzed and chosen or advised by that supplier or supplier, whose offer is the most favorable for the company.
CR6.4 The revisions of the spare parts area are periodically made to quickly detect material deterioration, noting stock declines and updating inventory.
CR6.5 The physical location of the various elements is best suited to the characteristics of parts or materials, minimizing the space or volume occupied, taking into account the legal norms and the rotation of products.
CR6.6 The products received, in quantity and quality, are checked to match those reflected in albarans and in case of anomalies, the incidence or claim is recorded, if applicable.
CR6.7 Handling any type of information support takes an exhaustive and timely control of the warehouse's inputs and outputs.
RP7: Fulfill and enforce workplace safety standards at work, responding in emergency conditions.
CR7.1 The established occupational health and safety plans are in accordance with the law on the prevention of occupational risks.
CR7.2 The rights and duties of the employee and the company in the field of work safety are identified as complying with the current legislation.
CR7.3 For each performance, the most appropriate equipment and safety means are identified, specifying that their use and care is correct.
CR7.4 The compliance with the labour safety standards is monitored, creating the necessary environment for their maintenance.
CR7.5 The work areas of your responsibility remain in the cleaning, order, and security conditions.
CR7.6 In an emergency situation, appropriate measures are taken, warning the appropriate person.
CR7.7 The emergency has been duly reported to other instances, and in its case the causes are analyzed, proposing the appropriate measures to avoid its repetition.
RP8: Perform proper environmental management of waste generated in vehicle maintenance and/or repair operations.
CR8.1 Maintenance processes apply the basic regulations governing waste management.
CR8.2 Different types of waste are classified taking into account their dangerousness, toxicity and environmental impact
CR8.3 The waste management process is organized through authorized managers.
CR8.4 The different waste is stored in compliance with the current regulations, and the control systems are applied.
Professional Context
Production media
Technical documentation, administrative documentation, time tables, cutting manuals, albarans, order notes .. Vehicle maintenance records. Reports issued by drivers of fleet vehicles. IT applications for workshop and appraisal management and expertise.
Products and results
Control of times. Management ratios. Control of warehouse inputs and outputs. Analysis of needs, resources and capabilities. Properly attend to the client and analyze their present and future needs. Carry out administrative and management procedures for workshop and warehouse, applying the legal regulations.
Issue repair assessments and assessments ..., programming the maintenance of large fleets. Management of human capital. Implementation of a plan to train and evaluate the results. Engage staff with company goals. Motivate staff to reach the common end. Avoid or in your case try to solve the labor conflicts. Negotiation techniques. Decision making. Planning of the distribution of the work.
Information used or generated
Official rates, price of spare parts, repair scales and painted. Computerised valuation tools. Logistics and management manuals. Specific programmes and management systems, or those of the individual car manufacturers. Regulations on Safety, Health and Environmental Impact. Legislation in force.
III. TRAINING OF THE CERTIFICATE OF PROFESSIONALISM
FORMATIVE MODULE 1
denomination: REMOVABLE AND NON-STRUCTURAL FIXED ELEMENTS
Code: MF0134_3
Professional qualification level: 3
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0134_3 Plan the repair processes for removable and fixed non-structural elements, controlling the execution of the same.
Duration: 180 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: Conforming metal elements
Code: UF1250
Duration: 60 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1 Analyze the deformations into metal elements and plan the repair processes.
CE1.1 Identify the type of material and properties of the elements to determine the repair process.
Ce1.2 Interpret the metal material tests by relating them to their nature and characteristics.
CE1.3 Analyze diagnostic techniques (visual, sanding, touch, with comb of shapes) to identify deformations.
CE1.4 Select the most convenient repair process taking into account: the constitution and shape of the vehicle, the damage situation and the type of deformation.
C2 Plan the repair processes to continue taking into account the particular circumstances.
CE2.1 Select the techniques to use in the deabolishment, stretched, collected, and veneer process.
CE2.2 Apply the different deabolishment techniques (by percussion, percussion and passive tool, from the outside, and from the outside without damaging the paint.
CE2.3 Respect for the execution of the different operations, the established security rules.
CE2.4 Return the original features to the repaired or replaced element.
C3: Manage the processes involved in the repair of aluminum metal elements.
CE3.1 Identify equipment and useful to use:
-Select the work equipment based on the deformation.
-Analyze the operation of the MIG/MAG equipment for aluminium.
-Describe the different work equipment used in aluminium repairs.
CE3.2 Identify the repair processes used to return the original shapes and bounds:
-Repair in areas of easy access, difficult access and no access.
-Abolish with a specific hammer and/or hammer.
-Conforming deformations by means of aluminum-specific collection elements.
-Repair in rivet zones or with adhesive.
CE3.3 Check that the element has recovered the original shapes and bounds.
Contents
1. Techniques used in the diagnosis of metal element repair
-Landed.
-Visual (Use of sheet metal reflexes).
-To the touch.
-Peines.
-Metal material tests.
-Wrinkle Detection.
-Influence of color: clear and dark.
-Technique for locating water in veneer zones and/or cracking in putty and sealants.
-Technique for locating misalignments in sheet metal areas.
2. Damage classification based on grade, extent, and location
-Technical to determine repairs or replacements on sheet metal parts.
-Damage Classification:
▫ Grade: mild, medium, and strong
▫ Extension: substitution
▫ Location: easy access, difficult access, and no access
-Vehicle venal value
-Task Guides.
-Rating software.
-Direct and indirect damage.
3. Check techniques for the repaired item.
-Test of tolerances and holgures.
-Control of the nerves or brittle with adjacent areas.
-Water check on repaired parts.
-Verification of sealants in panels.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: Repair and conformation of synthetic elements
Code: UF1251
Duration: 40 hours
Competition reference: This formative unit corresponds to the RP2
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1 Identify the plastic material to be treated and analyze the deformations and breakages caused.
CE1.1 Identify the type of plastic or composite material to be repaired, applying the relevant tests.
CE1.2 Select the methods used (combustion test, welding test, code identification, ...) to identify the type of synthetic material.
CE1.3 Select the repair process to use, taking into account the type of synthetic material, the efforts that the union will have to support and the viability of the repair.
C2 Plan the repair processes taking into account the material and the type of damage.
CE2.1 Perform media and template tailoring to perform the repair.
CE2.2 Identify the equipment, tools, tools and materials used in the different shaping and/or union operations are used in an appropriate manner, without being required a great skill.
CE2.3 In bonding by adhesive, make the necessary mixtures of products and catalysts.
CE2.4 Perform the repair products application by following the established process.
CE2.5 Respect for the execution of the different operations, the established security rules.
CE2.6 Return the original features to the repaired or replaced element.
Contents
1. Plastic and composite materials
-Types of plastic and composite materials:
▫ Termoplastics
▫ Termostable
▫ Elastomers
-Composition and characteristics of plastic materials.
-Testing of plastic and composite materials
-Behavior of the material to heat.
-Identification of plastic materials
-Simbology of vehicle manufacturers and products.
2. Techniques used in the diagnosis of repair of synthetic elements
-A diagnostic technique for repairs or replacements in plastic parts.
-Detection of dents and breakages.
-Detection of fissures in external areas and with nerves.
-Tensions diagnostics.
3. Methods and techniques in repair processes
-Equipment and tools needed in the repair of synthetic elements.
-Repair of thermoplastics by welding.
-Repair of synthetic materials with adhesives, resins and reinforcing materials.
-Treatment and shaping of thermoplastics deformations.
-Conformation of semi-rigid and flexible thermosetting (boards).
-Making templates and supports for repair (plotting and shaping)
-Safety standards in the repair of plastic materials
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: REMOVABLE AND NON-STRUCTURAL FIXED ELEMENTS
Code: UF1252
Duration: 80 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP3
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1 Analyze the composition of the determined body the function of the removable and fixed non-structural elements
CE1.1 List removable and fixed non-structural elements within a body.
CE1.2 Identify the required elements to be unmounted, affected, or not.
CE1.3 Describe the disassembly and assembly of the item according to the established sequence of operations.
CE1.4 Check the correct positioning (cotas) of the replacement element.
CE1.5 Perform the operations according to the specifications indicated in the technical documentation, checking the final operability of the element and respecting the stipulated safety standards.
C2 Schedule maintenance processes and appropriate techniques for replacing removable elements.
CE2.1 Determine the parameters that define the removable junction, explaining the procedures used to perform them.
CE2.2 List the characteristics of the removable join elements and associate with the characteristics of the element to be joined.
CE2.3 Identify the operation of the different lifting and closing systems, present in the market.
CE2.4 Manage the sequence of assembly and disassembly operations, following the procedure set according to technical specifications.
C3 Schedule maintenance processes and appropriate non-structural fixed element replacement techniques.
CE3.1 Determine the parameters that define the fixed attachment of nonstructural elements by explaining the procedures used to perform them.
CE3.2 Carry out the drawing and cutting operations (graphic and croquised representations for the cutting), and cutting and/or taking off (unpuncturing, cutting and taking off of fixed elements) necessary for the partial replacement of fixed non-structural elements.
CE3.3 Make the various fixed join processes used in the metal element junction.
CE3.4 Apply the most commonly used welding techniques to non-structural fixed elements:
-Power by Points
-MIG/MAG
-Soft Welding
-Structural Adhesives
CE3.5 Set the parameters involved in the welding process and the influence on the weld to be obtained.
CE3.6 Return the original features to the repaired or replaced element.
C4 Ideate constructive solutions in transformations and design of small tools.
CE4.1 Select and interpret the technical and regulatory documentation that affects the transformation of the tool.
CE4.2 Perform the sketch in each case, according to the regulations or with the good practice, with the clarity and cleanliness required.
CE4.3 Perform graphical representation in axonometric system and/or orthogonal projection.
CE4.4 Identify materials and means to be used in the design of tools, taking into account possible difficulties of execution and costs.
CE4.5 Propose constructive solutions to the problems raised during operations.
CE4.6 Justify the solution chosen from the point of view of security and its constructive feasibility.
CE4.7 Respect for the execution of the different operations, the established security rules.
Contents
1. Constitution of the vehicle
-Body types and their characteristics
-Types of cabins and chassis.
-Design of a self-supporting body in steel and aluminium.
-Description exterior and interior removable elements
-Unmountable Unions:
▫ The characteristics of the junction and the elements used.
▫ Join procedures and techniques.
▫ Joins: Screwed, pasted, rivet, stapled, articulated.
-Types of moons; technical and mounting features.
2. Outer and inner removable elements
-Technical specifications.
-Unmount and element mount processes:
▫ Screwdrivers
▫ Remachates
▫ Set with hinges.
▫ Pegados.
-Closing systems; operation, breakdowns, and handling.
-Lift systems; operation, breakdowns, and handling.
-Moons replacement processes [pasted, raised, and threaded (or similar)]
-Amovible element adjustment methods.
-Laminated lunges repair techniques.
3. Operations in the disassembly/separation and mounting of non-structural fixed elements
-Equipment and tools required for disassembly and attachment of elements.
-Methods and techniques in repair processes:
▫ Total or partial replacement.
▫ Element and weld anti-corrosive protection method.
▫ Overlap technique in cutting zones.
▫ Particularities in aluminum repairs.
▫ Manufacturer's technical rules.
▫ Preparing and adjusting the replacement.
-Graphic representation: croquized, bounded and plotted.
-Unmount/Separation Operations using cutting processes
▫ Unpunctured and/or unengaged.
▫ Item Court.
▫ Unglued of adhesives.
-Join Operations: Soldeo Methods
▫ Using welding:
-Power by Points
-MIG/MAG
-Soft Welding
-Function, characteristics, input materials, and use of equipment.
▫ Using Adhesives, Overlapping And Cocky plywood
4. Basic machining and tooling design
-Metrology; apparatus of measurement.
-Design needs or modification of small tools.
-Interpretation of the technical documentation on the tooling.
-Realization of sketches and templates.
-Graphic representations: axonometric system and orthogonal projection
-Knowledge of materials to be used by valuing their properties and machinability
-Machining procedures:
▫ Welding
▫ Roked
▫ Manual Court.
▫ Talent.
▫ Remachate.
-Security rules in the tooling design
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Unit training 1-UF1250 | 60 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF1251 | 40 | 20 |
|
| 80 | 30 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 3 must have passed the formative unit 1. The training unit 2 is independent of the other two training units.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in article 4 of the royal decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 2
Naming: VEHICLE STRUCTURES
Code: MF0135_3
Professional qualification level: 3
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0135_3 Plan the repair processes of vehicle structures, controlling the execution of the same.
Duration: 130 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: DIAGNOSIS OF STRUCTURAL DEFORMATIONS
Code: UF1253
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Analyse the constitution of the body, frame, cabin and equipment, relating the different components and the methods of assembly thereof with the manufacturing and repair processes.
CE1.1 Analyze the assembly methods of the different components of the body according to the manufacturing processes thereof.
CE1.2 Analyze the manufacturing processes of hollow bodies, by stamping.
CE1.3 Determine the processes of replacement and/or repair of structural elements, relating the constitution of the material and the manufacturing process used.
CE1.4 Determine the parameters to be checked in the vehicle structure, interpreting the corresponding technical documentation.
C2: Diagnose the deformations, simulated or real, that may suffer the structure, in order to determine the repair procedure in each case.
CE2.1 Identify on a basic structure, body, cab, or chassis:
-Direct damage.
-Indirect damage.
-Visual inspection of wrinkles.
-Actions to be exercised to return it to its original state.
CE2.2 Use the different measuring devices (commas of rods, level gauges, use of components-moons, doors ...-use of templates) to verify the structure and determine the need or not, of the bench.
C3: Establish the operations required to perform the structure and measurement of the structure in the bench.
CE3.1 Perform measurement operations on different benches by placing the tools in the reference points to measure cotas (positive control, universal, universal utlillage, calibers, level gages, with optical measurement system, electronic measurement systems).
CE3.2 Interpret the values of the parameters obtained in the checks, comparing them with the given in the technical documentation.
-Measure sheets.
-Forces.
-Moments.
CE3.3 Perform the different controls according to the established methodology, identifying the anchor zones as a function of the deformation.
-Placement of the fixing and mooring systems.
-Placement of the drawing tools.
-Placement of the security sling.
-Direction, force and placement of the shots and setbacks.
-Verification.
Contents
1. Spatial geometry of vehicles: principles of stretching.
-Forces systems: composition and decomposition.
-Resulting and resulting moments.
-Graphic representation: symbology and normalization.
-Measurement and drawing techniques.
-Stamp and assembly processes.
-Interpretation of the structural information given by the manufacturer.
-Body types and racks.
-Types of damage.
2. Equipment and tools needed in the verification
-Elevator.
-Level Gages.
-Universal Meter.
-Metro.
-Varas compas.
-The role and characteristics of the aligner.
-Structure lifting systems.
-Useful for the movement of deformed structures.
3. Methods and techniques in the verification processes. Diagnostic techniques
-Verification techniques for structural elements in floors.
-Method of structural verification in door housing.
-A method of verifying the habitacles of moons.
-Control techniques for structural deformations.
-Capo and trunk housing control method.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF VEHICLE STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
Code: UF1254
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This formative unit corresponds to the RP2
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Interpret the manufacturer's manual in total or partial substitutions by following the indications of cutting zones according to the damage.
CE1.1 Technically interpret the manufacturer's manual.
-Vehicle Dishes.
-Join techniques.
-Marketing of the replacement.
-Limitations of the operation observed by the manufacturer.
CE1.2 Determine the cutoff zones in total or partial substitutions.
-Cut zones determined by the manufacturer.
-Cutting zones in structural and non-structural elements.
-Determination and location of the cutting zone.
C2: Fully conform the assembly structure and method by following the indications of cutting zones according to the damage.
CE2.1 Determine the necessary shots and setbacks.
-Placing of the shots and setbacks.
-Forces to apply.
-Select the type of shooting angle.
CE2.2 Make shots and setbacks in the structure.
CE2.3 Apply rules for use and security in equipment and media, as well as personal security.
C3: Check the operation and final behavior of the vehicle by following the directions of the cutting zones according to the damage.
CE3.1 Check the end result of the repair and its behavior.
-Check for tolerance in adjacent parts.
-Check the adjustment of the repaired or replaced parts.
-Control the tightness in crystals or moons affected in the repair.
CE3.2 Verify the absence of noise from inside.
Contents
1. Concepts associated with the technical interpretation of the manual
-Method of using the manufacturer's manual.
-Manufacturer's sketch of croquis.
-Theory of deformability and conformability.
-Method of using computer programs
-Types of join techniques.
-Selection of the replacement.
2. Using benches for structure conformation
-Placing of shots and hiccups.
-Anchor techniques.
-Body stretching techniques.
-Application of forces.
-Application of the shooting angles.
-Placement of hydraulic shooting cats.
3. Technical documentation of the vehicle structures.
-The manufacturer's symbology.
-Vehicle manufacturer's symbology.
-Control sheets.
-Control sheets of the suspension turrets.
4. Tools and tools used in the positioning and control of structures.
-Special and universal anchor Mordaza.
-Pantographic pointer.
-Use of the bench by positive, universal control, by level gages, by optical system of measurement and by electronic system of measurement.
-Cadenas approved by the manufacturer.
-Stretched mugs.
-Tall for traction.
-Manual traction accessory for Mcpherson turrets.
-Security slings.
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: CARROSED PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT AND IMPORTANCE REFORMS
Code: UF1255
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP3
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Plan and develop the work system employed in vehicle and carrosed reforms.
CE1.1 Organize the workshop by making plans for the distribution of work areas, analyzing the implementation requirements, relating the workloads to the human and material resources.
CE1.2 Organize the spare parts area, planning the physical distribution of a warehouse and stock control, performing annual inventory and generating a database with computer media.
C2: Analyze the technical information regarding regulations, legislations and procedures to be performed in the operation of the assembly.
CE2.1 Select the manufacturer's information on carrosed and important reforms.
CE2.2 Select the Carrosed Regulations and Current Legislation.
CE2.3 Select the computer program related to the set.
CE2.4 Elaborate sketches and drawings to perform transformations.
-Identify commonly produced problems.
-Decide on the different permissions or authorizations that affect the operations to be performed.
C3: Check and verify that the development of the final operation conforms to the current regulations and the reform requested by the client.
CE3.1 Check the different spare parts depending on the manufacturer, the location, the placement and the resistance.
CE3.2 Verify that the established reform work has been carried out, meeting the required quality standards.
CE3.3 Verify that the structural elements of the vehicle are within the tolerance.
CE3.4 Check that the default settings have been followed in the different jobs.
CE3.5 Verify that the affected mechanical systems have been repaired or replaced correctly.
CE3.6 Check that the aesthetic aspect and the quality of the finished work give the vehicle the necessary characteristics.
Contents
1. Planning and development
-Workshop Organization: Planning.
-General workshop facilities.
-Planning of the work structure in the areas of body, paint and mechanics.
-Method of control of operational and management ratios.
-The organization method of the spare area.
-Computer systems associated with planning and development.
2. Methods and techniques in the selection of information
-Method of drawing and drawing drawings.
-Method of using the manufacturer's information.
-Computer programs: Use and domain.
-Final operability check technique.
3. Final operability of the reform
-Test technique for different spare parts.
-Structural element verification technique.
-Method of checking the default settings.
-Verification of mechanical systems.
-Technical verification of the final aspect and quality of the reform.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1253 | 50 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF1254 | 50 | 20 |
| 10 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 2 must have passed the formative unit 1
To access the formative unit 3 must have passed the formative unit 2
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 3
Designation: PREPARATION AND BEAUTIFICATION OF SURFACES.
Code: MF0136_3
Professional qualification level: 3
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0136_3 Plan the processes of protection, preparation and beautification of surfaces, controlling the execution of the same.
Duration: 180 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: PLANNING, CONTROLLING, AND EXECUTING THE SURFACES PROTECTION, PREPARATION, AND EQUALIZATION PROCESSES
Code: UF1256
Duration: 60hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1 as regards the quality control of products and techniques applied for the equalization of surfaces.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Plan the processes to be carried out taking into account the occupation levels of the different work areas of the workshop and the workload of the different operators.
CE1.1 Identify the areas affected by corrosion processes, analyze the causes that cause it, and determine the proper maintenance and restoration process.
CE1.2 Get the necessary information, to determine the possible causes that have caused the corrosion processes.
CE1.3 Determine the most appropriate procedure to apply based on:
-Level of finish or desired quality.
-Available time
-Product Rentability
C2: Keep up to date the documentation and technical information of the products and systems of work developed by the different suppliers.
CE2.1 Get technical information from the different manufacturers of products for the body repainting.
CE2.2 Select the most appropriate products and systems of work, depending on the equipment, type of vehicles and quality level desired.
C3: Reconstitute the different layers of protection and matching of surfaces of a vehicle:
CE3.1 Identify the various layers of protection given to surfaces, helping with sanding operations.
CE3.2 Determine the products to use in the application of each layer.
CE3.3 Determine the thicknesses and tonality of the layers, according to typology of the problem and the final color of finish, explaining the maintenance procedure to be applied for the preparation of surfaces.
C4: Apply the techniques inherent in the development of the processes of protection, equalization and beautification of both metallic and plastic surfaces and composite materials.
CE4.1 Use the specific equipment, tools, and tools required to carry them out.
CE4.2 Perform the sequence of operations following the established procedure, according to technical specifications.
CE4.3 Respect for the implementation of the various operations, the established personal and environmental safety standards.
C5: Perform relevant quality controls at different stages of the process of protecting and preparing surfaces to be painted
CE5.1 Verify that all traces of corrosion have been removed in the repair process and that a thorough cleaning of the affected area has taken place.
CE5.2 Verify that the thickness of the applied layers is appropriate.
CE5.3 Check that in the preparation and application of the different products the requirements marked by the manufacturers of the same products are met.
CE5.4 Check that the operations performed allow an appropriate anchor to the finishing product layers.
Contents
1. Corrosion protection techniques
-Coatings with oils and fats.
-Selside with waxes.
-Coatings with paints and varnishes.
-Plastic Box:
▫ Immersion PVC Box
▫ Coating with polyethylene by sintering
-Metallic coatings
▫ Galvanized
▫ Stated, empleated, cinched
▫ Metalized to the flame.
▫ Laminate coating.
-Anodic protection
-Banderized Fosftied
-Pavonado.
2. Quality control
-Vehicle status control when entering the paint shop:
▫ Detection and limitation of the area to be repaired.
▫ Pre-repair detection that might affect the job assigned.
-Quality control in the repair phase:
▫ Using the appropriate products to the chosen method of repair.
▫ Preparing and applying products, following manufacturer's standards:
-Prior treatment or surface preparation.
-Mix of products.
-Application
-Treatment for the application of finishing products
-Quality control in the final phase:
▫ Anchor
▫ Cover
▫ Extensibility
▫ Thickness
▫ Flexibility
▫ Tonality
3. Individual personal protective equipment
-Dust masks.
-Carbon masks on.
-Chemical protection gloves:
▫ Latex
▫ Polyurethane
-Mono and polyamide polains.
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: PLANNING AND CONTROLLING THE BEAUTIFICATION AND DECORATION PROCESSES OF SURFACES
Code: UF1257
Duration: 60hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP2.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Plan the processes to follow in the process of preparation of mixtures to obtain the color demanded in each case, using the colorimetric techniques.
CE1.1 Identify the properties of different types of varnish (paints and lacquers) and choose the most suitable for each type of repair.
CE1.2 Identify the type of vehicle paint (monolayer, bilayer ..., and other finishing effects), and color code, following technical specifications
CE1.3 Identify and select the products to be mixed, depending on their characteristics, interpreting the technical documentation of the paint manufacturer.
CE1.4 Apply the methods of obtaining colors by means of mixtures from basic colors.
CE1.5 Make the product mix respecting the rules of proportionality and viscosity, handling electronic and mixing scales.
CE1.6 Apply test pieces and perform tests in the chromatic chamber, making color adjustments in the necessary cases.
C2: Control the surface masquerading methods, selecting the most appropriate method based on quality, efficiency, installation speed and drying system.
CE2.1 Identify affected areas and items and need to be masked.
CE2.2 Identify and interpret the technical documentation, depending on the type of support and the equipment to be used.
CE2.3 Differentiate the different methods of masking from surfaces the necessary useful materials and tools.
CE2.4 Check the quality of the work done before proceeding to the application of finishing paint products: definition of edges, absence of bags, wrinkles and ends of masquerading material that can be moved when spraying.
CE2.5 Remove the material used in the mask, taking into account the environmental criteria for the selection of waste.
C3: Perform the various application processes of lacquers and varnishes achieving the prescribed finish.
CE3.1 Meet the various parameters pre-fixed in the operations performed (mixtures, drying times, oven temperature ...)
CE3.2 Proper use of equipment, tools, tools and materials used in different surface treatment operations.
CE3.3 Return the original features, to the surfaces treated by the necessary operations.
Contents
1. Colorimetry.
-Elementary principles of colorimetry:
▫ Daltonism
▫ Light and color
▫ Additive mixing, subtractive mixing
▫ Metamerism
-The color on the body.
▫ Solid Monocapa
▫ Solid and metallized Bicapa
▫ Perked Tricas
▫ Effect
2. Directions for mixing and matching colors:
-Chromatic Colors
-Acromatic Colors
-Neutral Colors
-Metallized and Perked Colors
-Color codes and their formulation
3. Processes of repainted in repair.
-Painted process: 1K, 2K ....
-Process of painting the water.
-Process of painting aluminum parts.
-Complete vehicle painting process.
-Large surface painting process.
-Finish Paints:
▫ Monocapa solid colors.
▫ Bicapa solid and metallized colors.
▫ Tricapa colors perside and effect.
4. Painted tools and equipment.
-Equipment for generating, distributing, regulating and purifying compressed air.
-Application Teams:
▫ Conventional suction or gravity guns
▫ High Transfer Rate: HVL or Hybrid
-Drying equipment.
▫ By hot air convection
▫ By Short or Medium Wave IR
▫ By UV
-Auxiliary equipment used in the paint area:
▫ Pistol Cleaners
▫ Recyclers
▫ Windows
▫ Paper packers
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Denomination: PLANNING AND CONTROL OF DEFECT CORRECTION PROCESSES IN SURFACE FINISHING AND DECORATION.
Code: UF1258
Duration: 60 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to the RP3
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Plan the process to be followed in the repair of the damage of the vehicle taking into account the type of material (metallic, plastic, composites, elastomers) following the techniques of the casting processes of the defect presented.
CE1.1 Identify the damaged materials and classification of the same (metallic, internal and external plastic, composites and elastomers).
CE1.2 Select the appropriate techniques for the painting of metal parts, internal.
CE1.3 Select the area in which the intervention will be performed: fast or normal ironing section, taking into account the regular duty cycle.
CE1.4 Make corresponding interventions to eliminate damage and defects.
C2: Repair the damage according to the techniques of the processes according to the defect presented.
CE2.1 Prepare the surface by applying the gear and anchor primers that allow a quality finish.
CE2.2 Perform a correct surface preparation that allows the application of the final paint.
CE2.3 Prepare the paint with the maximum approximation of tonality.
CE2.4 Catarizing and diluting according to the environmental conditions for a correct application of the product.
CE2.5 Painting through different application techniques the area that corresponds to a satisfactory result.
CE2.6 Perform the maintenance of the equipment and useful work according to the technical specifications.
C3: Control the final quality of the work done and the reconditioning of the unpainted surfaces.
CE3.1 Select the products and the methodology to be followed to polish and open the parts adjacent to the repair, depending on the need for abrasion to be applied.
CE3.2 Select the appropriate products for the cleaning and garnishes of product remains or pulverized and return the tonality to the same.
CE3.3 Choose the most appropriate method to perform crystal cleaning.
CE3.4 Perform final quality control:
-Homogeneity in the tone of gums and garnishes
-Equality in the tonality and brightness of the painting
-Absence of defects due to poor preparation or application of products. (stripes and edges of sanding, bleeding, deconchones, waters, boiled, silicones ...)
CE3.5 Verify the correct assembly of logos, anagrams and license plates, operation of electrical and mechanical elements as well as bodywork that have had to be dismantled to perform the repair.
Contents
1. Finish paint damage causes
-Defects due to inadequate surface preparation:
-Defects due to incorrect mixing, application and drying of products:
-Defects by improper use of the airfoil:
-Defects for improper maintenance of equipment and installations:
-Defects due to lack of control over application environmental conditions:
▫ Humidity
▫ Temperature
▫ Dust
-Defects by external agents:
▫ Biological Agents
▫ Climatics
▫ Industrial source
▫ Mechanics
2. Defect correction techniques
-Correction of defects without repainting:
▫ abrasion and polishing techniques.
-Correction of defects with repainted:
▫ Full Repainted
▫ Partial repainted or blurring techniques.
3. Final quality control prior to delivery of the vehicle
-Door, cab and bumper franchises.
-Proper operation of door and post closures.
-Adjustment and operation of lighting systems and direction indicators.
-Vehicle quality (proper sealing of doors, capos, and crystals).
-General cleaning of the vehicle.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Unit of training 1-UF1256 | 60 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF1257 | 60 | 20 |
|
60 | 20 | 20 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 2 must have been passed the formative unit 1.
To access the formative unit 3 must have been passed the formative unit 2.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
FORMATIVE MODULE 4
Naming: MANAGEMENT AND LOGISTICS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: MF0137_3
Professional qualification level: 3
Associated with the Competition Unit:
UC0137_3 Manage vehicle maintenance and associated logistics, meeting criteria for efficiency, safety and quality.
Duration: 130 hours
FORMATIVE UNIT 1
Naming: PLANNING FOR VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND WORKLOAD DISTRIBUTION PROCESSES
Code: UF1259
Duration: 50hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP2, RP3, RP4, RP5.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Develop vehicle maintenance plans by analyzing the variables involved, taking into account methods and time.
CE1.1 Describe time analysis techniques, such as timekeeping and default times, among others.
CE1.2 Analyze the unproductive times of a process, taking into account available information, safety standards and operator fatigue.
CE1.3 Define a new process or improve the existing one, considering the data obtained in the previously performed study.
CE1.4 Define the appropriate means for each intervention, ensuring that the process is respected in all its aspects.
C2: Develop distribution plans for the work, relating the workloads to the operation of the facilities and equipment.
CE2.1 Describe the maintenance, predictive, corrective, and preventive classes, defining the characteristics each of them has.
CE2.2 Define the concept of workload, describes the different tipos.CE2.3 Schedule maintenance processes, taking into account where, when and how, taking into account available means and priority criteria.
CE2.4 Perform activity frequency curves.
CE2.5 Perform a work distribution plan, taking into account the technical and human conditions.
CE2.6 Perform a preventive and predictive maintenance chart of equipment and facilities, considering the periodicity, costs, and opportunity
C3: Develop maintenance plans for large fleets, analyzing their own needs and requirements.
CE3.1 Determine the parameters that need to be redefined in the scheduled maintenance, depending on the characteristics of the work that each vehicle has to perform.
CE3.2 Introduce variations in scheduled maintenance, advised by vehicle manufacturer.
CE3.3 Determine the optimal facilities, equipment and human resources to achieve the most efficient maintenance of the fleet.
C4: Organize maintenance plans, consulting a vehicle history.
CE4.1 Perform tables or graphical representations reflecting incidents and periodicity.
CE4.2 Determine the stopping time of each vehicle due to periodic reviews, depending on the maintenance operations to be performed.
CE4.3 Define the maintenance plan, taking into account the marked objectives and productive capacity of the workshop.
C5: Organize the training of personnel by relating the objectives to be achieved.
CE5.1 Describe the objectives to be achieved through a comprehensive overview of all procedures.
CE5.2 Make efficiency graphs taking into account the types and achievement of targets.
CE5.3 Define the training needs of staff, on a new method, to achieve the required productivity and quality.
Contents
1. Maintenance plans
-Time Analysis Techniques.
-Default time systems.
-Activity valuation techniques.
-Workers ' displacement study techniques.
-Work methods and movements.
2. Distribution of the job
-Job Distribution Plans.
-Maintenance classes: predictive, corrective, and preventive.
-Workloads.
-Types and documents.
3. Definition and organization of maintenance plans
-Parameters involved in scheduled maintenance.
-Incident control.
-Periodic reviews.
-Changes to an established maintenance plan.
-Historical studies
-Stop time.
-Programming and realization of the maintenance plan.
-Management of replacement vehicles.
4. Organization of staff training
-Method definition techniques and their implementation.
-Operators instruction techniques.
-Job by objectives
FORMATIVE UNIT 2
Naming: MANAGING THE RECEIPT OF VEHICLES
Code: UF1260
Duration: 50 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP1, RP6, RP8.
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Organize the operation of a spare parts section to establish physical distribution and stock control by analyzing management models.
CE1.1 Describe the techniques for determining the optimal stock of the warehouse.
CE1.2 Generate a warehouse stock database, with computer media, applying it to determine the order point and stock valuation.
CE1.3 Perform the annual inventory of a warehouse taking into account the different variables (outputs, inputs, percentage of damaged parts, among others).
CE1.4 Plan the physical distribution of a warehouse, taking into account: features of parts, demands of these, legal norms and product rotation.
CE1.5 Describe the security rules that need to be applied in a vehicle spare store.
C2: Organize the shopping schedule by describing the variables involved in the purchase and to automatically mechanize the process.
CE2.1 Describe the purchase variables to be taken into account when placing an order: quality, prices, discounts, delivery times, among others, to choose the most favorable offer.
CE2.2 Generate a vendor database, with computer media, applying it to schedule orders and review of the receipt of goods.
C3: Develop reports, budgets, and other documents using computer programs by analyzing the results.
CE3.1 Perform breakdown prediagnosis by determining the areas of the workshop to which repairs are assigned.
CE3.2 Informatise the worksheets indicating the date of delivery of the vehicle based on workloads and capacity of the workshop, report of the situation of the vehicle, including the causes of the breakdown, gravity, costs, new breakdowns detected when performing the repair, among other concepts.
CE3.3 Generate a customer database, with computer media, by applying it to schedule reviews, billing, and other documents.
CE3.4 Confecting quotes using computer programs
CE3.5 Make a report of the vehicle situation, informing the customer of the repairs that will not be carried out.
C4: Manage the treatment of waste generated in vehicle maintenance and repair operations by identifying the pollutants and describing their effects on the environment.
CE4.1 Describe the legal regulations governing waste management to vehicle maintenance workshops
CE4.2 Identify waste generated in a vehicle maintenance workshop by determining its dangerousness.
CE4.3 Carry out a classification structure for waste according to its toxicity and environmental impact.
CE4.4 Identify applicable legal limits.
CE4.5 Define the waste management process through authorized managements.CE4.6 Describe the treatment and control systems of the different waste in the area of the workshop.
CE4.7 Describe the facilities and equipment necessary for the management of the waste to the workshop.
CE4.8 Manage Selective Collection of Waste.
C5: Develop quality plans for the operation of a workshop, relating to the efficiency of management, the degree of service satisfaction and the environmental impact with the implementation of established regulations.
CE5.1 Describe standards for quality certification and environmental management to vehicle maintenance workshops.
CE5.2 Describe certification, audit, and post-audit processes.
CE5.3 Set the indicators to assess the quality of the environmental management and customer satisfaction processes.
CE5.4 Determine the procedure to carry out an internal audit to determine the quality achieved in the processes that are carried out in the workshop.
CE5.5 Establish the procedure to carry out an internal audit to determine the effectiveness of environmental management.
CE5.6 Develop the procedure to perform an internal audit to determine customer satisfaction.
CE5.7 Describe a plan to improve quality, environmental management and customer satisfaction.
Contents
1. Shopping programming
-Inventories.
-Stock valuation.
-Warehouse types and their physical organization.
-Protection and conservation of the goods.
-Warehouse management software.
-The optimal purchase point.
-Annual purchases and sales targets.
2. Waste management
-Legal regulations for waste management.
-Classification and storage of waste according to hazard characteristics.
▫ Treatment and collection of waste.
▫ Quality and environmental management plans and standards.
-Regulations for the definition of the quality of the processes to the vehicle maintenance workshops.
-Regulations on the specific environmental management of the workshops.
▫ Certification.
▫ Audit.
▫ Post-audit.
-Customer satisfaction indicators.
3. Preparation of technical documentation
-Worksheets: Data collection.
-Distribution of workloads.
-Software for the management of the workshop.
-Computer programs for budgeting:
▫ Damage Assessment
▫ Introduction of data in computer programs
▫ Budgeting
4. Repair advice
-Communication with the client.
-Vehicle receipt and delivery protocol
-Workshop management software:
▫ Repair Order Management Programs
▫ Historical Management Programs
▫ Repair Assessment Programs
FORMATIVE UNIT 3
Naming: PREVENTION OF OCCUPATIONAL AND ENVIRONMENTAL RISKS IN VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
Code: UF0917
Duration: 30 hours
Competition reference: This training unit corresponds to RP7 and RP8
Assessment capabilities and criteria
C1: To analyze the prevention and safety measures regarding the actions of the handling of the installations and equipment, contained in the safety plans of the companies of the sector.
CE1.1 Specify the aspects of prevention and safety regulations related to the risks arising from the handling of installations and equipment.
CE1.2 Identify and evaluate risk factors and associated risks.
CE1.4 Describe the requirements of the work areas and the procedures for their preparation, determining the specific occupational risks involved and their corrective actions.
CE1.5 Analyze first aid requirements in different accident scenarios.
CE1.6 Define the rights and duties of the employee and the company in terms of prevention and safety.
C2: Apply the security plan by analyzing the company's prevention, safety and environmental protection measures.
CE2.1 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the identified risks, including the selection, conservation and correct use of the individual and collective protective equipment.
CE2.2 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Identify people in charge of specific tasks.
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
-Proceed for the evacuation of buildings in accordance with established procedures, in case of emergency.
CE2.3 Adopt the basic sanitary measures, first aid techniques and transfer of accidents in different accident scenarios.
C3: Apply the company's environmental protection and waste recycling measures.
CE3.1 Specify aspects of environmental regulations related to the risks arising from the activity of the workshop, such as noise, vibration, and the handling of combustible products, lubricants, paints and solvents, combustion gases, welding gases, waste materials, lijas, electrodes, etc.
CE3.2 Identify and assess the associated environmental risk and risk factors.
CE3.3 Apply preventive and corrective measures to the risks identified, including the correct handling of products and their storage, use of individual and collective protective equipment.
CE3.4 Apply the action protocols to possible emergencies, such as:
-Evacuate the work zone
-Report the disfunctions and the dangerous cases observed.
CE3.5 Apply Selective Collection of Waste:
-Identify containers and clean points.
-Respect the signage and waste recycling protocols.
CE3.6 Maintain work zones in order and cleaning to prevent incidents.
Contents
1. Basic concepts about health and safety at work
-Work and health.
-Professional risks.
-Risk factors.
-Consequences and damages derived from the job:
▫ Work accident.
▫ Professional illness.
▫ Other pathologies derived from work.
▫ Economic and operational repercussions.
-Basic regulatory framework for occupational risk prevention:
▫ The labor risk prevention law.
▫ The prevention services regulation.
▫ Scope and legal bases.
▫ Health and safety directives at work.
-Public agencies related to health and safety at work:
▫ National agencies.
▫ Autonomic bodies.
-General risks and their prevention
▫ In the handling of tools and equipment.
▫ In handling systems and installations.
▫ On storage and transport of loads.
▫ Exposure to physical, chemical, or biological agents.
▫ The fire.
▫ Physical fatigue.
▫ Mental fatigue.
▫ Job dissatisfaction.
▫ Collective protection.
▫ Individual protection.
2. Acting in emergencies and evacuation
-Types of accidents.
-Primary evaluation of the crashed.
-First aid.
-Socorrism.
-Emergency situations.
-Emergency and evacuation plans.
-Support information for emergency action.
3. Environmental hazards and waste handling
-Risks arising from the storage and handling of fuels, fats and lubricants.
-Risks associated with noise, vibration and combustion gases produced in the workshop.
-Action protocols to mitigate environmental risks.
-Types of waste generated.
-Storage in containers and bags, waste signalling.
-Waste management.
-Order maintenance and cleanup of the work zone.
Methodological guidelines
Distance training:
| Total duration in hours of the training units | No. of maximum hours susceptible to distance | |
|---|---|---|
| Formative Unit 1-UF1259 | 50 | 20 |
|
Unit 2-UF1260 | 50 | 20 |
| 10 |
Sequence:
To access the formative unit 2 must have been passed the formative unit 1.
The UF3 is cross-sectional, so it can be programmed independently.
Access criteria for students
They will be those established in Article 4 of the Royal Decree that regulates the certificate of professionalism of the professional family to which this annex accompanies.
NON-LABOR PROFESSIONAL PRACTICE MODULE FOR BODY AREA PLANNING AND CONTROL
Code: MP0263
Duration: 40 hours
Assessment Capabilities and Criteria
C1: Determine the processes involved in the repair of metal and aluminum vehicle structures.
CE1.1 Identify the equipment and tools to use.
CE1.2 Participate in the shaping of the structure and the assembly method by following the indications of cutting zones according to the damage.
CE1.3 Determine the repair processes used to return the original shapes and bounds:
-Repair in areas of easy access, difficult access and no access.
-Abolish with a specific hammer and/or hammer.
-Conform deformations by means of collected elements, and specific elements in the case of aluminum.
-Repair in rivet zones or with adhesive.
CE1.4 Check that the item has recovered the original shapes and bounds.
CE1.5 Analyze the operation of MIG/MAG equipment in conventional and aluminum repair.
C2: Schedule and perform the processes of preparation, equalization and beautification of surfaces and quality control of the works performed.
CE2.1 Collaborate in the programming of the different operations to be performed to return the initial features to the bodywork, in terms of:
-Anti-corrosive protection,
-Disposal of irregularities on the surface of the plate
-Application of beautification products.
CE2.2 Perform the processes that have been scheduled to conform to the budget parameters: time, materials to be applied, and the expected quality level.
CE2.3 Perform quality controls at each work phase.
CE2.4 Schedule the operations required for defect removal.
CE2.5 Manage the occupation of the different work areas of the workshop to insert and perform those jobs that have not exceeded the quality controls.
C3: Track vehicle maintenance processes by making planning for them or by optimizing existing ones
CE3.1 Participate in the elaboration of the planning of the processes taking into account methods, times, operation of equipment and installations.
CE3.2 Check that repair times are adjusted as defined in the process by making estimates for those operations that are not determined.
CE3.3 Make charts of effectiveness, depending on the specific and dear times.
CE3.4 Study the unproductive times, trying to shorten them while respecting the process and taking into account the fatigue of the operator.
CE3.5 Analyze the information and means available for the development of the process, contributing improvements, or optimizing the new process to be implemented.
CE3.6 Define the new process, or improvement of the existing one, determining the necessary means to lead them.
CE3.7 Define the training needs of the staff on the new method, to achieve the stipulated quality standards, and the required productivity.
CE3.8 Motivate the others to see change as an opportunity to improve.
CE3.9 Identify your weak points or areas of improvement.
C4: Participate in the company's work processes, following the rules and instructions set out in the work center.
CE4.1 Behave responsibly in both human relationships and in the work to be done.
CE4.2 Respect the procedures and rules of the workplace.
CE4.3 Undertake with diligence the tasks according to the instructions received, trying to adapt to the work rhythm of the company.
CE4.4 Integrate into the production processes of the workplace.
CE4.5 Use the established communication channels.
CE4.6 To respect at all times the measures of risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection.
Contents
1. Managing the work areas
-Vehicle flow analysis in the body and paint shop
-Study the workloads of each area
-Analysis of repair times
2. Planning for vehicle maintenance processes
-Workshop management software
-Elaboration of work distribution plans, taking into account the available loads and means
-Elaboration of vehicle maintenance plans and large fleets
-Assessment and documentation associated with each work stage
-Maintenance operations
-Handling diagnostic equipment
-Applying repair techniques
-Interpretation of technical documentation
3. Reception and delivery of vehicles
-Vehicle receipt and delivery protocol
-Workshop management software
-Setting up effective communications
-Applying techniques for obtaining and transmitting information
-Telephone attention
-Client loyalty
-Corporate image
-Claims Management
4. Integration and communication in the workplace
-Responsible behavior in the job center
-Respect to the procedures and rules of the job center
-Interpreting and diligently performing the instructions received
-Recognition of the organization's production process
-Using the communication channels set in the job center
-Adequation to the company's work rate
-Tracking risk prevention, occupational health and environmental protection regulations
IV. PRESCRIPTIONS FOR TRAINERS
| Required Accreditation | Professional experience required in the scope of the competency | |
|---|---|---|
| MF0134_3: Unstructural fixed and fixed elements | • Licensed, engineer, architect or degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles | 2 years |
|
MF0135_3: Vehicle structures | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree of degree or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles | 2 years |
|
MF0136_3: Preparing and beautifying surfaces | • Licensed, engineer, architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles | 2 years |
|
MF0137_3: Management and logistics in vehicle maintenance | • Licensed, engineer, architect or degree title or other equivalent titles. • Diplomate, technical engineer, technical architect, or corresponding degree title or other equivalent titles | 2 years |
V. MINIMUM SPACES, FACILITIES, AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
| Surface m2 15 pupils | Surface m2 25 pupils | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
45 | 45 | 60 | ||
|
Workshop | 210 |
|
| 220 |
| 250 |
250 | |||
|
250 | 30 |
| 30 | |
| 50 |
50 | |||
| 10 |
| 10 | 10 |
| M1 | M2 | M3 | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
|
X |
X | X | X | |
| Body Workshop | X |
|
|
|
|
Workshop |
| X |
|
|
| Workshop painting | X | X | X |
|
| Colorimetry Lab |
|
| X |
|
|
for components job | X | X | X | X |
|
store | X | X | X | X |
| Equipment | |
|---|---|
|
Classroom | -Audio-visual equipment -Network-installed PCs, projection canon, and internet -Specialty-specific software -Rotuder-write Pizarras -Rotafolios -Classroom material -Table and chair for trainer -Messes and chairs for students |
|
workshop | -Box tools and tools for the disassembly of basic electromechanical elements -Different parts extraction and placement equipment -MIG/MAG welding equipment and aluminium adaptations. -Soft welding equipment. -Point welding equipment -Multi-function equipment for deabolishment from outside -Basic tools in sheet metal and aluminum shaping -Cutting, separation and sanding tools. -Basic tools for replacing conventional and aluminum nonstructural fixed elements. -Special products in the work with aluminum. |
|
Workshop | -Elevator. -Universal Meter -Use the banner for positive control. -Use the universal banner. -Use the level of the level gages. -Use the optical system to measure the optical system. -Use the electronic metering system. -Manufacturer-approved chains. -Stretched mugs. -Manual traction accessory for Mcpherson turrets. -Tirants to avoid misruns. -Security slings. -Shooting tower. -"L" type shooting. -Banking with integrated towers. -Positive control basket. -Universal Banque. -Manufacturer-approved chains. |
|
Workshop | -Painted and Dried Cabin. -Applicant plane. -Infrared, short wave drying equipment. -Carro with masked equipment. -Handgun washing machine. -Handgun washing machine for water-based paints. -Recycler of solvents. -A pneumatic and polished equipment. -Aerography equipment. -Plotter for vinillos and the like. -Media for parts in preparation. -Cavalry for painting parts. -Conventional aerographic of suction and gravity. -Hybrid suction and gravity airfoil. -suction and gravity HVLP airfoil. -Aerographic piston for suction and gravity rigging. -Airfoil for retouching. -Broken pneumatic eccentric livers. -pneumatic orbital livers. -Pneumatic roto-orbital livers. -Portable Aspirators. -Aspiration Brake. -Painter tool set. -Rotating Screw Compressor. -Portable dust extraction equipment. -Lava emergency |
|
Colorimetry Lab | -Electrical Horno for Drying Specimens. -chromatic camera -Meter of paint thicknesses. -Cups to measure viscosity DIN, FORD. -Box for paint |
|
Store for work components | -RF Armarium for flammable storage. -Metal Armaries. -Shelving systems for storage of boxes. -Shelving systems for door storage, capes. |
|
store | -Containers for sorting out polluting waste: paint debris, contaminated paper, plastic and metal containers. |
It should not be interpreted that the different learning spaces identified must necessarily be differentiated by means of closure.
The facilities and equipment must comply with the corresponding industrial and sanitary sanitary regulations and will respond to measures of universal accessibility and safety of the participants.
The number of units that must be available for the tools, machines and tools specified in the training spaces, will be sufficient for a minimum of 15 students and must be increased, if necessary, to attend to a higher number.
In the event that the training is addressed to persons with disabilities, the adaptations and reasonable adjustments will be made to ensure their participation in equal conditions.
